Docstoc

2003-04 catalog

Document Sample
2003-04 catalog Powered By Docstoc
					                                                                                                                              CONTENTS




  CONTENTS
Academic Calendar, 2005-2006 .................... 2


Welcome to Lycoming .................................. 4


The Campus ................................................... 6


Admission to Lycoming .............................. 10


Financial Matters ......................................... 13


Student Affairs ............................................. 22


Academic Policies And Regulations ........... 25                               The general regulations and policies stated in this
                                                                           catalog are in effect for the 2005-06 academic year.
                                                                           Freshmen beginning their first terms at Lycoming College
                                                                           in the fall of 2005 or the spring of 2006 are thereafter
The Academic Program ............................... 32                    governed by the policies stated in this catalog.
                                                                              If changes are made in subsequent editions of the
                                                                           catalog to either distribution requirements, major, or minor
                                                                           requirements, a student has the option of following the original
The Curriculum ........................................... 52              program as outlined in the catalog in effect at the time of
                                                                           matriculation as a freshman or of following a subsequent
                                                                           catalog version. The College always reserves the right to
                                                                           determine which requirements apply.
The Board of Trustees ............................... 168                      If a student interrupts his or her education but returns
                                                                           to the College after no more than one academic year has
                                                                           passed, he/she will retain the same requirements in effect at
                                                                           the initial date of entrance. A student who withdraws from
                                                                           the College for more than one year will, upon return, be
Administrative Staff/Faculty ..................... 169                     required to complete the requirements currently imposed
                                                                           upon other students of the same academic level. A student
                                                                           who transfers to the College with advanced standing will be
                                                                           subject to the requirements imposed upon other students at
The Alumni Association ............................ 187                    the College who have attained the same academic level.
                                                                           Post-baccalaureate students will be subject to the
                                                                           requirements stated on page 32.
                                                                               Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change
Index .......................................................... 189       the policies and procedures stated in this catalog without
                                                                           prior notice to those who may be affected by them. The
                                                                           provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an
Communication With                                                         irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the
                                                                           student and Lycoming College.
Lycoming College ..................................... 192


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                                               1                                          LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACADEMIC CALENDAR




 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2005 - 2006




                                                      Fall Semester        Spring Semester
Bills are due                                           August 12             December 16
Residence halls open for freshmen                  August 26 at 9 a.m.     January 8 at 8 a.m.
Residence halls open for upperclassmen             August 27 at 10 a.m.    January 8 at 8 a.m.
Classes begin first period                              August 29               January 9
Processing of drop/add begins                           August 29               January 9
Re-registration fee of $25 applies
                                                      September 2              January 13
after this date
Last day for drop/add                                 September 2              January 13
Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades          September 2              January 13
Last day for submission of final grades for
courses for which Incomplete grades were                October 7
recorded in Spring, May, and Summer terms
Last day for submission of final grades
for courses for which Incomplete                                               February 17
grades were recorded in Fall semester

Early Assessment reports due at noon                   October 10              February 20

Residence halls close at 6 p.m. for
spring recess                                                                  February 24
Residence halls open at 10 a.m.                                                  March 5
Classes resume first period after
                                                                                 March 6
spring recess
Enrollment deposit deadline                                                      March 7

LYCOMING COLLEGE                               2                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                            ACADEMIC CALENDAR



                                                            Fall Semester                 Spring Semester
Last day to withdraw from courses                             October 31                       March 20
Last days to withdraw from          1st 7 weeks             September 28                      February 8
half semester courses.              2nd 7 weeks             November 16                         April 5
Residence halls close at 9:00 p.m. for
                                                            November 22
Thanksgiving recess
Residence halls open at 10 a.m.                             November 27
Classes resume first period after
                                                            November 28
Thanksgiving
Final examinations begin                                     December 12                        April 24

Semester ends at 5:00 p.m.                                   December 16                        April 28

Residence halls close at 6:00 p.m.                           December 16                        April 28

                                                                SPECIAL SESSIONS
                                                                     Summer     Summer
                                                        May Term
                                                                    Session #1 Session #2
Residence halls open noon - 3:00 p.m.                      May 7                June 4                July 9
Classes begin                                              May 8                June 5               July 10
Last day for drop/add                                      May 9                June 7               July 12
Last day to elect audit and pass/fail grades               May 9                June 7               July 12
Last day to withdraw from courses                         May 24               June 26               July 31
Term ends                                                  June 2               July 7             August 11
Residence halls close at 4:00 p.m.                         June 2               July 7             August 11


Special dates to remember:
Freshman First Weekend .... August 26, 27, 28           Admissions Open House .............. February 18
New Student Convocation .............. August 26        Spring Recess .............. February 24 - March 5
Labor Day (classes in session) ..... September 5        Accepted Students Day ........................ April 2
Family Weekend .................. September 23-25       Honors Convocation ............................ April 9
Creative Arts/Science Saturday ....... October 1        Good Friday (no classes) ................... April 14
Homecoming Weekend ................ October 7-9         Baccalaureate ......................................... May 6
Admissions Open House ............... October 15        Commencement ..................................... May 7
Long Weekend (no classes) ...... October 21-23          Memorial Day (no classes) .................. May 29
Admissions Open House ........... November 12           Independence Day (no classes) .............. July 4
Thanksgiving Recess ............ November 22-27

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            3                                         LYCOMING COLLEGE
WELCOME TO LYCOMING




  WELCOME TO LYCOMING COLLEGE




   Lycoming College is a liberal arts and              tion rate for first time freshmen is 67%. More
sciences college dedicated to providing the            information is available on the Registrar’s
type of learning that can be used for a lifetime       homepage under Student Right to Know.
in a supportive, residential environment that             Lycoming students are superbly prepared to
fosters individual growth and close interper-          meet the challenges of life through an aca-
sonal relationships.                                   demic program that includes both breadth of
    U.S. News and World Report has recog-              study in the humanities, arts, social sciences
nized the Carnegie reclassification of Lycom-          and natural sciences and depth of study in at
ing. The College is one of the national liberal        least one area of concentration.
arts colleges in the United States. It has also           Those areas of concentration include
been included in the "Colleges of Distinction"         bachelor of arts degree in 31 major fields, and
guidebook. The reasons are simple.                     a bachelor of science degree in four major fields.
    All of Lycoming’s resources and faculty               Those who intend to continue in medicine,
are dedicated to the undergraduate education           dentistry, law, the ministry or teaching will
of just 1500 students. Classes are small and           find excellent preprofessional preparation.
all faculty members teach. With a 13 to 1              Through a number of cooperative programs
ratio of students to faculty, classes of five or       with other colleges and universities, Lycoming
ten students are not uncommon, while even              students can study engineering, forestry,
large introductory courses average about 30            environment, podiatric medicine, optometry,
students. This means abundant opportunities            and medical technology—while still enjoying
for individual attention by a faculty truly            the benefits of a small college experience.
committed to teaching. The average gradua-
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   4                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                 WELCOME TO LYCOMING




They can also study at Oxford Brookes Univer-
sity in Oxford, England; Anglia Polytechnic
University in Cambridge, England; Regent’s
College in London, England; Lancaster
University, Lancaster, England; CUEF
Université Stendhal-Grenoble 3 in Grenoble,
France; Tandem International School in Madrid,
Spain, and Estudio Sampere at Alicante,
Madrid, Puerto de Santa Maria, Solamanca,
Spain, and Cuenca, Ecuador; or spend a
semester at Westminster Business School in the
University of Westminster, London, England;
Washington, D.C., or New York City through             theatre productions, participate in a nationally
a number of other cooperative programs.                acclaimed choir and concert band, as well as
    One of Lycoming’s most popular and                 organize and manage their own social
successful ways of blending career planning            fraternities and sororities, special interest
with a liberal arts education is through its           clubs and campus-wide social events.
internship program. Close to one-third of                  Student athletes can try out for 19 different
Lycoming students gain real job experience as          varsity sports (10 for men, 9 for women) or
part of a semester course load. The                    participate in the College’s strong intramural
Williamsport area is particularly rich in              program.
internship opportunities in business, commu-               Students are admitted free to productions
nication, government, health and social                at the Community Arts Center. Student-run
services. The close relationship between the           programs have brought in Adam Sandler,
College and the community has given                    Fiona Apple, Eve6, Sugar Ray and Brian Adams.
Lycoming students a chance to roll up their                Lycoming’s campus lies near the historic
sleeves and gain resume-enhancing experi-              downtown of Williamsport, a city best known
ence rather than mere observation.                     as the birthplace of Little League Baseball
    Most students complete their program of            and the site of its annual international
study in four years, usually by taking four            championship. The greater metro area has a
courses each fall and spring semester.                 population of approximately 75,000.
However, students may take one course                      The rolling hills and forestlands of
during Lycoming’s May Term and from one                northcentral Pennsylvania provide some of
to two courses in each Summer Term.                    the state’s best scenery, as well as hiking,
    Perhaps one of the most important                  camping, kayaking, and other outdoor
qualities of Lycoming is its feeling of                recreation. Yet Lycoming is less than a four-
community. Lycoming is a truly residential             hour drive from New York City, Philadelphia,
college where all students, with the exception         Washington, D.C., Baltimore, and Pittsburgh.
of close commuters, live on campus in one of               The College enjoys a relationship with the
the College’s residence halls or apartments.           United Methodist Church and supports its
    The quality of campus life is enriched by          tradition of providing an education to persons
a variety of extracurricular activities in which       of all faiths. The College is firmly committed
Lycoming students gain valuable leadership             to a policy of cultural diversity and expects its
training.                                              students to work together in an atmosphere of
    Students produce a newspaper, run the              respect and tolerance.
campus radio station, edit a yearbook, mount

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           5                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
HISTORY • THE CAMPUS




 HISTORY
    The history of Lycoming College has been
one of continual evolution. The institution
has been, at one time or another, an elemen-
tary and secondary school, a seminary, a
junior college and at present a four-year
liberal arts college—going through four
names in the process. Sold by an independent
board to the Methodists (who bought it as a
source of revenue), it is today an independent
non-profit, private college, affiliated with the
United Methodist Church.
    Its beginning dates back to 1812—making
Lycoming one of the 50 oldest colleges in
America—when it was founded as the
Williamsport Academy, that city’s first
elementary and secondary school. The school
was administered by a Board of Trustees
made up primarily of staunch Presbyterians.
    By 1848, Williamsport had its own public
school system well in place, and the private
school was becoming a financial burden. A
visionary circuit preacher, Rev. Benjamin H.
Crever, persuaded the Methodists to buy the
school. They named the institution Dickinson
Seminary and offered college preparatory
                                                         THE CAMPUS
courses. Rev. Crever is considered the                    Twenty-one buildings sit on Lycoming’s
school’s true founder.                                 42-acre campus. Most buildings have been
    The seminary operated as a private                 constructed since 1950. All are easy to reach
boarding school until 1929 when a college              from anywhere on campus. A 12-acre
curriculum was added and it became the                 athletic field and football stadium lie a few
Williamsport Dickinson Junior College, the             blocks north of the main campus.
first private junior college in Pennsylvania.              Modern buildings include the eight
    In 1947, the junior college became a four-         residence halls, which contain clean and
year degree-granting college of liberal arts
                                                       comfortable double rooms; the student union;
and sciences. It adopted the name Lycoming,
                                                       and the physical education/recreation center.
derived from the American Indian word
                                                       Up-to-date facilities include the library, the
“lacomic,” meaning “Great Stream,” a name
                                                       theatre, the planetarium, the computer center,
that enjoys local popularity as the name of the
county, a township and a creek.                        an electronic music studio, a photography
    In its evolutionary tradition, Lycoming            laboratory, and an art gallery. The computer
College continues to expand its programs and           center opened in 1969; the art gallery and the
improve its academic excellence with each              physical education center opened in 1980.
decade, seeking to provide a truly distin-             An arts center was renovated and opened in
guished baccalaureate education to every               1983. The Heim Biology and Chemistry
student entering its doors.                            Building opened in 1990.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   6                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                          THE CAMPUS




Residence Halls                                      Academic Buildings
Asbury Hall (1962) — Named in honor of               Academic Center (1968) — The most
Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of The             architecturally impressive complex on campus,
United Methodist Church in the United                the Center is composed of four buildings: the
States, who made the circuit through the             John G. Snowden Memorial Library, Wendle
upper Susquehanna District in 1812, the year         Hall, the Mary L. Welch Theatre and Laborato-
Lycoming (then the Williamsport Academy)             ries, and the faculty office building.
opened its doors. Asbury Hall houses fresh-
                                                     John G. Snowden Memorial Library (1968)
man students in a co-educational environ-
                                                     www.lycoming.edu/library Named after the
ment.
                                                     late state senator John G. Snowden, the library
Crever Hall (1962) — Honors Lycoming’s               supports the classroom and research needs of
founder and first financial agent, the Rev.          the college community. An active informa-
Benjamin H. Crever, who helped persuade the          tion literacy program promotes the use of print
Baltimore Conference to purchase the school          materials, Web-accessed academic information
from the Williamsport Town Council in 1848.          resources, and other information technologies.
                                                     The collection includes more than 180,000
East Hall (1962) — Houses five chapters of
                                                     volumes, approximately 1000 periodical titles,
Lycoming’s fraternities and sororities. The
                                                     and a strong reference collection suitable to an
self-contained units contain student rooms
                                                     undergraduate education. The Snowden
and a chapter room.
                                                     Memorial Library also houses the Lycoming
Forrest Hall (1968) — Honors Dr. and Mrs.            College Archives and the archives of the
Fletcher Bliss Forrest and Anna Forrest              Central Pennsylvania Conference of the
Burfeindt ’30, the parents and sister of             United Methodist Church.
Katherine Forrest Mathers ’28, whose                    Academic Resource Center — Located on
generosity established the memorial.                 the third floor of the Snowden Library, it is
Rich Hall (1948) — Honors the Rich family            operated by a professional staff and peer tutors
of Woolrich, Pennsylvania. It houses health          during the academic year. The Center offers
services, dining services office, security,          workshops, tutoring, and counseling.
residence life, and buildings and grounds.
                                                        Art Gallery (1980) — Located in the
Rich is an all female hall.
                                                     northwest corner of the first floor of the John G.
Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest residence           Snowden Memorial Library, the gallery contains
hall honors the late J. Milton Skeath, profes-       exhibits year-round, including shows of
sor of psychology and four-time Dean of the          student work.
College from 1921 to 1967. It houses
freshmen in a co-educational environment.            Wendle Hall and Laboratories (1968) —
                                                     Named after the George Wendle family, a
Wesley Hall (1956) — Honors John Wesley,             College benefactor, this building contains 21
the founder of Methodism. This building              classrooms, the psychology laboratories, four
houses a number of Greek organizations, as           computer laboratories with 75 terminals
well as independent students.                        available for use, and spacious Pennington
Williams Hall (1965) — Honors Mary Ellen             Lounge, an informal meeting place for
Whitehead Williams, mother of Joseph A.              students and faculty. The language, business,
Williams, of St. Marys, Pennsylvania, whose          mathematics and physics laboratories are
bequest established the memorial.                    situated on the upper floors.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         7                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE CAMPUS




   Computer Graphics Lab (1993) — This                  Heim Biology and Chemistry Building
computer lab features state-of-the-art                  (1990) — The $10 million Heim Building is
Macintosh and Windows XP graphic stations               one of the finest undergraduate science
equipped with animation, photographic                   facilities in the East. The three-level structure
imaging, paint and draw programs for both               totals more than 63,000 square feet and
fine arts and commercial design students,               contains state-of-the-art biology and chemis-
along with desktop publishing and a number              try laboratories, lecture halls, seminar rooms,
of other programs for general use. Most                 a science reading area and a greenhouse as
programs are updated annually.                          well as classrooms and faculty offices.
    Detwiler Planetarium (1967) — Named                 Clarke Building & Chapel (1939) —
after the Detwiler family, it is located in the         Lycoming’s landmark honors Martha B.
lower level of the Academic Center. In                  Clarke, a benefactor. The building contains
addition to serving as an instructional tool to         Clarke Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel,
astronomy students, the planetarium has                 music classrooms, practice studios, an
become a community resource, hosting close              electronic music studio and faculty offices.
to 2,000 youngsters in Boy Scout, Girl Scout,
school and church groups each year.                     Mary Lindsay Welch Honors Hall (2005)
                                                        Lycoming has refurbished a 19th century
    Mary L. Welch Theatre (1968) — The
                                                        landmark into an Honors Hall that includes a
204-seat thrust-stage theatre is one of the
                                                        100-seat recital hall, offices for the United
finest in the region. Theatre facilities include:
                                                        Campus Ministry Center and a small chapel.
the college box office, state-of-the-art lighting
and sound systems, costume and scene shops,
a make-up room, and an additional black-box             Administration Buildings
performance space known as the Downstage                Drum House — Built in 1857 the Admis-
Theatre.                                                sions House is the oldest building on the
                                                        campus. It was first occupied by a Presbyte-
Faculty Office Building (1968) — Contains               rian parson.
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a 735-seat             The Admissions House was bought by the
lecture hall.                                           College in 1931, along with 28 other dwell-
                                                        ings, and in 1940 became the President’s
Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 1983) —
                                                        home. John W. Long occupied it for the
Contains studios, sculpture foundry, wood-
                                                        remainder of his tenure and D. Frederick
shop, printmaking shop, classrooms, lecture
                                                        Wertz lived in the house from 1955 until
hall, offices.
                                                        1965 when the College made the property at
Photography Laboratory (1984) — Located                 325 Grampian Boulevard the President’s
in the lower level of the Fine Arts Center, it is       home. The building was then converted for
fully equipped for both black and white and             use by the Fine Arts Department. In 1983,
color photography.                                      when a new Fine Arts facility was completed,
                                                        the department was relocated and the house
Communication Center (1987) — The focal                 was vacant until 1987 when it was restored by
point of the facility is a fully equipped               college craftsmen to its original Federalist
broadcast quality television studio and control         design under the supervision of Carol Baker
room. The building also houses an editing               ’60, who kindly volunteered her services
room, classrooms, faculty offices, the FM               during the year-long reconstruction. The
radio station and the student newspaper                 Admissions House was a gift of the W.F.
office.                                                 Rich family.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    8                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                       THE CAMPUS




John W. Long Hall (1951) — Named after               Handicapped Accessibility
President Long (1921-1955), it houses the
                                                     Most facilities at Lycoming College are
administrative offices, including those of the
                                                     accessible to those with limited mobility. In
President, Dean, Treasurer, Dean of Student
                                                     addition, the College will make special
Affairs, Registrar, Alumni and Parent
                                                     accommodations whenever necessary to meet
Programs, College Relations, Institutional
                                                     the needs of any of its students.
Advancement, Publications, and Financial
Aid. It includes a reception area.
                                                      INFORMATION
                                                     Information
Recreation Facilities                                 TECHNOLOGY SERVICES
Physical Education and Recreation Center
(1980) — Includes the George R. Lamade                   Lycoming College provides at least one
Gymnasium, which contains basketball and             computer network access point in each
other courts; a six-lane swimming pool; all-         classroom, office, and for each student on
purpose room; sauna and steam room; weight           campus. In addition the Snowden Library and
room; offices; classrooms, and the Alumni            other key areas have wireless network access.
lounge.                                              Students have access to a variety of on-
                                                     campus and worldwide resources through the
Recreation Center (2004) — Is a two-story            network.
54,000 square foot space with four basketball            The College maintains five public use
courts. It has a suspended indoor running            computer labs, four labs populated with
track, an expanded weight room, and a new            Windows-based computers, and one lab with a
exercise and fitness area.                           mix of Windows and Macintosh computers.
Robert L. Shangraw Athletic Complex                  The Windows labs utilize several popular
(1998) — Located at David Person Field, the          software packages, such as Office 2003
17,700 square foot complex contains locker           (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Access, FrontPage
facilities for football, lacrosse, soccer, and       2003), Internet Explorer, and SPSS. The
softball in addition to a fully-equipped             Graphics Lab utilizes Microsoft Office,
athletic training room. The press box can            PageMaker, Photoshop, Quark XPress,
accommodate radio and television coverage            Illustrator, FrontPage 2002, Macromedia
and includes a hospitality suite for guests of       Director and DreamWeaver. Laser printing
the president. There is bleacher sitting for         and DVD/RW drives are available in all labs,
2,000 fans.                                          with scanning available in the Graphics Lab.
                                                         Lycoming College maintains a site on the
Wertz Student Center (1959) — Named                  World Wide Web where our URL is
after D. Frederick Wertz, President (1955-           www.lycoming.edu. Any student who is
1968), it contains the Main Dining Commons,          enrolled at Lycoming receives an e-mail
Jane Schultz Room, Burchfield Lounge, a              account as well as a network account with
recreation area, game rooms, Jack’s Corner,          disk space for a personal Website and
bookstore, post office, student activities           common files. These are backed up daily.
office, Career Development Center, Counsel-          Academic departments maintain home pages
ing Center, and student organization offices.        and resources under the Lycoming College
                                                     home page(s). Many faculty post departmental
                                                     home pages and communicate with their
                                                     students by e-mail.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         9                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE CAMPUS • ADMISSION TO LYCOMING




                                                        ADMISSION
                                                        TO LYCOMING
                                                         Lycoming College welcomes applications
                                                      from prospective students regardless of age,
                                                      sex, race, religion, financial resources, color,
                                                      national or ethnic background. Visit us at
                                                      www.lycoming.edu

                                                      Admission Decision Criteria
                                                         Admission to Lycoming College is
                                                      competitive. Applicants are evaluated on the
                                                      basis of their academic preparation, talents,
                                                      and interests, as well as the College’s capacity
                                                      to help them achieve their educational
                                                      objectives and career goals.
    Any student living in a residence hall can            Successful candidates for admission have
become part of the Residential Networking             typically completed a college preparatory
Program, ResNet. They then have direct                program in high school which includes four
access to the Lycoming network and the                years of English, three years of math, two
Internet. There is wireless access in the             years of foreign language, two years of natural
library and many areas throughout campus.             or physical science, three years of social
Students need properly configured computers           science, and two years of academic electives.
to give them access to e-mail and the World               In addition, successful admission candi-
Wide Web from their rooms.                            dates generally place in the top two-fifths of
   A Linux and a Windows server provides              their high school graduating class, and have
access to a variety of different software             better than average SAT1 or ACT scores.
packages to students in the Mathematical and             From time to time supplemental materials, as
Computer Sciences. — www.lycoming.edu/it              well as a personal interview, may be required
                                                      prior to the determination of admissibility.
ResNet (1995) - Any student who has a
computer is encouraged to bring it to campus.         Admission Application
To join the Residential Networking Program,
ResNet, a student must have a computer that
                                                      Filing Period
meets a minimal set of standards. A laptop               Applications for the fall semester will be
computer with wireless is highly encouraged,          accepted from June 1st of the preceding year
                                                      through April 1st of the year in which studies
and discounts are available through the
                                                      are to begin. Applications for the spring
College Bookstore. ResNet is part of a single
                                                      semester are accepted from the preceding
consolidated Technology Fee of $175 per
                                                      May 1st through December 1st.
semester that will cover your access to                  Applications, when complete, are re-
ResNet, cable TV and the telephone basic fee.         viewed and evaluated on a rolling basis.
For full instructions you can go to                   Generally, applicants are notified in writing
www.lycoming.edu/it/resnet.htm.                       regarding the outcome of their applications
                                                      within three weeks following the receipt of all
                                                      required materials.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 10                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                            ADMISSION TO LYCOMING




Freshman Applicants                                Lycoming College. At least 16 credits in the
    Freshman applicants must complete the          major area must be taken at Lycoming College.
following steps:                                       Additional information regarding the
                                                   transfer of college credit appears on page 26.
1) Submit the completed Lycoming College               Transfer applicants must complete each of
    Admission Application.                         the following steps:
2) Submit the non-refundable $35
    application fee.                               1) Complete and return application with the
3) Provide official transcripts of all high            $35 application fee.
    school and post-secondary school studies       2) Provide official transcripts and course
    (whether or not completed).                        descriptions or catalogs from each post-
4) Submit official results of the SAT1 or ACT.         secondary school attended. Students who
5) Submit two personal letters of                      have accumulated less than 24 semester
    recommendation.                                    hours or 36 quarter hours must also submit
6) Submit a written essay.                             high school transcripts. (Official results of
                                                       the SAT1 or ACT may also be required.)
Transfer Applicants                                3) Submit the Transfer Student Admission
    Lycoming College considers applications            Report. (It will be sent to you upon
from students who have attended other post-            application).
secondary educational institutions. These          International Applicants
applicants must have earned a cumulative
                                                       Prospective students who are neither
grade point average of at least 2.00 (on a 4
                                                   citizens nor permanent residents of the United
point scale) in transferable courses at the post-
                                                   States are welcome to apply for admission.
secondary institution(s) attended.
                                                       International applicants must complete each
    Credit will be granted only for courses
                                                   of the following steps:
which have a grade of “C-” or higher.
                                                   1) Submit the completed Lycoming College
Courses with a non-grade such as “P” or “S”
                                                       Admission Application.
will not transfer. Lycoming College will
                                                   2) Provide certified true copies of all
determine which courses are appropriate for
                                                       secondary (and when applicable, post-
transfer and is under no obligation to accept
                                                       secondary) transcripts, mark sheets, diplo-
any course. Lycoming College does not have
                                                       mas, and certificates in the original lan-
a statute of limitations but it reserves the right
                                                       guages, as well as in English (when the
to refuseto accept some courses for transfer in
                                                       originals are not in English). Transla-
which the content is outmoded. The Registrar
                                                       tions of non-English materials must be
will consult the academic department(s)
                                                       certified as true and correct.
involved. Final determination of transfer
                                                   3) Submit two letters of recommendation.
credit will be made by the Lycoming College
                                                   4) Provide proof of the ability to read, write,
Registrar based on official transcripts only.
                                                       and speak English at the college level as
Transfer courses will be shown on the
                                                       evidenced by a TOEFL score of at least
Lycoming transcript with the symbol “T.”
                                                       500, or 173 for computer assessment test.
   Applicants may transfer up to 64 semester
                                                   5) International students who are currently
credits at the Lycoming College 100 and 200
                                                       studying in the United States must be
level and up to 32 semester credits at the
                                                       “in-status” with the United States De-
Lycoming College 300 and 400 level for a
                                                       partment of Justice, Immigration and
total of 96 credits. Students must complete the
                                                       Naturalization Service. They must also
final 32 credits of the degree program at
                                                       be eligible to transfer to Lycoming College.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                        11                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
ADMISSION TO LYCOMING




   Please note that the minimum amount                 content is outmoded. The Registrar will
required for each academic year of study               consult the academic department(s) involved.
(September through April) at Lycoming
College is U.S. $28,000. Summer living                 Confirmation of Intent
expenses (May through August) average                  to Enroll at Lycoming
an additional U.S. $4,500, and are not                     Admitted applicants are asked to confirm
included in $28,000 amount.                            their intent to enroll for the fall semester no later
                                                       than the preceding May 1st, or by December 1st
Note To All Students:                                  for the following spring semester by submitting
1) If there is additional information that             the appropriate deposit. New commuting
   would be helpful to the Admissions Com-             students are required to submit a $200 Confirma-
   mittee in reviewing your application, please        tion Deposit. New resident students are
   indicate it on a separate piece of paper.           required to submit the $200 Confirmation
2) If you are 24 or older, the requirement for         Deposit, as well as a $100 Room Reservation
   the SAT1 or ACT assessment may be waived.           Deposit. Admitted international applicants are
                                                       required to submit all applicable deposits prior
Readmission to the College                             to the issuance of the I-20 form.
   Students who leave the College for one or               Deposits are non-refundable after May 1st
more semesters, including those who leave              for the following fall semester, and December
mid-term, must apply for readmission. To               1st for the following spring semester.
apply for readmission, one must:
a. Complete the Application for Readmission            Student Orientation
   form;                                                  All new students are required to attend one of
b. Return the completed form to the Office of          three summer orientation sessions with at least
   the Registrar; and                                  one parent before they enroll in the fall. The
c. If applicable, have official transcripts for        purpose of the program is to acquaint the new
   all course work completed elsewhere sent            students and their parent(s) more fully with the
   to the Registrar.                                   College so that they can begin their Lycoming
   The College reserves the right to deny              experience under the most favorable circum-
readmission to former students. Reasons for            stances. Students will take placement tests, meet
denial of readmission requests include, but are        their academic advisor, and register for fall
not limited to: lack of residence hall space,          classes. Information on orientation is mailed to
unresolved financial obligations, academic             new students after they confirm their intention
deficiencies, unresolved disciplinary action,          to enroll.
charges or convictions related to criminal             Withdrawal of
activity.                                              Admission Offers
   Students will be informed in writing about             Lycoming College reserves the right to
the decision regarding readmission. To                 withdraw offers of admission when:
confirm readmission, students must send a              1) information requested as part of the
non-refundable deposit of $200 to the Office of           admission application process is not provided
the Registrar. Students who intend to live in             by applicants,
the residence halls must send an additional            2) misrepresentation of fact to the College by
$100 room reservation deposit and complete                applicants occurs during the application
the appropriate forms in the Office of                    process,
Residence Life.                                        3) the conduct of applicants is not in keeping
    Lycoming College does not have a statute              with the ethical or moral standards as set
of limitations but it reserves the right to                forth in the Lycoming College Catalog or
refuse to accept some courses in which the                 the Lycoming College Student Handbook.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  12                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                            ADMISSION TO LYCOMING • FINANCIAL MATTERS




                                                         FINANCIAL MATTERS
                                                      Expenses for the
                                                      Academic Year 2005-2006
                                                         The following expenses are effective for the
                                                      regular fall and spring semesters. The College
                                                      reserves the right to adjust fees at any time.
                                                      The fees for each semester are payable
                                                      approximately two weeks prior to the start of
                                                      classes for the semester as indicated on the
                                                      semester bill.
                                                      Fees          Per Semester         Per Year
                                                      Tuition          $11,840.00      $23,680.00
                                                      Room Rent         $1,678.00        $3,356.00
                                                      Board             $1,593.00        $3,186.00
                                                      Total            $15,111.00      $30,222.00
                                                      One-Time Student Fees
                                                      Application Fee ........................................ $35
Admissions Office                                     Confirmation/Contingency Deposit ....... $200
Location and Hours                                    Room Reservation Deposit .................... $100
   Prospective students and their families are
encouraged to visit the campus for a student-         Freshman Fee ......................................... $200
conducted tour and an interview with an               Part-Time Student Fees
admissions counselor, who will provide                Application Fee ........................................ $35
additional information about the College and          Each Unit Course ................................ $2,960
answer questions.                                     Additional Charges
   The Office of Admissions is located on             Non-refundable Enrollment Deposit for
Washington Boulevard and College Place. For             Returning Students ............................... $100
an appointment, telephone 1-800-345-3920,             Activity Fee per year .............................. $125
ext. 4026 or (570)321-4026, write the Office          Applied Music Fee (half-hour
of Admissions, Lycoming College,                      per week per semester) ........................... $300
Williamsport, PA 17701, or visit                      Technology Fee (resident students)
www.lycoming.edu/admiss/requests/                      (per semester) ....................................... $175
scheduli2.htm                                         Cap and Gown ........................ prevailing cost
                                                      Laboratory Fee per Unit Course.. $10 to $150
Office hours are:
Weekdays                                              Parking Permit ................................... $60/120
September through April:                              Practice Teaching Fee
8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.                                 (payable in junior year) ........................ $400
May through August: 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.            R.O.T.C. Uniform Deposit
                                                       (payable at Bucknell University) ........... $75
Saturdays
                                                      Transcript Fee ........................................... $4*
September through April:
                                                      Placement Retest Fee ............................... $25
9:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon
May through August: appointments by                   Single Room Charge .......... additional charge
request.                                                                             of $671 per semester.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         13                                         LYCOMING COLLEGE
FINANCIAL MATTERS




    The tuition covers the regular course load               Both the Confirmation and Room Reserva-
of twelve to sixteen credits each semester               tion Deposits are refundable prior to the start
excluding band, choir, theater practica and all          of the first semester of attendance if the
scholars' seminars. Any credits over 16 will             official withdrawal date is not later than May 1.
be charged at a rate of $740 per credit.
                                                         Enrollment Deposit — A non-refundable
Resident students must board at the College
                                                         enrollment deposit of $100 is required of all
unless, for extraordinary reasons, authoriza-
                                                         current full and part-time degree-seeking
tion is extended for other eating arrange-
                                                         students each spring in order to pre-register
ments. If a double room is used as a single
                                                         for the subsequent fall semester courses and/
room, there is an additional charge of $671
                                                         or to participate in the annual room selection
per semester. The estimated cost for books
                                                         process. This deposit is applied against the
and supplies is up to $800 per year, depend-
                                                         fall semester bill.
ing on the course of study. Special session
(May Term and Summer Session) charges for                Partial Payments
tuition, room, and board are established
                                                            For the convenience of those who find it
during the fall semester.
                                                         impossible to follow the regular schedule of
*$4 for first copy; $1 for each additional copy
                                                         payments, arrangements may be made with
requested at the same time. No charge for
                                                         the College Bursar for the monthly payment
currently enrolled full-time students. No tran-
                                                         of College fees through various educational
scripts will be issued for a student or alumnus
                                                         plans. Additional information may be
whose financial obligation to the college has
                                                         obtained from the Treasurer's Office or
not been satisfied.
                                                         Admissions Office.
Entry Fees and Deposits                                  Lycoming College Withdrawal
Application Fee — All students applying for              Refund Policy
admission must submit a $35 application fee.
This charge defrays the cost of processing the               Students wishing to withdraw from the
application and is nonrefundable.                        College during the semester should meet with
                                                         the Assistant Dean for Freshmen or the
Confirmation/Contingency Deposit - All                   Assistant Dean for Sophomores to ensure that
full-time students who have been notified of             student financial and academic records are
their admission to Lycoming College are                  properly closed. The effective date of
required to make a $200 Confirmation                     calculating refunds shall be: the date that the
Deposit to confirm their intention to matricu-           student begins the withdrawal process or
late. The Deposit is held until Graduation or            provides official notification to the institution
upon written notification submitted to the               of his or her intent to withdraw; the midpoint
Registrar's office at least two weeks prior to           of enrollment if the student drops out without
the start of each semester. Any remaining                notification to the institution; or the date, as
deposit balance will be refunded after all               determined by the institution, that the student
financial obligations to the College have been           withdraws due to illness or accident.
satisfied.                                                   Students withdrawing will receive a
    Resident students must remit an additional           prorated refund for tuition, fees, room and
$100 Room Reservation Deposit. The room                  board, less an administrative fee of $100 and
deposit is applied against the comprehensive             any unpaid charges, according to the
fees billed for the first semester of attendance.        following schedule:


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    14                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                      FINANCIAL MATTERS




                     Refund      Charge                 Federal Return of Title IV
During Week 1         90%          10%                  Funds Policy
During Week 2         80%          20%
During Week 3         70%          30%                    The 1998 Reauthorization of the Higher
During Week 4         60%          40%                  Education Act requires the college to calcu-
During Week 5         50%          50%                  late a Return of Title IV Funds on all federal
During Week 6         40%          60%                  financial aid recipients who withdraw
After 6th Week        0%          100%                  (officially or unofficially) from all classes on
                                                        or before the 60% attendance point of the
    Please note that there is no refund after           semester. A prorata schedule is used to
the sixth week of the semester. For                     determine the percentage of the semester the
Freshmen, the refund period will be extended            student attended based on the withdrawal
into the week that early assessment grades              date/last date of attendance.
are distributed to students and parents.                  The student’s withdrawal date is the date
    Comparative schedules apply to the May              the student began the withdrawal process; the
and Summer terms.                                       date the student otherwise provided the
    The calculated refund will be reduced by            school with official notification of the intent
any unpaid charges. Any balance remaining               to withdraw; or for the student who does not
will be billed to the student. Unpaid student           begin the school’s withdrawal process or
account balances will be charged interest at            notify the school of intent to withdraw, the
the rate of 1% per month on the month end               mid-point of the payment period of enroll-
balance until the account is paid in full.              ment for which the Title IV assistance was
Should legal collection become necessary, all           disbursed (unless the institution can docu-
costs of collection will be added to the                ment a later date).
balance due.                                              The percentage of the semester the student
    Lycoming College’s institutional refund             attended is calculated as follows:
policy is distinct and different from the
Federal Return of Title IV Funds policy. The                     Number of days in attendance
adjustment of institutional financial aid will                   Number of days in semester
follow the Withdrawal Refund Policy stated
                                                          The number of days counted includes all
above. The College is required to perform a
                                                        calendar days in the semester including
Return of Title IV Funds calculation for all
                                                        weekends and holidays, but excludes college
federal financial aid recipients who withdraw
                                                        breaks of five or more days.
(officially or unofficially) from all classes on
                                                          The percentage of the semester the student
or before the 60% attendance point of the
                                                        attended is used to calculate the amount of the
semester. Students who are subject to the
                                                        student’s earned versus unearned federal aid
return of any Title IV funds may result in a
                                                        funds. The unearned portion of federal aid
balance due to the College, Federal
                                                        funds must be returned to the appropriate aid
Government or both. See Federal Return of
                                                        program in accordance with the Order of
Title IV Funds Policy for further explanation
                                                        Return as mandated by law. The Order of
on the return of federal funds.
                                                        Return is: Federal Unsubsidized Loan,
    Students who drop individual course(s)
                                                        Federal Subsidized Loan, Perkins Loan,
during the add/drop period will receive 100%
                                                        Federal PLUS Loan, Federal Pell Grant,
adjustment to tuition and fees. Students who
                                                        Federal SEOG Grant, Other Title IV Aid.
drop individual courses(s) after the add/drop
                                                            The college is responsible for returning the
period will not receive any adjustment to
                                                        lesser of Unearned Title IV Aid or Unearned
tuition and fees.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           15                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
FINANCIAL MATTERS




Institutional Charges. Unearned Institutional           repayment of unpaid charges, and may be
Charges are based on the determined percent-            considered in Overpayment status with
age of the semester the student did not attend.         USDOE.
The College is responsible for its return of                Students who wish to rescind their official
funds first, followed by the student’s return of        withdrawal submitted to the college must do
funds.                                                  so within one week of the original withdrawal
   The student is responsible for returning:            and notification must be provided in writing
                                                        to the Office of Financial Aid.
          Amount of Unearned Title IV Aid
                                                            Students who stop attending all classes
        - Amount of Aid School Returns
                                                        without officially withdrawing from the
          Amount Student Returns                        college will be subject to a Return of Funds
                                                        calculation at the end of the semester, based
    The College must return its portion of
                                                        on their last date of attendance as determined
Unearned Title IV aid (loan and grant) to the
                                                        by the Office of Financial Aid.
appropriate federal program within 30 days
                                                            State Grant programs have varying
from the student’s withdrawal date as deter-
                                                        regulations concerning refunds, but most will
mined by the Office of Financial Aid. If the
                                                        require at least a partial refund of the State
amount the student returns includes a federal
                                                        Grant. If the student has received a Lycoming
loan, the student is responsible for repayment
                                                        Grant, a portion of the student’s refund also
of the loan in accordance with the terms of the
                                                        will be repaid to the Lycoming Grant pro-
loan program. If the amount the student
                                                        gram. This will reduce, or in many cases
returns includes grant aid, the student must
                                                        eliminate, the amount of the refund the
repay 50% of the grant money received, rather
                                                        student otherwise would receive.
than 100%.
    The student must return unearned grant aid
to the college within 45 days from the date of          Non-Payment of Fees Penalty
notification. Failure by the student to return              Students will not be registered for courses
or make arrangements to return unearned                 in a new semester if their accounts for
grant aid to the College within 45 days will            previous attendance have not been settled.
result in the student being reported to the U.S.        Diplomas, transcripts, and certifications of
Department of Education (USDOE). The                    withdrawals in good standing are issued only
student will be considered in an Overpayment            when a satisfactory settlement of all financial
Status, and will not be eligible for additional         obligations has been made in the Treasurer's
aid at any post-secondary institution partici-          Office. Final grades may also be held in
pating in Title IV Aid programs. Students               some cases. Unpaid student accounts will be
who are reported to USDOE in an Overpay-                charged interest at the rate of 1% per month
ment Status should contact the USDOE to                 on the month-end balance until accounts are
make payment arrangements to repay the                  paid in full. Should legal collection become
necessary grant funds.                                  necessary, all costs of collection will be
    Examples of Federal Title IV Return of              added to the balance due.
Funds calculation are available in the Office
of Financial Aid. Students who stop attend-             FINANCIAL AID
ing Lycoming College may not receive further               Lycoming College is committed to helping
financial aid disbursements, may lose some or           students and families meet college costs.
all of the aid that has already been disbursed          While some assistance is available to students
to their account, may be responsible for                regardless of need (merit scholarships), the

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   16                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                     FINANCIAL MATTERS




primary purpose of the College’s financial aid         responsible for understanding the basic
program is to help qualified students of               eligibility requirements.
limited financial resources attend Lycoming
College. Scholarships may be awarded on the            Enrollment Status for Financial
basis of merit and/or need, while grants are           Aid Eligibility
provided solely on the basis of financial need.            Financial aid eligibility is substantially
Long-term educational loans with favorable             reduced for students who are charged less
interest rates and repayment terms are                 than full-time tuition. Credit is earned for
available, as are part-time employment                 some courses which are offered at no charge,
opportunities.                                         including choir, band, theatre practica and all
    It is important to submit financial aid            scholar seminars. Therefore, these credits
applications after January 1st, as appropriate         would not be counted in the full-time tuition
income information becomes available, but by           calculation. For financial aid purposes, a full-
March 1. Although applications may be filed            time student is enrolled in 12-16 billable
later, applicants can only receive consider-           semester hours. A student's financial aid
ation for remaining available funds.                   eligibility is finalized after the end of the
    To be considered for financial aid,                college's published add/drop period.
students and families must complete the
following steps for each year the student seeks        Financial Aid Satisfactory
assistance:                                            Progress Policy
1. Fully complete and submit the Lycoming                  To remain eligible for federal, state, and
   Financial Aid Application (LFAA).                   institutional financial aid, all students must
   Return the completed application to the             maintain financial aid satisfactory progress as
   Financial Aid Office.                               defined below. The financial aid satisfactory
2. Fully complete and submit the Free                  progress policy is separate and distinct from
   Application For Federal Student Aid                 the College’s academic progress policy.
   (FAFSA). Returning students should                      Students retain eligibility for financial aid
   submit the Renewal FAFSA.                           for ten (10) semesters of full-time study.
3. The College may request signed and dated            However, it is the College’s practice to limit
   copies of student and parent(s) Federal             institutional grants/scholarships to eight (8)
   income tax returns (1040, 1040A, 1040EZ,            semesters of full-time study. Should students
   1040PC, TeleFile), including W-2 forms,             attend beyond eight semesters of full-time
   be sent to the Financial Aid Office. The            study, they may still be eligible for federal
   tax returns required are for the year               and/or state aid for the 9th or 10th semester.
   preceding the academic year in which the                In some instances a student may appeal
   student seeks assistance.                           academic suspension and be permitted to
4. PA residents can apply for state grant              continue enrollment even though the student
   assistance using the FAFSA as well. Non-            has fallen behind in credit hours or cumula-
   PA residents should contact the State Grant         tive GPA (see Academic Levels and Aca-
   Agency in their home state to see if                demic Standing sections on page 30). A
   additional forms must be filed.                     student who is granted an academic appeal
                                                       may continue to receive financial assistance
    Basic eligibility requirements for all
                                                       only if the student meets the minimum
federal programs are available from the
                                                       qualitative (GPA) and quantitative (credits
Department of Education at
                                                       completed) requirements listed below.
www.studentaid.ed.gov. Students are
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          17                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
FINANCIAL MATTERS




End of Sem.   Min. Cum. GPA     Min. Cr. Comp.           attempt will be included in the completion
    1               1.85              12                 rate determination.
    2               1.95              24                  Students who fail to successfully complete
    3               2.00              36              the minimum number of credits and/or who
    4               2.00              48              fail to meet the minimum cumulative GPA
    5               2.00              61              requirement will be placed on financial aid
    6               2.00              74              probation. This allows one additional
    7               2.00              88              semester of course work to bring the aca-
    8               2.00             102              demic record up to minimum standards.
    9               2.00             115              Failure to meet the stated minimum after the
    10              2.00             128              probation period will result in a suspension of
                                                      all (federal, state, and institutional) financial
                                                      aid until the standards are met.
Treatment of W, I, X, P & F Grades                        Financial aid satisfactory progress is
and Repeated Coursework                               measured annually and cumulatively by the
                                                      Financial Aid Office. Official notification of
1. Course withdrawals (W) after the drop/add
                                                      probation or suspension is made by the
   period are not included in the GPA
                                                      Financial Aid Office.
   calculation, but are considered a non-
   completion of attempted coursework.
                                                      Reinstatement of Aid After
2. Incomplete (I) grades are not included in          Financial Aid Suspension
   the GPA calculation but are considered a
   non-completion of attempted coursework                 Reinstatement of financial aid after a
   until the incomplete grade is replaced with        student is placed on Suspension is achieved
   a permanent grade and academic progress            as follows:
   can be reevaluated.                                1. The student submits a written letter of
                                                         appeal in accordance with the appeals
3. An audit (X) grade is not considered
                                                         process and the Financial Aid Appeals
   attempted coursework. It is not included
                                                         Committee grants the appeal. The student
   in the GPA calculation or completion rate
                                                         is placed on Financial Aid Probation for
   determination.
                                                         the semester rather than on Suspension; or
4. A satisfactory (P) grade is treated as             2. The student attends Lycoming College
   attempted credits earned, but it is not               during the Suspension semester, pays for
   included in the GPA calculation unless the            tuition and fees without the help of student
   student has designated a minimum                      aid, and does well enough in the course-
   acceptance letter grade.                              work to satisfy all the satisfactory
                                                         academic progress standards. The student
5. A failing grade (F) is treated as attempted           must notify the Financial Aid Office if
   credits not earned, it will be included in            they are planning on attending Lycoming
   the calculation of the GPA and the                    College without the assistance of financial
   minimum completion rate.                              aid; or
6. The most recent course grade for a                 3. The student may attend summer school to
   repeated course will be included in the               eliminate the deficiency in credits and/or
   calculation of the GPA and every repeated             GPA. The student must notify the Finan-
                                                         cial Aid Office if they are planning on

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 18                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                     FINANCIAL MATTERS




  taking classes during the summer to                   College Scholarships & Grants
  eliminate the deficiency. Students cannot
                                                        NOTE: Lycoming Scholarships and Grants are
  take classes at another institution to
                                                        awarded to eligible students who are full-time
  resolve a GPA deficiency. Classes must be
                                                        and degree-seeking. Students already possess-
  taken at Lycoming College.
                                                        ing a bachelor’s degree are ineligible for
    Students who have been placed on                    scholarships, grants and institutional loans.
Suspension cannot skip a semester and regain
                                                        Lycoming Grants may be awarded to
eligibility. No financial aid will be disbursed
                                                        students to help meet their documented
during subsequent semesters for students on
                                                        financial need. Renewal requires continued
Suspension. If the student fails to attain the
                                                        financial need as determined by Federal
minimum standards after the second semester
                                                        Methodology and/or the financial aid director.
of probation, eligibility for financial assis-
                                                        Students should expect the Grant award to
tance will be cancelled automatically.
                                                        remain constant for each semester they are
Appeal Process                                          enrolled.

    Appeals of Financial Aid Suspension must            Ministerial Grants are awarded to dependent
be made in writing to the Director of Finan-            children of United Methodist ministers and
cial Aid by the date specified in the Suspen-           ordained ministers of other denominations.
sion notification letter. The Financial Aid             This grant amounts to 33% of tuition for
Appeals Committee will review the appeal                children of United Methodist ministers in the
and notify the student in writing within 5              Central Pennsylvania Conference and 25% of
working days of their decision. All decisions           tuition for all others. Students meeting the
made by the Financial Aid Appeals Commit-               criteria for this grant and any other Lycoming
tee are final and not subject to further review.        Scholarship(s) will be awarded the
    The appeal letter must address the extenu-          scholarship(s)/grant that provides the highest
ating circumstance(s) why satisfactory                  dollar amount; both will not be awarded.
academic progress was not made, why the                 Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of up to
extenuating circumstance(s) has changed, as             25% tuition are awarded to students preparing
well as an outlined plan for future academic            for the Christian ministry. Students must
success. Extenuating circumstances can                  complete a pre-ministerial grant application
include, but are not limited to, illness or             available through the financial aid office.
injury; death of a family member; family                Students meeting the criteria for this grant and
difficulties; interpersonal problems with               any other Lycoming Scholarship(s) will be
friends, roommate, significant others;                  awarded the scholarship(s)/grant that provides
difficulty balancing work, athletics, family            the highest dollar amount; both will not be
responsibility; or financial difficulties.              awarded.
    Acceptance of an appeal is only valid for
determining eligibility for financial assistance
and has absolutely no bearing on any determi-
nation made by the Registrar and/or the
Committee on Academic Standards.




2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           19                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
FINANCIAL MATTERS




                                                      Sophomores may borrow up to a maximum of
                                                      $3,500 annually. Eligible juniors and seniors
                                                      may borrow up to a maximum of $5,500
                                                      annually. The federal government pays the
                                                      interest while the student is enrolled on at
                                                      least a half-time basis. The student begins to
                                                      repay the loan (interest and principal) 6
                                                      months after leaving school. The interest rate
                                                      for new borrowers is variable based on the 91-
                                                      DAY T-BILL plus 3.1%, capped at 8.25%.
                                                      The rate is adjusted every July 1. Eligibility is
                                                      based on financial need.
                                                      Federal Unsubsidized Stafford/Keystone
                                                      Loan provides an opportunity for students to
                                                      borrow under the Stafford Program who do
                                                      not qualify for the maximum amount of
                                                      subsidized Stafford loan. Maximum grade
Federal Grants                                        level amount minus subsidized eligibility
Pell Grants are made available by the federal         equals unsubsidized eligibility. Interest must
government. Eligibility is based upon a               be paid by the borrower on a quarterly basis
federal formula.                                      while enrolled (check with your lender to see
                                                      if interest payments may be deferred). Other
Supplemental Educational Opportunity
                                                      aspects of the loan are similar to those under
Grants may be awarded to students with
                                                      the Subsidized program. Independent students
exceptional financial need. Priority must be
                                                      may be eligible for higher loan limits; contact
given to Pell Grant recipients. Funds are
                                                      the Financial Aid Office for more information.
provided by the federal government. Funds
are limited.                                          Federal Perkins Loan (formerly the National
                                                      Direct Student Loan) may be offered to
State Grants                                          students with exceptional need. Borrowers
Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance              must repay the loan, plus 5% per annum
Agency (PHEAA) Grants are available for               simple interest on the unpaid balance, over a
PA residents meeting domicile and financial           period beginning nine months after the date on
requirements of the program. Eligibility is           which the borrower ceases to be enrolled at
determined by PHEAA. These grants are                 least half-time. Funds are limited.
available for a maximum of 8 semesters.               PLUS Loan is a loan parents may take out on
Non-PA residents should contact the State             behalf of their dependent student. The amount
Grant Agency in their home state for avail-           a parent may borrow for one year is equal to
ability of funds to students attending out-of-        the cost of education for one year minus any
state colleges.                                       financial aid the student is eligible for in that
                                                      year. The interest rate is variable but is capped
Loan Programs                                         at 9%. The interest rate is determined every
Federal Subsidized Stafford/Keystone                  July 1 and is equal to the bond equivalent rate
Loan allows eligible Freshmen to borrow a             of 52-week T-Bill plus 3.1%.
maximum of $2,625 annually. Eligible

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 20                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                    FINANCIAL MATTERS




Employment Opportunities                               ing institutions of higher education. Students
                                                       should contact the Tuition Exchange officer at
Federal College Work-Study Program
                                                       their sponsor institution for information
Awards provide work opportunities on
                                                       regarding this sponsorship. Students are
campus for qualified students. Students
                                                       expected to apply for all federal and state
receive pay-checks for work performed in the
                                                       grants. If the student receives a federal or
previous pay period. Based on documented
                                                       state grant, those amounts may be applied
need and awarded by the Financial Aid Office.
                                                       toward room and board charges if the student
Funding is limited. The student assumes full
                                                       resides in the dorms. If the student commutes,
responsibility in locating a job. Returning
                                                       the grant amount is equal to tuition less
students who wish to work the following year
                                                       federal and state grants.
must have their name submitted to the
Financial Aid Office by their supervisor               United Methodist Scholarships may be
before the end of the Spring semester.                 available to full-time degree-seeking appli-
   Students also have the opportunity to seek          cants who have a cumulative GPA of 3.00 or
work-study employment off-campus in the                better, are active in Christian activities, and
Community Service program. Interested                  who are active, full members of a United
students can get additional information in the         Methodist church. Demonstrated financial
Financial Aid Office.                                  need is also required. Normally, seven $500
                                                       scholarships are awarded each year. Annual
Lycoming Campus Employment Program                     application is required. Recipients are
is similar to Federal Work-Study except that           selected by the Director of Financial Aid and
students are paid with institutional funds only        will be awarded to the neediest students. The
and is not based on financial need. A limited          funds are provided by the United Methodist
number of jobs are available. Funding is               Church. Applications are available in the
limited.                                               Financial Aid Office. Renewal requires a
Other Job Opportunities are frequently                 cumulative GPA of at least 3.00.
available with local business firms or persons.        United Methodist Student Loans are
Contact the Career Development Office of               available on a very limited basis to students
the College for information on these                   who are members of the United Methodist
opportunities.                                         Church. The maximum amount which may be
                                                       borrowed for an academic year is $2,500
Other Aid Sources                                      subject to the availability of the funds.
Veterans and Dependents Benefits are                   Contact The Board of Higher Education and
available for qualified veterans and children          Ministry, P.O. Box 871, Nashville, TN 37202
of deceased or disabled veterans. Contact the          for more information.
Veteran’s Officer in the Registrar’s Office.
                                                       Non-college Aid Opportunities are often
Reserved Officers Training Corps (ROTC)                available through family employers or labor
Stipends and Scholarships are available for            unions, business firms, fraternal and religious
qualified students. Contact the Financial Aid          organizations, and secondary schools. Your
Office for more information.                           parents should contact their employer or
Tuition Exchange Grants may be available.              organizations of which they are members for
Lycoming College is a member of the Tuition            information on financial aid resources.
Exchange Program. This program is for
dependent students of employees at participat-


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          21                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
STUDENT AFFAIRS




                                                       nature, Campus Ministry at Lycoming
                                                       provides worship services, service projects,
                                                       social occasions, retreats, and study opportuni-
                                                       ties. The campus ministers are an integral part
                                                       of campus life and are available to students
                                                       who may need support, or spiritual direction.

                                                       Campus Recreation
                                                           The Campus Recreation Department
                                                       provides opportunities for students, faculty and
                                                       staff to enjoy a recreational sports atmosphere.
                                                       The new 54,000 square foot Recreation Center
                                                       houses a suspended indoor track overlooking 4
 STUDENT AFFAIRS                                       large court areas for basketball, volleyball and
                                                       tennis. The center also includes a weight
                                                       room and cardiovascular area, both with state
   The Division of Student Affairs coordi-             of the art equipment. The swimming pool is
nates a variety of programs, services, and             accessible at different times throughout the
activities designed to enhance students’               week for open swim. The Intramural program
personal, social, and educational growth and           is also available to students, faculty and staff and
development. This is accomplished through              offers several different team sports including:
a variety of programs, offices, and staff              flag football, basketball, volleyball, wiffleball
including:                                             and indoor soccer.
• Campus Ministry
• Campus Recreation                                    Career Development Center
• Career Development Center                                The Career Development Center provides
• Community Service                                    services which are designed to help individu-
• Commuter Student Affairs                             als make effective career decisions beginning
• Counseling Services                                  with identifying their skills, interests, person-
• Greek Life                                           ality, and career related values. For individu-
• Health Services                                      als unsure of what to major in, resources and
• International Student Advising                       support are available to research and assess
• Judicial Affairs                                     their options and determine what they may
• Residence Life                                       wish to do after graduation. For individuals
• Safety and Security                                  sure of their major but not sure what to do
• Student Activities and Leadership                    after they graduate, in addition to one-on-one
  Development                                          counseling, a variety of resources are also
   The Student Affairs staff view students as          available including books, online materials,
partners in the educational process and,               alumni and other contacts to help them learn
therefore, expect that students will share             more about the world of work.
responsibility for managing our educational                The Career Development Center teaches
community.                                             individuals how they can learn about different
                                                       career fields and present themselves to
Campus Ministry                                        potential employers in a positive and effective
    The United Campus Ministry, located in             manner. Helping individuals make appropri-
Honors Hall, is staffed by a Protestant                ate and meaningful connections between
minister and a Roman Catholic lay minister,            college and career is a goal of the Career
provides a wide range of activities in support         Development Center. The CDC is located on
of the spiritual development and religious life        the 3rd Floor of Wertz Student Center.
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in               www.lycoming.edu/cdc

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  22                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                       STUDENT AFFAIRS




Community Service                                          Routine medical care is provided without
    Community Service is a learning opportu-           charge on a daily basis Monday-Friday
nity for students accomplished in conjunction          8:30 a.m.-4:00 p.m. during the fall and spring
with various agencies in the Williamsport              semesters. The office is staffed by a full-time
area and college departments. This activity            registered nurse with a physician available on
allows students to expand their knowledge              a limited daily basis.
about diverse individuals and communities.                 Health Services’ policies reflect the
The outcome of such service promotes                   recommendations of the American College
students' personal and social development as           Health Association (ACHA), the Pennsylva-
well as giving them an enhanced perspective            nia Department of Health, and the Centers
of civic responsibility and social justice.            for Disease Control (CDC).
    The Community Service Center located in
Honors Hall coordinates many service                   Residence Life
opportunities available to students, faculty,              As a residential college, Lycoming offers
and staff in the greater Williamsport area. A          students the opportunity to integrate academic
number of the community service projects               and residential experiences. The Residence
include Big Brothers/Big Sisters, Habitat for          Life Office is committed to providing a
Humanity, the Literacy Project, a school               living/learning environment to help each
tutoring program, Best Buddies, Adopt-A-               resident grow as a person and as a student.
Highway, Bloodmobile, Shepherd of the                  Lycoming College requires all full-time
Streets, and the CROP Walk for World Hunger.           students to live in college housing and
                                                       participate in the college board plan each
Counseling Services                                    semester of the academic year that they are
    Students experience developmental and              enrolled. Married students, students residing
psychological growth as well as difficult              with their parents within a 40 mile radius,
situations during their college years. Coun-           students living with their dependents, and
seling Services strives to meet students’              students 23 years or older may request to be
psychological and developmental needs.                 exempted from this policy. Such requests
Professional counselors provide individual             should be submitted in writing to the Dean of
and group counseling, crisis intervention,             Student Affairs at least three weeks prior to
consultation with students, faculty and staff,         the beginning of the semester that students are
and outreach programming on psychological,             requesting permission to live off campus. We
mental health, and substance abuse issues.             do not provide housing for students who have
All services are strictly confidential and free        dependent children living with them.
of charge to all Lycoming College students.                Residence halls put students at the heart of
Counseling Services also provides referrals to         College activity—offering greater opportuni-
area mental health providers for those                 ties for participation. Through programs,
students who wish to meet with someone                 leadership opportunities, and peer interac-
outside the College or whose needs cannot be           tions, residents gain a sense of belonging to
met by the College.                                    the campus community, acquire new knowl-
                                                       edge and skills, have easy access to College
Health Services                                        services, make informed choices, and assume
   Lycoming College Health Services                    responsibility for themselves and their
focuses on the holistic care of the individual,        community.
health maintenance, and wellness through                   The residence halls are staffed with
health education and prevention of illness.            upperclass students who serve as Resident
Educational materials and instructional                Advisors (RAs) selected on the basis of
programs are available through the Student             leadership skills. RAs provide information,
Health Services.                                       refer students to campus and local resources,
                                                       help enforce College and community stan-

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          23                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
STUDENT AFFAIRS




dards, use helping skills for students in need,        Student Programs
and facilitate educational and social pro-                The Office of Student Programs and
grams. Most importantly, RAs assist resi-              Leadership Development promotes the
dents in the development and maintenance of            personal growth and intellectual development
strong, positive residence hall communities.           of students through co-curricular programs.
With the guidance and support of Residence             Just as the classroom experience provides a
Life staff, each resident is expected to become        forum for new thoughts, ideas, and opinions,
involved in promoting a positive learning              so does co-curricular programming. The
environment in his or her community.                   office collaborates with students, faculty, and
    Several different living options are               staff to foster innovative programs, encourage
available for students in our eight residence          student learning, and prepare students for life
halls. Freshmen are housed together in a co-           beyond the College. This is accomplished in
educational environment encouraging                    the context of supplementing the educational
students to develop class identity and unity.          mission of the College. Through the efforts
The six upperclass halls offer opportunities           of the student administered Campus Activi-
for co-educational housing, an all female hall,        ties Board (CAB), co-curricular programming
fraternity and sorority chapter housing, a             is offered to the entire college community and
substance free area, and smoking environ-              is designed to enhance the overall educational
ments. College Apartments are available to             experience of students through the exposure
sophomores, juniors and seniors who meet               to social, cultural and recreational program.
specific grade requirements and who are in             Professionals on staff in Student Programs
good disciplinary standing with the College.           plan and implement leadership development
Additional information is sent to students             training programs for the student government,
following their acceptance by the College.             the Interfraternity and Panhellenic Councils
                                                       and all registered student organizations.
Safety and Security                                    Standards of Conduct
    The Department of Safety & Security
strives to maintain an environment that is free            Lycoming College is committed to the
                                                       creation and maintenance of a living-learning
of unnecessary hazards and disruptions. This
                                                       environment which fosters the intellectual,
responsibility includes the enforcement of
                                                       personal, social and ethical development of
Lycoming College rules, regulations, and
                                                       its students. Respect for the rights of others
policies. Security personnel are scheduled on
                                                       and self-discipline are essential to the
an around-the-clock basis. An emergency
                                                       fulfillment of these goals. Students are
telephone line is always monitored. Twenty-
                                                       expected to adhere to the policies contained
four hour a day telephone extensions are used          in the Student Handbook and other College
to handle general security concerns.                   publications. These policies, rules and
    The department solicits the cooperation of         regulations are part of the contractual agree-
the entire college community in reporting              ment students enter into when they register at
unsafe conditions and suspicious activity on           Lycoming College.
the Lycoming College campus.                               Students who demonstrate an unwilling-
    Other services provided by the department          ness to abide by these policies will be subject
are: First aid and ambulatory medical tran-            to disciplinary action which may include
sportation, emergency maintenance referral,            suspension or expulsion from the College.
an escort service, guest and parking registra-         Students are encouraged to review the Student
tion, and the dissemination of telephone               Handbook and Housing License in order to
numbers and general information to the public          familiarize themselves with the policies
when the College switchboard is closed.                governing student conduct.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  24                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                         ATHLETICS • ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




                                                            ACADEMIC POLICIES
                                                            AND REGULATIONS
                                                            Students are expected to familiarize
                                                        themselves with the academic policies con-
                                                        tained in this Catalog. Failure to do so does
                                                        not excuse students from the require-
                                                        ments and regulations described herein.

                                                        THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM
                                                            Instruction at Lycoming College is
                                                        organized, with few exceptions, on a depart-
                                                        mental basis. Most courses are unit courses,
                                                        meaning that each course taken is considered
                                                        to be equivalent to four semester hours of
                                                        credit. Exceptions occur in applied music and
                                                        theatre practicum courses, which are offered
                                                        for either one-half or one semester hour of
                                                        credit; in departments that have elected to
                                                        offer certain courses for the equivalent of one,
                                                        two or three semester hours of credit; and in
                                                        physical activities courses which are zero
             ATHLETICS                                  credits. Furthermore, independent studies and
                                                        internships carrying two semester hours of
    Athletics is an important part of the               credit may be designed.
Lycoming experience. As a member of the                     The normal student course load is four unit
NCAA, Lycoming sponsors nineteen                        courses (16 semester hours) during the fall and
intercollegiate sports for both men and                 spring semesters. Students who elect to attend
women student-athletes.                                 the special sessions may enroll in one unit
    Men can choose from football, soccer,               course (four semester hours) during the May
cross country, wrestling, golf, basketball,             term and one or two unit courses (four - eight
lacrosse, swimming, tennis, and track and               semester hours) in each of the summer terms.
field. Women can compete in soccer, cross               A student is considered full time when
country, lacrosse, volleyball, basketball,              enrolled for a minimum of three unit courses,
swimming, softball, tennis, and track and field.        or the equivalent, during the fall or spring
    Lycoming is a member of the Middle                  semesters, one unit course, or the equivalent,
Atlantic Conference, which is a Division III            for the May term, and two unit courses for
athletic conference. As a Division III school,          each of the summer terms.
Lycoming does not offer athletic scholarships.              Students may enroll in five unit courses
    In addition, the College offers a very              (20 semester hours) during the fall and spring
active intramural and recreation program that           semesters if they are Lycoming scholars or
is open to all students. This program in-               were admitted to the Dean’s List at the end of
cludes, among others, basketball, water polo,           the previous semester. Exceptions may be
volleyball, flag football, and indoor soccer.           granted by the Dean of the College. There
                                                        will be an additional charge, see page 13.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           25                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




Overloads are not permitted during the May             examinations may be taken after matricula-
and summer terms.                                      tion, new students who are competent in a
                                                       given area are encouraged to take the exami-
ALTERNATIVE                                            nation of their choice before entering
CREDIT SOURCES                                         Lycoming so that the college will have the
Transfer Credit                                        test scores available for registration advising
                                                       for the first semester of enrollment. Students
   Matriculated students who wish to study at
                                                       applying to the college for the first time
other campuses must obtain prior written
                                                       should inform the Admissions Office that
approval to do so from their advisor, the chair
                                                       they have completed these tests and provide
of the department in which the credit will be
                                                       the official scores as part of their application
awarded, and the Lycoming College Registrar.
                                                       packet. Continuing students must send
Course work counting toward a major or minor
                                                       official test scores to the Office of the
must also be approved in advance by the chair-
                                                       Registrar and inform their academic advisors
person of the department in which the major or
                                                       when examinations have been taken.
minor is offered. Once a course is approved,
the credit and grades for the course will be           The College Entrance Examination Board
transferred to Lycoming and calculated in the          Advanced Placement (CEEB AP) - In most
student’s grade point average as if the courses        cases, a score of four is required for credit.
were taken here. This means that “D” and “F”           The International Baccalaureate - Students
grades will be transferred as well as all other        who have completed the full diploma and have
grades. Unapproved courses will not transfer.          scores of five or above on all of the higher
Final determination of transfer credit will be         level examinations will be granted 32 credit
made by the Registrar based on official                hours; specific courses will be based on the
transcripts only.                                      examinations taken. Students who complete
    Lycoming College does not have a statute           the full diploma but earn less than a score of
of limitations but it reserves the right to            five on all of the higher level examinations
refuse to accept some courses for transfer in          will be granted eight credits for each higher
which the content is outmoded. The Registrar           level examination completed with a grade of
will consult the academic department(s)                five or higher and four credits for a satisfac-
involved.                                              tory or higher completion of the Theory of
   Students are expected to complete their last        Knowledge requirement. Students who have
eight unit courses (32 semester hours) and 16          completed the certificate will be granted
semester hours in their major at Lycoming.             credit based on the examinations taken.
Requests for waivers of this regulation must be        Standard level examinations will not be
sent to the Committee on Academic Standards.           considered.
Credit By Examination                                  The American College Testing Proficiency
    Students may earn credit or advanced               Examination Program (ACT PEP) - A
placement through the standardized examina-            score equivalent to a grade of “B” or above
tions listed below. A maximum of 50 percent            is required.
of the course requirements for the Baccalaure-         College Level Examination Program
ate degree may be earned through these exam-           (CLEP) - A score equivalent to a grade of
inations. The appropriate academic depart-             “B” or above is required.
ment will determine which tests they will              Defense Activity for Non-Traditional
accept and the course equivalencies. A list of         Education Support (DANTES) - A score
approved examinations is available in the              equivalent to a grade of “B” or above is
Office of the Registrar. Although these                required.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  26                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                        ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




STUDENT RECORDS                                                In zero semester hour and two semester hour
                                                           (1/2 unit) courses meeting only during the last
   The policy regarding student educational
                                                           half of any semester, students may drop/add for
records is designed to protect the privacy of
                                                           a period of five days, effective with the mid-
students against unwarranted intrusions and is
                                                           term date shown on the academic calendar.
consistent with Section 43B of the General
                                                           Withdrawal from zero-credit and half-semester
Education Provision Act (commonly known as
                                                           courses with a withdrawal grade may occur
the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act
                                                           within 4-1/2 weeks of the beginning of the
of 1974, as amended). The details of the College
                                                           course. It is understood that the period of time
policy on student records and the procedures
                                                           at the beginning of the semester will be
for gaining access to student records are
                                                           identical, for example, a period of five days as
contained in the current issue of the Student
                                                           indicated above.
Handbook which is available in the library,
online, and in the Office of the Dean of                   Cross Registration
Student Affairs.                                               A special opportunity exists in the
                                                           Williamsport area for students to take courses
REGISTRATION                                               at the Pennsylvania College of Technology.
    During the registration period, students               Students may enroll for less than a full-time
select their courses for the next semester and             course load at the Pennsylvania College of
register their course selections in the Office of          Technology while remaining enrolled in
the Registrar. Course selection is made in                 courses at Lycoming.
consultation with the student’s faculty advisor                Students must be enrolled full-time in a
in order to insure that the course schedule is             degree program and have earned no more than
consistent with College requirements and                   93 semester hours. Cross registration is
student goals. After the registration period,              available for the Fall and Spring Semesters,
any change in the student’s course schedule                and Summer I and II. It is not available for
must be approved by both the faculty advisor               May Term.
and Office of the Registrar. Students may not
receive credit for courses in which they are not           NON-DEGREE STUDENTS
formally registered.
    During the first five days of classes, students           Students who do not wish to pursue a degree
may drop any course without any record of                  at Lycoming College may, if space permits,
such enrollment appearing on their permanent               register for credit or audit courses on either a
record, and they may add any course that is                part-time or full-time basis. Students who
not closed. The permanent record will reflect              register for less than 12 semester hours are
the student’s registration as of the conclusion            considered to be enrolled part-time; students
of the drop/add period. Students wishing to                who register for 12 or more semester hours are
withdraw from a course between the fifth day               considered to be enrolled full-time and must
and the 9th week of classes must process a                 pay the $200 contingency fee.
course withdrawal form in the Office of the                   Anyone wishing to register as a non-degree
Registrar. Withdrawal grades are not com-                  student must fill out an application form in the
puted in the grade point average. Students may             Admissions Office, pay a one-time application
not withdraw from courses after the 9th week               fee, and pay the tuition rate in effect at the time
of a semester and the comparable period during             of each enrollment. After a non-degree student
the May and summer terms. Students who                     has attempted four unit courses (16 semester
stop attending a course (or courses) but do not            hours), the student must either matriculate or
withdraw will receive a grade(s) of “F.”                   obtain permission from the Dean of the

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                              27                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




College to continue study on a non-degree               that the student’s financial and academic
basis.                                                  records are properly closed.
   All non-degree students are subject to the               A student who decides to discontinue study
general laws and regulations of the College as          at the College as of the conclusion of the
stated in the College Catalog and the Student           current semester must provide the Registrar
Handbook. The College reserves the right to             with written notification of such plans in order
deny permission to register for individuals             to receive a refund of the contingency deposit.
who do not meet the standards of the College.           See page 14 for details.
    Students who wish to change from a non-
degree to a degree status must apply for                GRADING SYSTEM
admission as a degree candidate and satisfy all             The evaluation of student performance in
conditions for admission and registration in            courses is indicated by the use of traditional
effect at that time.                                    letter symbols. These symbols and their
                                                        definitions are as follows:
AUDITORS                                                A EXCELLENT - Signifies superior achieve-
    Any person may audit courses at Lycom-              ment through mastery of content or skills and
ing at one-fourth tuition per course. Members           demonstration of creative and independent
of the Lycoming College Scholar Program                 thinking.
may audit a fifth unit course per semester at           B GOOD - Signifies better-than-average
no additional charge. Laboratory and other              achievement wherein the student reveals
special fees must be paid in full. Examina-             insight and understanding.
tions, papers, and other evaluation devices are
not required of auditors, but individual                C SATISFACTORY - Signifies satisfactory
arrangements may be made to complete such               achievement wherein the student’s work has
exercises with consent of the instructor. The           been of average quality and quantity. The
option to audit a course must be declared by            student has demonstrated basic competence in
the end of the drop/add period. Forms are               the subject area and may enroll in additional
available in the Registrar's Office.                    course work.
                                                        D PASSING - Signifies unsatisfactory
ATTENDANCE                                              achievement wherein the student met only the
   The academic program at Lycoming is                  minimum requirements for passing the course
based upon the assumption that there is value           and should not continue in the subject area
in class attendance for all students. Individual        without departmental advice.
instructors have the prerogative of establishing        F FAILING — Signifies that the student has
reasonable absence regulations in any course.           not met the minimum requirements for
The student is responsible for learning and             passing the course.
observing these regulations.                            I INCOMPLETE WORK — Assigned in
                                                        accordance with the restrictions of established
WITHDRAWAL FROM                                         academic policy.
THE COLLEGE                                             R A REPEATED COURSE — Students shall
   A student who wishes to withdraw from                have the option of repeating courses for which
the College during the semester should contact          they already have received a passing grade in
the Assistant Dean for Freshmen or the                  addition to those which they have failed. Credit
Assistant Dean for Sophomores. College                  is received only once for the course. The most
personnel will explain the procedure to ensure          recent course grade will count toward the GPA.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   28                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                     ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




P PASSING WORK, NO GRADE                                  requirement of that major, including courses
ASSIGNED — Converted from traditional                     required by the major department which
grade of A through D-.                                    are offered by other departments.
                                                          (Instructor-designated courses are excepted
X AUDIT — Work as an auditor for which                    from this limitation.)
no credit is earned.                                  •   Courses for which a grade of P is recorded
W WITHDRAWAL — Signifies withdrawal                       may not be used toward fulfillment of any
from the course from the sixth day through                distribution or “W” course requirement.
the ninth week of the semester. Students may          •   Students may not enroll in ENGL 106 on a
not exceed 24                                             P/F basis.
semester hours of               Quality Points        •   A course selected on a P/F basis from which
unsuccessful                   Earned for Each            a student subsequently withdraws will not
course attempts        Grade Semester Hour                count toward the four-course limit.
(grade of F and           A          4.00             •   Instructor-designated courses may be
W) except in the          A-         3.67                 offered during the May term with the
case of with-             B+         3.33                 approval of the Dean of the College. Such
drawal for                B          3.00                 courses are not counted toward the four-
documented                B-         2.67                 course limit.
medical or                C+         2.33             •   P grades are not computed in the grade
psychological             C          2.00                 point average.
reasons.                  C-         1.67             •   Students electing the P/F option may designate a
  Pluses and              D+         1.33                 minimum acceptance letter grade from A to
minuses may be            D          1.00                 B-. If the student earns the designated grade
awarded (except           D-         0.67                 or better, the grade will be recorded in the
for A+, F+, or            F          0.00                 permanent record and computed in the
F-) at the                                                grade point average. If a student selects P/F
discretion of the instructor. The cumulative              (with no designated minimum acceptance
grade point average (GPA) is calculated by                grade) and earns a grade of A to D-, a P will
multiplying quality points by credits and                 be recorded in the permanent record but not
dividing the total quality points by the total            computed in the grade point average. In all
credits. A quality point is the unit of mea-              cases, if a student earns a grade of F, this
surement of the quality of work done by the               grade will be recorded in the permanent
student. The cumulative GPA is not deter-                 record and computed in the student’s grade
mined by averaging semester GPA’s.                        point average.
   The grade point average for the major and          •   Students must declare the P/F option before
minor is calculated in the same way as the                the drop/add deadline.
cumulative grade point average. A minimum             •   Instructors are not notified which of their
of 2.00 is required for the cumulative grade              students are enrolled on an P/F basis.
point average in the major and minor to meet          •   Students electing the P/F option are
the requirements for graduation.                          expected to perform the same work as those
                                                          enrolled on a regular basis.
Pass/Fail                                             Incomplete Grades
   Use of the pass/fail grading option is
limited as follows:                                      Incomplete grades may be given if, for
• Students may enroll on a P/F basis in no            absolutely unavoidable reasons (usually
  more that one unit course per semester              medical in nature), the student has not been
  and in no more than four unit courses               able to complete the work required in the
  during their undergraduate careers.                 course. An incomplete grade must be removed
                                                      within six weeks of the next regular semester,
• P/F courses completed after declaration of
  a major may not be used to satisfy a                otherwise the incomplete is converted to an “F.”

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         29                                    LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




Repetition of Course
    Students shall have the option of repeating               consultation with the chairperson (or his/
courses for which they already have received a                her stand-in). The student will receive
passing grade in addition to those which they                 from the department chairperson written
have failed. Recording of grades for all                      notification of the decision within one
repeated courses shall be governed by the                     week of the meeting with the chairperson.
following conditions:                                     (3) If resolution has not been achieved at step
• A course may be repeated only one time.                     two, the student or the instructor may
  Both attempts will be recorded on the                       make a written appeal to the Dean of the
  student’s transcript.                                       College within two weeks of the depart-
• Credit for the course will be given only once.              ment chairperson’s written notification. In
• The most recent grade will count toward the                 order to resolve the disagreement, the
  GPA with this exception: A “W” grade                        Dean will confer with the student and the
  cannot replace another grade.                               instructor in private sessions, and may call
                                                              additional witnesses. If the Dean is unable
Final Course Grade                                            to accomplish a resolution, she/he will
Appeal Process                                                forward the case to the Committee on
    Assigning final course grades is a responsi-              Academic Standards, which will make a
bility that falls within the professional judgment            final decision on the matter. The Dean will
and expertise of each faculty member. Grades                  communicate in writing to the student and
assess as accurately as possible a student’s                  the instructor the final decision within
performance according to clear criteria                       three weeks of receiving the appeal. This is
provided in the course such as academic                       the final step in the appeal process.
performance, class attendance, and punctual-
ity in submitting assignments. Student                    ACADEMIC LEVELS
appeals of the final course grade must follow                The following table is used to determine
the three-step procedure outlined below.                  the academic grade level of degree candidates.
(1) Within two weeks of the beginning of the              See page 17 for related Financial Aid informa-
    semester following the conclusion of the              tion.
    course, the student should request an
    informal conference with the instructor to            Year    Semester Number of Semester
    discuss the grade and attempt to resolve                               Hours Earned
    the concern.                                          Freshman  1         Fewer than 12
(2) If the outcome of the informal conference                       2         At least 12 but fewer than 24
    is not satisfactory to the student, or the            Sophomore 1         At least 24 but fewer than 40
    instructor is not available, the student may                    2         At least 40 but fewer than 56
    submit a written request to meet with the             Junior    1         At least 56 but fewer than 76
    department chairperson (or another faculty                      2         At least 76 but fewer than 96
    member in the department in instances                 Senior    1         At least 96 but fewer than 112
    involving the chairperson) within two                                     More than 112
                                                                    2
    weeks of meeting with the instructor. The
    student’s request must include a written
    statement outlining the basis for the                 ACADEMIC STANDING
    appeal. It is the function of the chairperson
    to determine the relevant facts and to                Good Academic Standing
    attempt to resolve the disagreement. The                Students will be considered in good academic
    decision regarding the course grade in                standing if they meet the following standard:
    question will be made by the instructor in

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     30                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                    ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS




                                      Minimum               W) except in the case of withdrawal for
Semester Hours Completed     Cumulative GPA                 documented medical or psychological
fewer than or equal to 16                 1.85              reasons, or
more than 16, fewer than or equal to 32   1.95            • they cannot reasonably complete all
more than 32                              2.00              requirements for a degree.
                                                        The standard length of dismissal will be for a
Probation                                               period of two years.
    Students who do not meet the standards for            • After this time students may apply for
good academic standing and/or who have                      readmission to the College. The decision
earned two or more failing grades at the end of             for readmission will be made by the
any given semester, will be placed on aca-                  Committee on Academic Standards.
demic probation for the next semester.                      Readmission is not guaranteed.
   Students on academic probation are required            • Students readmitted after dismissal will be
to pass ARC 100, Success Skills Workshop, if                on academic probation.
they have not already done so and are encour-             • Students may request permission to take
aged to attend programs developed by the                    courses at another institution. Courses
Freshman and Sophomore deans.                               not receiving prior approval will not be
Suspension                                                  accepted for transfer.
    Students are eligible for suspension from           Probation, suspension, and dismissal become
the College when:                                       effective at the end of the semester in which
   • their cumulative grade point average is            the student fails to meet the academic stan-
     below good standing for any two                    dards listed above. The student will be
     semesters, or                                      notified of such action via U.S. mail. Receipt
   • they earn a grade point average of 1.50            of such notice is not a prerequisite to the
     or under in any one semester.                      student’s being placed on probation, suspen-
    The period of suspension will be for a mini-        sion, or dismissal.
mum of one full semester, not including May
term or the summer sessions.                            ACADEMIC HONESTY
   • After this time students may apply for                 The integrity of the academic process of
     readmission to the College. The decision           the College requires honesty in all phases
     for readmission will be made by the                of the instructional program. The College
     Committee on Academic Standards.                   assumes that students are committed to the
     Readmission is not guaranteed.                     principle of academic honesty. Students who
   • Students readmitted after suspension will          fail to honor this commitment are subject to
     be on academic probation.                          dismissal. Procedural guidelines and rules for
   • Students readmitted after suspension who           the adjudication of cases of academic dishon-
     fail to meet the required standards may be         esty are printed in The Student Handbook.
     dismissed.
   • Students may request permission to take            ACADEMIC HONORS
     courses at another institution. Courses not        Dean's List
     receiving prior approval will not be                   Students are admitted to the Dean’s List at
     accepted for transfer.                             the end of the fall and spring semesters if they
                                                        meet all of the following conditions:
Dismissal                                               • complete at least 12 semester hours for the
   Students will be subject to dismissal from
                                                          semester
the College when:                                       • earn a minimum grade point average of 3.50
  • they exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc-               for the semester
    cessful course attempts (grades of F and
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           31                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACADEMIC POLICIES AND REGULATIONS • THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




• do not incur grades of F
• do not incur grades of P (except in those                            THE ACADEMIC
  courses graded only as P/F)
• do not repeat any courses (except those                              PROGRAM
  which may be repeated for credit)
                                                                        Lycoming College awards two different
Graduation Honors                                                    degrees: Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) and Bachelor
    Students are awarded the Bachelor of Arts                        of Science (B.S.). For students wishing to do so,
degree or the Bachelor of Science degree with                        multiple degrees are possible. Candidates for
honors when they have earned the following                           multiple degrees must satisfy all requirements
grade point averages based on all courses                            for each degree and earn a minimum of 40 units
attempted at Lycoming, with a minimum of 64                          (160 semester hours). Students who have
semester hours (16 units) required for a student                     completed fewer than 40 units but more than 32
to be eligible for honors:                                           units (128 semester hours), and who have
  summa cum laude ............ exactly 3.90-4.00                     completed all other requirements for two
  magna cum laude ............ exactly 3.67-3.89                     baccalaureate degrees from Lycoming College
  cum laude ........................ exactly 3.33-3.66               will receive only one baccalaureate degree.
                                                                     They must choose the degree to be conferred.
Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, and                                   Completed majors will be posted to the tran-
Societies - Superior academic achievement is
                                                                     script.
recognized through the conferring of awards
                                                                        Freshmen entering the College during the
and prizes at the annual Honors Convocation
                                                                     2005-2006 academic year are subject to the
and Commencement and through election to
                                                                     requirements which appear on the following
membership in honor societies.
                                                                     pages. Continuing students are subject to the
SOCIETIES                                                            Catalog in effect at the time of their entry unless
Biology .................................... Beta Beta Beta          they elect to complete the current curriculum.
Business .................................. Delta Mu Delta           Students who transfer to the College with ad-
Chemistry .................. Gamma Sigma Epsilon                     vanced standing will be subject to the require-
Communication ................ Alpha Epsilon Rho                     ments imposed upon other students at the
Criminal Justice .................. Alpha Phi Sigma                  College who have attained the same academic
Economics ................. Omicron Delta Epsilon                    level.
Education ................................ Kappa Delta Pi               Students already possessing a baccalaureate
English ................................. Sigma Tau Delta            degree who are returning for a second degree
Foreign Language .................... Phi Sigma Iota                 will be reviewed on an individiual basis by the
General Academic .................. Phi Kappa Phi                    Registrar and major department. Post-baccalau-
History .................................. Phi Alpha Theta           reate students will be subject to the current
Mathematics ..................... Kappa Mu Epsilon                   catalog, must complete all major requirements
Philosophy ............................... Phi Sigma Tau             and related prerequisites, and may be required to
Physics ................................... Sigma Pi Sigma           complete the distribution requirements. This
Political Science .................... Pi Sigma Alpha                does not apply to non-degree students in
Psychology........................................... Psi Chi        certificate-only programs.
Social Science ......................... Pi Gamma Mu                     Students must complete the final 32 semester
Theatre ................................ Alpha Psi Omega             hours of the degree program at Lycoming
                                                                     College. At least 16 semester hours in the major
                                                                     program must be taken at Lycoming.
                                                                        If a student interrupts his or her education but
                                                                     returns to the College after no more than one
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                                32                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                   THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




academic year has passed, he/she will retain              THE BACCALAUREATE
the same requirements in effect at the initial            DEGREE
date of entrance. A student who withdraws
                                                              Lycoming College is committed to the
from the College for more than one year will,
                                                          principle that a liberal arts education is the
upon return, be required to complete the
                                                          ideal foundation for an informed and produc-
requirements currently imposed upon other
                                                          tive life. The liberal arts - including the fine
students of the same academic level.
                                                          arts, the humanities, mathematics, the natural
    Lycoming College certifies five official
                                                          and social sciences - have created the social,
graduation dates per calendar year. Diplomas
                                                          political, economic and intellectual systems
are awarded when all materials confirming the
                                                          which help define contemporary existence.
completion of the graduation requirements
                                                          Therefore, it is essential that students grasp the
have been received and approved by the
                                                          modes of inquiry and knowledge associated
Registrar's Office at least five days prior to the
                                                          with these disciplines.
date of graduation. Degrees are awarded at
                                                              Consequently, the Baccalaureate degree
the following times: January 1 for those who
                                                          (Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science) is
complete requirements between September 1
                                                          conferred upon the student who has completed
and the end of the Fall semester; May
                                                          an educational program incorporating the two
Commencement date for those who complete
                                                          principles of the liberal arts known as distribu-
requirements between January 1 and the end
                                                          tion and concentration. The objective of the
of the Spring semester; May term for those
                                                          distribution principle is to insure that the
who complete requirements during May term;
                                                          student achieves breadth in learning through
Summer I for those who complete require-
                                                          the study of the major dimensions of human
ments during Summer I; Summer II for those
                                                          inquiry: the humanities, the social sciences,
who complete requirements during Summer II.
                                                          and the natural sciences. The objective of the
   Lycoming's Commencement ceremony
                                                          concentration principle is to provide depth of
occurs in May. Students will be permitted to
                                                          learning through completion of a program of
participate in the ceremony when (a) they
                                                          study in a given discipline or subject area
have finished all degree requirements as of
                                                          known as the major. The effect of both
the preceding January 1, have finished all
                                                          principles is to impart knowledge, inspire
requirements as of the May date, or have a
                                                          inquiry, and encourage creative thought.
plan approved by the Registrar for finishing
during May term or the Summer sessions; and               THE BACHELOR OF
(b) they are in good academic standing at the
conclusion of their last semester prior to the            ARTS DEGREE
ceremony.                                                 Requirements For Graduation
   The College will graduate any student who                  Every B.A. degree candidate is expected to
has completed the distribution program,                   meet the following requirements in order to
fulfilled the requirements for one major,                 qualify for graduation:
earned a minimum of 32 units (128 semester                • Complete the distribution program.
hours) and met all other requirements for                 • Complete the Writing Across the
graduation.                                                 Curriculum Program requirements.
   Exceptions to or waivers of any requirements           • Complete one year of Physical Activities,
and/or policies listed in this Catalog must                 Wellness, or Community Service. Military
be made by the Committee on Academic                        Science 011, 021, 031, or 041 may satisfy this
Standards.                                                  requirement.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                             33                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




• Complete a major consisting of at least eight          semester hours may be completed provided
  unit courses (32 semester hours). Students             that the minimum 2.00 cumulative average is
  must pass every course required for the                maintained.
  major and have a minimum major grade                 • Complete in residence the final eight courses
  point average of 2.00.                                 (32 semester hours) offered for the degree at
• Pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester               Lycoming.
  hours) with a minimum cumulative grade               • Satisfy all financial obligations incurred at
  point average of 2.00. Additional credits              the College.
  beyond 128 semester hours may be completed
  provided that the minimum 2.00 cumulative            THE DISTRIBUTION
  average is maintained.                               PROGRAM
• Complete in residence the final eight courses
  (32 semester hours) offered for the degree at        The Distribution Program for
  Lycoming.                                            the B.A. and B.S. Degrees
• Satisfy all financial obligations incurred at            A course can be used to satisfy only one
  the College.                                         distribution requirement (except in the Cultural
                                                       Diversity area). Courses for which a grade of
THE BACHELOR OF                                        “P” is recorded may not be used toward the
SCIENCE DEGREE                                         fulfillment of the distribution requirements.
    The Bachelor of Science degree is avail-           (Refer to page 28 for an explanation of the
able to students majoring in Biology, Chemis-          grading system.) No more than two courses
try, Computer Science, Physics or Psychology.          used to satisfy the distribution requirements
Students may elect either the B.A. or the B.S.         may be selected from the same department,
degree in these majors. The B.S. degree is             except for ENGL 106 or 107 and Foreign
appropriate for students planning further              Language courses numbered below 222. This
education in a graduate or professional school.        means that in English, Foreign Languages
                                                       literatures, and Theatre care must be taken to
Requirements For Graduation                            comply with this rule.
    Every B.S. degree candidate is expected to             A course in any of the following distribu-
meet the following requirements in order to            tion requirements refers to a full-unit course
qualify for graduation:                                (four semester hours) taken at Lycoming, any
• Complete the B.S. major in either Biology,           appropriate combination of fractional unit
  Chemistry, Computer Science, Physics or              courses taken at Lycoming which accumulate
  Psychology. Students must pass every                 to four semester hours, any appropriate course
  course required for the major and have a             which is taken by cross-registration, any
  minimum major grade point average of 2.00.           appropriate course which is part of an ap-
• Complete the distribution program.                   proved off-campus program (such as those
• Complete the Writing Across the                      listed in the catalog sections titled COOPERA-
  Curriculum Program requirements.                     TIVE PROGRAMS, SPECIAL ACADEMIC
• Complete one year of Physical Activities,            OPPORTUNITIES, and STUDY ABROAD
  Wellness, or Community Service. Military             PROGRAMS), or any approved course
  Science 011, 021, 031 or 041 may satisfy this        transferred from another institution.
  requirement.                                             Special distribution requirements which
• Pass a minimum of 32 units (128 semester             apply to students in the Lycoming Scholar
  hours) with a minimum grade point average            Program appear on page 43. For information
  of 2.00. Additional credits beyond 128               regarding CLEP and AP credit see page 26.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  34                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                               THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




A. English - Students are required to pass             college, or by passing a competence examina-
ENGL 106 or 107 during their freshman year.            tion administered by the Department of Math-
B. Fine Arts - Students are required to pass           ematical Sciences. Enrolled students may take
two courses (or the equivalent) from Art,              this examination only once during a semester
Creative Writing, Literature, Music, and/or            and may be subject to a testing fee. No student
THEA 100, 114, 135-136, 137-138, 145, 148,             will be permitted to take this examination while
201, 212, 235-236, 332, 333, 335.                      enrolled in MATH 100.
C. Foreign Language - Students are required            F. Natural Sciences - Students are required to
to pass a course in French, German, Greek,             pass two laboratory courses chosen from
Hebrew, or Spanish numbered 101, unless                Astronomy/Physics, Biology, and/or Chemisty.
exempted on the basis of placement, and a              G. Social Sciences - Students are required to
course numbered above 101 in the same                  pass two courses from Criminal Justice,
language. Placement at the appropriate course          Economics, Political Science, Psychology, or
level will be determined by the faculty of the         Sociology-Anthropology.
Department of Foreign Languages and
Literatures.                                           H. Cultural Diversity - Students are required to
                                                       pass one designated course which introduces
D. Humanities - Students are required to pass          students to Cultural Diversity which are distinct
four courses from History, Literature (English,        from the predominant Anglo-American culture.
Foreign Languages and THEA 335), Philoso-              The course selected to fulfill this requirement
phy, and/or Religion. At least one course              may also be used to satisfy one of the other
must be successfully completed in 3 of the 4           general education requirements in the liberal
disciplines.                                           arts. Students also may fulfill the cultural
E. Mathematics - Students are required to              diversity requirement by successfully complet-
demonstrate competence in basic algebra and            ing at least one full-time semester (12 semester
to pass one course selected from CPTR 108,             hours) in a college-accepted study abroad
MATH 106, 109, 112, 123, 128, 129, 130,                program.
214, or 216. The requirement of competence
                                                           The following courses have been approved to
in basic algebra must be met before the end of
the fourth semester or within one year of              be offered as cultural diversity courses and will
entry, whichever is later. Students that have          be offered as such. Students must check
not met this competency requirement before             semester class schedules to determine which
the final semester of the applicable time              courses are offered as “D” (cultural diversity)
period must register for MATH 100 in that              courses for that semester.
semester.                                              ART                         ART 222, 339
    New students take the mathematics                  BUSINESS                    BUS 244, 319
placement examination determined by the                ENGLISH                     ENGL 332, 334
Department of Mathematical Sciences at a               FRENCH                      FRN 311
new-student orientation session. Those who             GERMAN                      GERM 221, 222
do not pass this exam may take home a                  HISTORY                     HIST 120, 140, 220
computerized study guide and take another                                          230, 240
exam at a specified time.                              MUSIC                       MUS 116, 128, 234
   After beginning classes at Lycoming                 POLITICAL SCIENCE PSCI 221, 327, 347
College, a student may satisfy the basic               PSYCHOLOGY                  PSY 341
algebra competence requirement by successful           RELIGION                    REL 110, 224,
completion of MATH 100 at Lycoming, or of                                          225, 226, 228
an approved course transferred from another

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          35                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




SOCIOLOGY-                 SOC 229, 331, 334,                    number prefix (ex. PHIL, ENGL,
 ANTHROPOLOGY              335, 336, 337                         ACCT, etc.).
SPANISH                    SPAN 221, 222, 311
                                                         III. Approved Writing Intensive Courses
THEATRE                    THEA 114, 212,
                                                             The following courses have been approved
                           332, 333, 335, 410
                                                         to be offered as writing intensive courses and
WOMEN’S AND                WGST 200, 300
                                                         may be offered as such. Students must check
 GENDER STUDIES
                                                         semester class schedules to determine which
Writing Across The                                       courses are offered as “W” courses for that
Curriculum Program                                       semester.
I. Purpose                                               ACCOUNTING        ACCT 223, 320, 442
    The Lycoming College Writing Across the              ARCHAEOLOGY/CULTURE OF ANCIENT
Curriculum Program has been developed in                  NEAR EAST        ART 222
response to the conviction that writing skills           ART               ART 222, 223, 331,
promote intellectual growth and are a hall-                                333, 334, 336, 339
mark of the educated person. The program                 ASTRONOMY         ASTR 230
has therefore been designed to achieve two               BIOLOGY           BIO 200, 222, 224
major, interrelated objectives:                          BUSINESS          BUS 244, 342, 344,
  1) to enhance student learning in general                                410, 441
      and subject mastery in particular, and
                                                         CHEMISTRY         CHEM 330, 331, 332
   2) to develop students’ abilities to commu-
                                                         COMMUNICATION     COMM 211, 326,
      nicate clearly. In this program, students
                                                                           332, 440
      are given opportunities to write in a
                                                         COMPUTER SCIENCE CPTR 246, 247,
      variety of contexts and in a substantial
                                                                           346, 448
      number of courses, in which they receive
                                                         CRIMINAL JUSTICE  CJ 447
      faculty guidance and reinforcement.
                                                         ECONOMICS         ECON 236, 337, 440
II. Program Requirements                                 EDUCATION         EDUC 338, 339, 343,
    Students must successfully complete the                                344, 447
following writing requirements:                          ENGLISH           ENGL 218, 225, 331,
   1) ENGL 106 (Composition) or ENGL                                       334, 336, 338
      107 (Honors Composition).                          FRENCH            FRN 222, 412
   2) A writing component in all distribution            GERMAN            GERM 321
      courses completed at Lycoming.                     HISTORY           HIST 215, 218, 230,
   3) Three courses designated as writing-                                 247, 312, 328, 330,
      intensive, or “W” courses.                                           332, 335, 449
The following policies apply:                            INTERNATIONAL     INST 449
        • Successful completion of ENGL 106
                                                          STUDIES
          or 107 is a prerequisite for enrollment
                                                         MATHEMATICS       MATH 234
          in writing-intensive courses.
        • All courses designated “W” are                 MUSIC             MUS 336
          numbered 200 or above.                         PHILOSOPHY        PHIL 216, 217, 218,
        • One of the student’s “W” courses must                            219, 301, 332, 333,
                                                                           334, 335, 336, 340
          be in his/her major (or one of the
          majors) or with departmental approval          PHYSICS           PHYS 338, 447
          from a related department. All                 POLITICAL SCIENCE PSCI 210, 334, 400,
          three cannot carry the same course-                              439

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    36                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                  THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




PSYCHOLOGY                 PSY 225, 324, 431,            they are not making satisfactory progress in their
                           432, 436                      major. This action is taken by the Dean of the
RELIGION                   REL 230, 331, 337             College upon the recommendation of the
SOCIOLOGY-                 SOC 229, 331                  department, coordinating committee (for
 ANTHROPOLOGY                                            established interdisciplinary majors), or Curricu-
SPANISH                    SPAN 323, 418,                lum Development Committee (for individual
                           424, 426                      interdisciplinary majors). The decision of the
THEATRE                    THEA 212, 332, 333            Dean of the College may be appealed to the
                                                         Committee on Academic Standards by the
Physical Activities, Wellness, and                       student involved or by the recommending
Community Service Program                                department or committee. Students pursuing
                                                         majors in two different degrees are subject to the
I. Purpose                                               policy for dual degrees on page 32.
    This program is designed to promote                  Departmental Majors — The following
students’ physical welfare, health awareness,            Departmental majors are available:
and to encourage a sense of civic responsibility.
                                                         Bachelor of Arts Degree:
II. Program Requirements                                 Accounting
    Students must pass any combination of two            Art History
semesters of zero credit course work selected            Art Studio
from the following:                                      Astronomy
  1. Designated physical activities courses,             Biology
  2. Designated varsity athletics,                       Business Administration
  3. Designated wellness courses,                        Chemistry
  4. Designated community service projects,              Communication
                                                         Computer Science
  5. Designated military science courses.
                                                         Criminal Justice
                                                         Economics
CONCENTRATION                                            English
The Major                                                French
   Students are required to complete a series            German
of courses in one departmental or interdiscipli-         History
nary (established or individual) major.                  Mathematics
Specific course requirements for each major              Music
offered by the College are listed in the                 Philosophy
curriculum section of this catalog. Students             Physics
must earn a 2.00 or higher cumulative grade              Political Science
point average in the major. Students must                Psychology
declare a major by the beginning of their                Religion
junior year. Departmental and established                Sociology-Anthropology
interdisciplinary majors are declared in the             Spanish
Office of the Registrar, whereas individual              Theatre
interdisciplinary majors must be approved by             Bachelor of Science Degree:
the Committee on Curriculum Development.                 Biology
Students may complete more than one major,               Chemistry
each of which will be recorded on the transcript.        Computer Science
Students may be removed from major status if             Physics
                                                         Psychology
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            37                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




Established Interdisciplinary Majors —                      is Actuarial Mathematics and the minor is
The following established Bachelor of Arts                  Mathematics (three courses must be taken
degree interdisciplinary majors include course              outside of the major), their major is Art and
work in two or more departments:                            the minor is Art History, their major is
Accounting-Mathematical Sciences                            Biology and the minor is Environmental
Actuarial Mathematics                                       Science, their major is Religion and the
American Studies                                            minor is Biblical Languages.
Archaeology and Culture of the Ancient Near East                A discipline is any course of study in
International Studies                                       which a student can major. Tracks within
Literature                                                  majors are not separate disciplines.
                                                          • A student may not receive a minor unless
Individual Interdisciplinary Majors —                       his/her average in the courses which count
Students may design majors which are unique                 for his/her minor is a minimum of 2.00.
to their needs and objectives and which combine           • Courses taken P/F may not be counted
course work in more than one department.                    toward a minor.
These majors are developed in consultation
                                                              Students must declare their intention to
with students' faculty advisors and with a
panel of faculty members from each of the                 minor by completing a form available in the
sponsoring departments. The applications are              Office of the Registrar.
acted upon by the Curriculum Development                      When students complete a minor, the title
Committee. The major normally consists of at              will be indicated on their official transcript.
least 10 courses, at least six of which are at the        Minor requirements must be completed at the
300 or 400 level. No more than two courses                time of graduation.
used to satisfy distribution requirements may be          Departmental Minors — Requirements for a
included in the major. Examples of individual             departmental minor vary from department to
interdisciplinary majors are: Legal Studies,              department. Students interested in pursuing a
Women and the Legal System, and Religion                  departmental minor should consult that
and Marketing. Applications are available in              department for its policy regarding minors.
the Office of the Registrar.
                                                          Departmental minors are available in the
                                                          following areas:
The Minor                                                 ACCOUNTING
    The College awards two kinds of minors,               ART
departmental and interdisciplinary, in recog-                Art History
nition of concentrated course work in an area                Commercial Design
other than the student’s major. All minors are               Painting
subject to the following limitations:                        Photography
• A minor must include at least two unit                     Sculpture
  courses which are not counted in the                    ASTRONOMY
  student’s major.                                        BIOLOGY
• A student may receive at most two minors.                  Biology
• Students with two majors may receive only                  Environmental Science
  one minor; students with three majors may               BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
  not receive a minor.                                    CHEMISTRY
• Students may not receive a minor in their               COMMUNICATION
  major discipline unless their major discipline          CRIMINAL JUSTICE
                                                          ECONOMICS

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     38                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                 THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




ENGLISH                                                PRE-PROFESSIONAL
  Literature                                           PROGRAMS (also see “Pre-Professional
  Writing                                              Advising” in The Advising Program section)
FOREIGN LANGUAGES
                                                       Preparation for Educational Professions —
AND LITERATURES
  French                                               Lycoming College believes that the liberal arts
  German                                               provide the best preparation for future teachers.
                                                       Thus, all education students complete a liberal
  Spanish
                                                       arts major in addition to the Lycoming College
HISTORY
                                                       Teacher Education Certificate requirements.
  American History
                                                       Students can be certified in elementary,
  European History
  History                                              secondary (biology, chemistry, citizenship,
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES                                  English, general science, mathematics, physics,
                                                       social sciences, social studies), K-12 (art,
  Computer Science
                                                       foreign languages, music), and special educa-
  Mathematics
                                                       tion (cognitive, behavior and physical/health
PHILOSOPHY
                                                       disabilities). All teacher education programs
  Philosophy
  Philosophy and Law                                   are approved by the Pennsylvania Department
  Philosophy and Science                               of Education. Pennsylvania certificates are
                                                       recognized in most other states either through
  Ethics
                                                       reciprocal agreements or by transcript evalua-
PHYSICS
                                                       tion. For more detailed information, see the
POLITICAL SCIENCE
                                                       Education Department listing on page 99.
  Political Science
  American Politics                                    Preparation for Health Professions — The
  World Politics                                       program of pre-professional education for the
  Legal Studies                                        health professions (allopathic, dental, osteopathic,
PSYCHOLOGY                                             podiatric and veterinary medicine; optometry,
RELIGION                                               and pharmacy) is organized around a sound
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY                                 foundation in biology, chemistry, mathematics,
THEATRE                                                and physics and a wide range of subject matter
  Performance                                          from the humanities, social sciences, and fine
  Technical Theatre                                    arts. At least three years of undergraduate
  Theatre History and Literature                       study is recommended before entry into a
Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdisciplinary           professional school; the normal procedure is to
minors include course work in two or more              complete the Bachelor of Arts degree.
departments. Students interested in interdisci-            Students interested in one of the health
plinary minors should consult the faculty              professions or in an allied health career should
coordinator of that minor. Interdisciplinary           make their intentions known to the Admissions
minors are available in the following areas:           Office when applying and to the Health
ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURE OF THE                         Professions Advisory Committee (HPAC), Dr.
 ANCIENT NEAR EAST                                     Edward Gabriel, Chair, during their first
BIBLICAL LANGUAGES                                     semester (see page 46).
WOMEN’S AND GENDER STUDIES                             Preparation for Legal Professions —
                                                       Lycoming offers a strong preparation for
                                                       students interested in law as a profession.
                                                       Admission to law school is not predicated
                                                       upon a particular major or area of study; rather,
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          39                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




a student is encouraged to design a course of             talents in selected areas through access to the
study (traditional or interdisciplinary major)            specialized academic programs and facilities
which is of personal interest and significance.           of other colleges, universities, academies and
While no specific major is recommended,                   hospitals. Although thorough advising and
there are certain skills of particular relevance          curricular planning are provided for each of
to the pre-law student: clear writing, analyti-           the cooperative programs, admission to
cal thinking, and reading comprehension.                  Lycoming and registration in the program of
These skills should be developed during the               choice do not guarantee admission to the coop-
undergraduate years.                                      erating institution. The prerogative of admitting
    Pre-law students should register with the             students to the cooperative aspect of the
Legal Professions Advisory Committee (LPAC),              program rests with the cooperating institution.
Dr. John Whelan, Chair, during their first                Students who are interested in a cooperative
semester (see page 47).                                   program should contact the coordinator during
                                                          the first week of the first semester of their
Preparation for Theological Professions —
                                                          enrollment at Lycoming. This is necessary to
Students preparing to attend a theological
                                                          plan their course programs in a manner that
seminary should examine the suggestions set
                                                          will ensure completion of required courses
down by the Association of Theological
                                                          according to the schedule stipulated for the
Schools. It is recommended that students
                                                          program. All cooperative programs require
pursue a broad program in the liberal arts with           special coordination of course scheduling at
a major in one of the humanities (English,                Lycoming.
history, languages, literature, philosophy,
religion) or one of the social sciences (Ameri-           Engineering — Combining the advantages of
can studies, criminal justice, economics,                 a liberal arts education and the technical
international studies, political science, psychol-        training of an engineering curriculum, students
ogy, sociology-anthropology). Students                    complete three years of study at Lycoming and
preparing for a career in religious education             two years at a cooperating university. Upon
should major in religion and elect five or six            satisfactory completion of the first year of
courses in psychology, education and sociol-              engineering studies, Lycoming awards a
ogy. This program of study will qualify                   Bachelor of Arts degree. When students
students to work as educational assistants or             successfully complete the second year of
directors of religious education after graduate           engineering studies, the cooperating university
study in a theological seminary.                          awards a Bachelor of Science degree in
    Students should register with the Theologi-           engineering.
cal Professions Advisory Committee (TPAC),                    At Lycoming, students complete the dis-
Dr. Steven Johnson, Chair, during their first             tribution program and courses in physics,
semester. TPAC acts as a “center” for                     mathematics, and chemistry. The cooperating
students, faculty, and clergy to discuss the              Universities offer aerospace, agricultural,
needs of students who want to prepare                     ceramic, chemical, civil, computer, electrical,
themselves for the ministry, religious educa-             engineering science, industrial, mechanical,
tion, advanced training in religion, or related           mining and nuclear engineering. Faculty
vocations (see page 47).                                  advisor: Dr. David Wolfe.
                                                          Forestry or Environmental Studies —
COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS                                      Lycoming College offers a cooperative
    Lycoming has developed several coopera-               program with Duke University in environ-
tive programs to provide students with opport-
                                                          mental management and forestry. Qualified
unities to extend their knowledge, abilities, and

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     40                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




students can earn the baccalaureate and master         American Medical Association, or they may
degrees in five years, spending three years at         complete the cooperative program. Students
Lycoming and two years at Duke. All                    electing the cooperative program normally
Lycoming distribution and major requirements           study for three years at Lycoming, during
must be completed by the end of the junior             which time they complete 24 unit courses,
year. At the end of the first year at Duke, a          including the College distribution requirements,
baccalaureate degree will be awarded by                a major, and requirements of the National
Lycoming. Duke will award the professional             Accrediting Agency for Clinical Laboratory
degree of Master of Forestry or Master of              Sciences (NAACLS). The current requirements
Environmental Management to qualified                  of the NAACLS are: four courses in chemis-
candidates at the end of the second year.              try (one of which must be either organic or
    The major program emphases at Duke are             biochemistry); four courses in biology
Forest Resource Management, Resource Eco-              (including courses in microbiology and
nomics and Policy, and Resource Ecology.               immunology), and one course in mathematics.
    The program is flexible enough, however,              Students in the cooperative program usually
to accommodate a variety of individual designs.        major in biology, following a modified major
An undergraduate major in one of the natural           of six unit courses that exempts them from
sciences, social sciences, or business may             Ecology (BIO 224) and Plant Sciences (BIO
provide good preparation for the programs at           225). Students must take either Microbiology
Duke, but a student with any undergraduate             (BIO 321) or Microbiology for the Health
concentration will be considered for admission.        Sciences (BIO 226), and either Human
All students need at least two courses each in         Physiology (BIO 323) or Cell Biology (BIO
biology, mathematics, and economics.                   435). The cooperative program requires
    Students begin the program at Duke in July         successful completion of a one-year internship
after their junior year at Lycoming with a one-        at a hospital accredited by the American
month session of field work in natural resource        Medical Association. Lycoming is affiliated
management. They must complete a total of              with the following accredited hospitals:
48 units which generally takes four semesters.         Williamsport, Robert Packer, Lancaster,
    Some students prefer to complete the               Graduate, and Abington. Students in the
baccalaureate degree before undertaking grad-          cooperative program receive credit at Lycom-
uate study at Duke. The master degree                  ing for each of eight courses in biology and
requirements for these students are the same           chemistry successfully completed during the
as for those students entering after the junior        clinical internship. Successful completion of
year, but the 48-unit requirement may be               the Registry Examination is not considered a
reduced for completed relevant undergraduate           graduation requirement at Lycoming College.
work of satisfactory quality. All credit                   Students entering a clinical internship for
reductions are determined individually and             one year after graduation from Lycoming must
consider the students' educational background          complete all of the requirements of the
and objectives. Faculty advisor: Dr. Melvin            cooperative program, but are not eligible for
Zimmerman.                                             the biology major exemptions indicated
                                                       above. Upon graduation, such students may
Medical Technology - Students desiring a
                                                       apply for admission to a clinical program at
career in medical technology may either
                                                       any hospital. Faculty Advisor: Dr. Terry
complete a Bachelor of Arts or a Bachelor of
                                                       McGarvey.
Science program followed by a clinical
internship at any hospital accredited by the

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          41                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




Optometry — Through the Accelerated                     ensure that they have satisfied all require-
Optometry Education Curriculum Program,                 ments. Faculty Advisor: Dr. Edward Gabriel.
students interested in a career in optometry
                                                        Podiatry — Students interested in podiatry
may qualify for admission to the Pennsylvania
                                                        may either seek admission to a college of
College of Optometry after only three years at
                                                        podiatric medicine upon completion of the
Lycoming College.
                                                        Bachelor of Arts degree or through the Accel-
    After four years at the Pennsylvania College
                                                        erated Podiatric Medical Education Curricu-
of Optometry, a student will earn a Doctor of
                                                        lum Program (APMEC). The latter program
Optometry degree. Selection of candidates for
                                                        provides an opportunity for students to
the professional segment of the program is
                                                        qualify for admission to the Pennsylvania
completed by the admissions committee of the
                                                        College of Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the
Pennsylvania College of Optometry during the
                                                        Ohio College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM)
student’s third year at Lycoming. (This is one
                                                        after three years of study at Lycoming. At
of two routes that students may choose. Any
                                                        Lycoming, students in the APMEC program
student, of course, may follow the regular
                                                        must successfully complete 24 unit courses,
application procedures for admission to the
                                                        including the distribution requirements and a
Pennsylvania College of Optometry or another
                                                        basic foundation in biology, chemistry,
college of optometry to matriculate following
                                                        physics, and mathematics. During the first
completion of his or her baccalaureate pro-
                                                        year of study at PCPM or OCPM, students must
gram.) During the three years at Lycoming
                                                        successfully complete a program of basic
College, the student will complete 24 unit
                                                        science courses and an introduction to podiatry.
courses, including all distribution require-
                                                        Successful completion of the first year of
ments, and will prepare for his or her profes-
                                                        professional training will contribute toward the
sional training by obtaining a solid foundation
                                                        fulfillment of the course requirements for a
in biology, chemistry, physics, and mathematics.
                                                        Bachelor of Arts degree at Lycoming.
During the first year of study at the Pennsylva-
                                                            Students in the cooperative program who
nia College of Optometry, the student will
                                                        major in biology will be allowed to complete
take 39 semester hours of basic science
                                                        a modified major which will exempt them
courses in addition to introductions to optom-
                                                        from two biology courses: Ecology (BIO 224)
etry and health care. Successful completion of
                                                        and Plant Sciences (BIO 225). This modified
the first year of professional training will
                                                        major requires the successful completion of
complete the course requirements for the B.A.
                                                        the initial year at PCPM or OCPM.
degree at Lycoming College.
                                                            Students interested in a career in podiatric
    Most students will find it convenient to
                                                        medicine should indicate their intentions to
major in biology in order to satisfy the
                                                        the Health Professions Advisory Committee.
requirements of Lycoming College and the
                                                        Faculty Advisor: Dr. Edward Gabriel.
Pennsylvania College of Optometry. Such
students are allowed to complete a modified             U.S. Army Reserve Officers Training
biology major which will exempt them from               Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program
two biology courses: Ecology (BIO 224) and              provides an opportunity for Lycoming
Plant Sciences (BIO 225). (This modified                students to enroll in the Army Reserve
major requires the successful completion of             Officers’ Training Corps (ROTC). Lycoming
the initial year at the Pennsylvania College of         notes enrollment in and successful comple-
Optometry.) Students desiring other majors              tion of the program on student transcripts.
must coordinate their plans with the Health             Military Science is a four-year program
Professions Advisory Committee in order to              divided into a basic course given during the

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   42                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                  THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




freshman and sophomore years and an                          Students are admitted to the program by
advanced course given during the junior and              invitation of the Scholar Council, the group
senior years. Students who have not com-                 which oversees the program. The council
pleted the basic course may qualify for the              consists of a director and four other faculty
advanced course by completing the Leader’s               selected by the Dean of the College, and four
Training Course between the sophomore and                students elected by current scholars. The
junior years. Students enrolled in the                   guidelines governing selection of new scholars
advanced course receive a monthly, non-                  are flexible; academic excellence, intellectual
taxable stipend. One course in military                  curiosity, and creativity are all taken into
history will fulfill the professional military           account. Students who desire to participate in
                                                         the Scholar Program but are not invited may
education requirements.
                                                         petition the Scholar Council for consideration.
    Students successfully completing the
                                                         Petitioning students should provide the Scholar
advanced course and the Leadership
                                                         Council with letters of recommendation from
Development and Assessment Course                        Lycoming faculty and a transcript to be sent to
between the junior and senior years will                 the director of the Scholar Program.
qualify for a commission as a Second                         To remain in the program, students must main-
Lieutenant in the United States Army upon                tain a cumulative average of 3.00 or better. Stu-
graduation, and will incur a service obligation          dents who drop below this average will be placed
in the active Army, Army National Guard or               on Scholar probation for one semester. After one
Army Reserve.                                            semester, they will be asked to leave the program
    The U.S. Army Reserve Officers’ Training             if their GPA has not returned to 3.00 or higher.
Corps (ROTC) program is offered to                       To graduate as a Scholar, a student must have at
Lycoming College students in cooperation                 least a 3.00 cumulative average. Scholars must
with Bucknell University. For more                       successfully complete five Lycoming Scholars
information, call 570-577-1013.                          Seminars, as well as the non-credit Senior
                                                         Scholar Seminar in which they present the
THE HONORS PROGRAM                                       results of their independent studies. In addi-
The Scholar Program                                      tion, the following distribution requirements
   The Lycoming College Scholar Program is a             must be met.
special program designed to meet the needs and           Scholar Distribution Requirements for
aspirations of highly motivated students                 Students in B.A. and B.S. Programs
of superior intellectual ability. Lycoming
Scholars satisfy the College’s distribution              A. English — Scholars must complete ENGL
requirements with more challenging courses               106 or ENGL 107. The Scholar Council
than students not in the Scholar Program are             strongly recommends that qualified scholars
required to complete. (Substitutions to the              enroll in ENGL 107 if scheduling permits.
Scholar Distribution Requirements can be                 ENGL 106 or 107 must be taken during the
made only by successful application to the               freshman year.
Scholar’s Council.) Lycoming Scholars also               B. Fine Arts — Scholars are required to pass
participate in special interdisciplinary seminars        two courses (or the equivalent) from the
and in an independent study culminating in a             following: Art: ART 111, 115, 220 or higher;
senior presentation. Scholars may audit a fifth          Music: MUS 117, 160 or higher; Theatre:
course each semester at no additional cost. In           THEA 114 or higher, excluding THEA 135-
addition, Scholars may be exempted from the              136, 137-138, or 148; Creative Writing:
usual limitations on independent studies by the          ENGL 240, 322, 342, 411, 412, 441 or 442;
Individual Studies Committee.                            Literature: Any English Literature course

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            43                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




(except ENGL 215) and the literature courses          H. Cultural Diversity — Scholars are required
of the Department of Foreign Languages and            to pass one designated course which introduces
Literatures (French, German, or Spanish).             students to Cultural Diversity which is distinct
                                                      from the dominant western culture. Approaches
C. Foreign Language — Scholars are                    to study may be artistic, historical, sociological,
required to pass a course in French, German,          anthropological, international, psychological,
Greek, Hebrew, or Spanish numbered 111 or             or issues oriented. The course selected to
higher. Placement at the appropriate course           fulfill this requirement may also be used to
level will be determined by the faculty of the        satisfy one of the other general education
Department of Foreign Languages and Litera-           requirements in the liberal arts.
tures. Scholars who have completed two or
more years of a given language in high school         I. Writing Across the Curriculum — This
are not admitted for credit to the elementary         requirement is the same as that stipulated by
course in the same foreign language except by         the College for all students.
written permission of the chairman of the             J. Physical Activities, Wellness and Commu-
department.                                           nity Service — This requirement is the same as
D. Humanities — Scholars are required to              that stipulated by the College for all students.
pass four courses from three of the following
                                                      K. Lycoming Scholar Seminars — Team-
disciplines: History: any course numbered
                                                      taught interdisciplinary seminars are held every
200 or higher; Literature: any English
                                                      semester under the direction of the Lycoming
literature course (except ENGL 215) and the
                                                      Scholar Council. They meet for one hour each
literature courses of the Department of
                                                      week (Tuesdays at noon) and carry one hour of
Foreign Languages and Literatures (French,
German, or Spanish); Philosophy: any course           credit. Grades are “A/F” and are based on
numbered 200 or higher; Religion: any course          students’ performance. Lycoming Scholars are
numbered 222 or higher.                               required to successfully complete five seminars
                                                      and they are permitted to register for as many as
E. Mathematics — Scholars must earn at                eight. Topics for each academic year will be
least a grade of B (3.00) in one of MATH 106,         selected by the Scholar Council and announced
109, 112, 123 or CPTR 108; or successfully            before spring registration of the previous year.
complete one of MATH 128, 129, 130, 214               Students must be accepted into the Scholar
or 216.                                               Program before they enroll in a Scholar Seminar.
F. Natural Sciences — Scholars are required           Scholars are strongly urged to register for a least
to pass two laboratory courses from the               one seminar during the freshman year.
following: Astronomy/Physics: any course              L. Senior Project — In the senior year,
numbered 111 or higher; Biology: any course           scholars must successfully complete an
numbered 110 or higher; Chemistry: any                independent studies or departmental honors
course numbered 110 or higher.                        project which has been approved in advance by
G. Social Sciences — Scholars are required to         the Independent Studies Committee and the
pass two courses from the following: Eco-             Scholar Council. This project must be pre-
nomics: any course numbered 110 or higher;            sented orally as part of the Senior Scholar
Political Science: any course numbered 106            Seminar and be accepted by the Scholar
or higher; Psychology: PSY 110 or any other           Council.
PSY course numbered 225 or higher. Sociol-            M. Major — Scholars must complete a major
ogy-Anthropology: any course from 110, 220,           and 32 units (128 semester hours), exclusive of
229, 300 or higher.                                   the Senior Scholar Seminar.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 44                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




Note to Transfer Students — In the case of              IMS departments. The seminars are offered as
transfer students and those who seek to enter           one semester-hour courses and do not result in
the program after their freshman year and in            overload charges for full-time students.
other cases deemed by the Scholar Council to              Students who are currently Lycoming
involve special or extraordinary circum-                College Scholars may also become Manage-
stances, the Council shall make adjustments to          ment Scholars and participate in both pro-
the scholar distribution requirements provided          grams.
that in all cases such exceptions and adjust-
ments would still satisfy the regular College           Departmental Honors
distribution requirements.                                  Honors projects are normally undertaken
                                                        only in a student’s major, and are available
Management Scholars                                     only to exceptionally well-qualified students
Program of the Institute for                            who have a solid background in the area of
Management Studies                                      the project and are capable of considerable
                                                        self-direction and have a GPA of at least 3.00.
  The IMS sponsors a Management Scholars
                                                        The prerequisites for registration in an honors
Program for academically talented students in
                                                        program are as follows:
the three IMS departments. To join the
                                                        • A faculty member from the department(s)
Management Scholars Program, a student must
                                                          in which the honors project is to be under-
satisfy the following criteria:
                                                          taken must agree to be the director and must
  a) Have a declared major or minor in one or
                                                          secure departmental approval of the project.
      more of the IMS departments. However,
                                                        • The director, in consultation with the
      the IMS Director may invite or permit
                                                          student, must convene a committee consist-
      other students to join the Management               ing of two faculty members from the
      Scholars Program who do not meet this               department in which the project is to be
      criteria, such as freshmen who have not             undertaken, one of whom is the director of
      yet declared a major or minor.                      the project, and one faculty member from
  b) Have an overall GPA of 3.25 or higher, or            each of two other departments related to the
      exhibit strong academic potential if the            subject matter of the study.
      student is a first-semester freshman.             • The Honors Committee must then certify by
   To graduate as a Management Scholar, a                 their signatures on the application that the
student must meet the following criteria:                 project in question is academically legiti-
  a) Successfully complete two semester-                  mate and worthy of pursuit as an honors
      hours of Management Scholar Seminars.               project, and that the student in question is
  b) Successfully complete a major or minor in            qualified to pursue the project.
      one of the three IMS departments.                 • The project must be approved by the
  c) Graduate with a GPA of 3.25 or higher in             Committee on Individual Studies.
      both overall college work, and within an              Students successfully complete honors
      IMS major and/or minor.                           projects by satisfying the following conditions
  d) Successfully complete an appropriate               in accordance with guidelines established by
      internship, practicum or independent              the Committee on Individual Studies:
      study, or complete a special project              • The student must produce a substantial
      approved by the IMS Director.                       research paper, critical study, or creative
   At least one Management Scholar Seminar is             project. If the end product is a creative
taught per academic year on an interdiscipli-             project, a critical paper analyzing the
nary topic of relevance to students in all three          techniques and principles employed and the

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           45                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




  nature of the achievement represented in the         Services can supply counseling support for
  project shall be also submitted.                     students with personal adjustment issues.
• The student must successfully explain and                During the sophomore year, the student
  defend the work in a final oral examination          must choose a major and select an advisor from
  given by the honors committee.                       the major department. The new advisor, while
• The Honors Committee must certify that the           serving as a resource, can best advise that
  student has successfully defended the                student about course selection and career
  project, and that the student’s achievement          opportunities.
  is clearly superior to that which would ordi-            Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to contrib-
  narily be required to earn a grade of “A” in         ute to students’ development in yet another
  a regular independent studies course.                way. They insist that students assume full
• The Committee on Individual Studies must             responsibility for their decisions and academic
  certify that the student has satisfied all of        progress. By doing so, they help to prepare
  the conditions mentioned above.                      them for the harder choices and responsibili-
    Except in unusual circumstances, honors            ties of the professional world.
projects are expected to involve independent               Also, Lycoming provides special advising
study in two consecutive unit courses.                 programs for careers in medicine, law and
Successful completion of the honors project            religion. Interested students should register
will cause the designation of honors in that           with the appropriate advisory committee
department to be placed upon the permanent             immediately after deciding to enter one of
record. Acceptable theses are deposited in the         these professions.
College library. In the event that the study is
not completed successfully or is not deemed            Pre-Professional Advising
worthy of honors, the student shall be re-             (also see “Pre-Professional Programs” in the
registered in independent studies and                  Concentration section)
given a final grade for the course.                    Preparation for Educational Professions —
                                                       Students interested in obtaining teacher cert-
THE ADVISING PROGRAM                                   ification should consult with a member of the
Academic Advising                                      Education Department as early as possible.
   One advantage of a small college is the             See the Education Department listing on
direct, personal contact between a student             page 99.
and the College faculty who care about that
                                                       Preparation for Health Professions —
student’s personal, academic, and profes-
                                                       Students interested in one of the health
sional aspirations. The student can draw
                                                       professions or in an allied health career should
upon their years of experience to resolve
                                                       make their intentions know to the Admissions
questions about social adjustment, workload,
                                                       Office when applying and to the Health
study skills, tutoring and more. Perhaps the
                                                       Professions Advisory Committee (HPAC)
member of the faculty with the most impact
                                                       during their first semester. This committee
on a student is the academic advisor.
                                                       advises students concerning preparation for
   The freshman advisor, whom the student
                                                       and application to health-professions schools.
meets at summer orientation, assists with
                                                       All pre-health professions students are invited
course selection by providing accurate
                                                       to join the student Pre-Health Professions
information about requirements, programs
                                                       Association. Also see descriptions of the
and career options. Advisors help students to
                                                       cooperative programs in podiatric medicine,
identify other campus resources. Health
                                                       optometry, and medical technology.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  46                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                              THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




Preparation for Legal Professions —                     documentation, and any other writing
Students interested in pre-law should register          concern. Writing Consultants offer 35
with the Legal Professions Advisory Committee           hours of scheduled tutoring weekly.
(LPAC) during their first semester and should           Tutoring in the Content Areas—The ARC
join the Pre-Law Society on campus. LPAC                offers one-on-one tutoring support in almost
assists the pre-law student through advising,           every course. Tutors assist students with
compilation of recommendations, and dissemi-            homework assignments and test prepara-
nation of information and materials about law           tion. A list of tutors is available on the ARC
and the legal profession. The Pre-Law Society           website or by contacting the ARC directly.
sponsors films, speakers, and field trips
including visits to law school campuses.                Study Skills Support—The ARC provides
                                                        support through individualized instruction
Preparation for Theological Professions —               and through small group workshops upon
Students who plan to investigate the religious          request. Topics vary depending on the
vocations should register with the Theological          needs of students. Also, the ARC offers a
Professions Advisory Committee (TPAC)                   more formal option for study skills support:
during their first semester. TPAC acts as a             ARC 100, Success Skills Workshop.
“center” for students, faculty, and clergy to
discuss the needs of students who want to               ARC 100 Success Skills Workshop
prepare themselves for the ministry, religious          A seven-week course, the workshop
education, advanced training in religion, or            introduces students to a variety of topics
related vocations. Also, it may help coordi-            important to student success. Among
nate internships for students who desire                these are time management, learning
practical experience in the parish ministry or          styles, motivation, highlighting text,
related areas.                                          note-taking. Topics will be selected to
                                                        meet students’ needs. ARC 100 is highly
ACADEMIC                                                recommended for students who, in consul-
                                                        tation with their academic advisors, choose
SUPPORT SERVICES                                        to improve their academic skills. This
Academic Resource Center                                non-credit course will be graded on a
(ARC)                                                   pass/fail basis.
Daniel Hartsock, Director                               Disability Support—The Coordinator of
Jane Keller, Assistant Director                         Services for Students with Disabilities
www.lycoming.edu/arc                                    assists students in arranging for classroom
   The Academic Resource Center, located on             accommodations, meeting requirements,
the third floor of the Snowden Library,                 and developing appropriate study practices.
provides a variety of free services to the
campus community.                                     Office of the Assistant
  Tutoring in Writing—Working one-on-                 Dean for Freshmen
  one, Writing Consultants use questioning                Lycoming College believes a student’s
  techniques to help writers improve papers           freshman year needs structure and support.
  while developing confidence and indepen-            This office serves as a focal point for the
  dence as writers. Writers may use the               freshman and his or her family.
  Writer’s Room, a quiet place for writing, to           Freshman Orientation — The purpose of
  work on papers while consulting with tutors            this required program is to acquaint new
  about development, organization, grammar,              students and their families more fully with
                                                         the College so that they can begin their
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         47                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




  Lycoming experience under the most                   SPECIAL ACADEMIC
  favorable circumstances. Students sit for            OPPORTUNITIES
  placement tests, confer with their academic
                                                       First-Year Seminar — Every fall, Lycoming
  advisors, preregister for fall classes, and
                                                       College offers a number of first-year seminars,
  become acquainted with their classmates.
                                                       small classes that investigate topics in various
  1st Weekend — Begins the day freshmen                disciplines. Students receive a letter from the
  arrive with New Student Convocation. The             Director of the First Year Seminar in the
  weekend activities include academic success,         spring before their freshman year telling them
  career and library workshops along with              what seminars will be available.
  social events.
                                                       May Term — This four-week voluntary
  Information and Support — Students
                                                       session is designed to provide students with
  and their families find the Office of the
                                                       courses listed in the catalog and experimental
  Assistant Dean for Freshmen an accessible
                                                       and special courses that are not normally
  resource to resolving problems, developing
                                                       available during the fall and spring semesters
  solutions, coordinating services and enabling
                                                       and summer sessions. Some courses are
  student success. Student and family
                                                       offered on campus, others involve travel. In
  newsletters are provided during the year.
                                                       addition to the courses themselves, attractions
Office of the Assistant                                include less formal classes and reduced tuition
Dean for Sophomores                                    rates. On campus courses have included
                                                       Chemistry in Context, Field Geology, Field
    The College continues to provide academic
                                                       Ornithology, Energy Economics, Writer’s
counseling and support as students move into
                                                       Seminar, American Detective Fiction, The
the sophomore year. The Assistant Dean for
                                                       American Hard-Boiled Mystery, Organized
Sophomores meets individually with second
                                                       Crime in America, and Internet Marketing and
year students and, in cooperation with the
                                                       Advertising. Travel courses have included
Assistant Dean for Freshmen, conducts small
                                                       Painting at the Outer Banks, Art History and
group retreats and other meetings. These
                                                       Photography in France and Spain, Cross-
efforts are designed to alert students to their
                                                       Cultural Psychology in France and Spain, and
circumstances, to help them explore options,
to motivate them to achieve their academic             Tropical Marine Biology in Jamaica. Students
aspirations, and to provide them with useful           may take a maximum of 4 semester hours.
strategies and resources for success.                  Summer Sessions I and II — These two suc-
    In addition, the Sophomore Dean consults           cessive five-week academic terms offer the
with students on a variety of personal, social,        opportunity for students to complete intern-
residential, financial, and other concerns.            ships, independent studies and semester
Early Assessment                                       courses. Students may take a maximum of 8
   During the sixth week of the semester               semester hours.
classroom instructors prepare Early Assess-            Independent Studies — Independent studies
ment Progress Reports for freshmen, new                are available to any qualified student who
transfer students, students on academic                wishes to engage in and receive academic
probation, and students with cumulative GPAs           credit for any academically legitimate course
less than 2.10. In week seven, academic                of study for which he or she could not other-
advisors, students, parents, deans, and coaches        wise receive credit. It may be pursued at any
receive these progress reports and can counsel         level (introductory, intermediate, or advanced)
students having difficulty regarding adjust-           and in any department, whether or not the
ment strategies. Progress grades are not               student is a major in that department. An inde-
recorded on the student’s permanent record.            pendent studies project may either duplicate a
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  48                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                  THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




catalogue course or be completely different                   For a one unit (4 semester hour) internship,
from any catalog course. In order for a student          at least ten hours per week must be spent in
to be registered in any independent study course,        agency duties. Academic requirements
the following conditions must be satisfied:              include a daily log or journal, a research paper
1) An appropriate member of the faculty must             of approximately ten pages or its equivalent,
   agree to supervise the project and must               and a reading list of approximately five books
   certify by signing the application form that          or the equivalent. The student and academic
   the project involves an amount of legiti-             supervisor meet weekly during the term of the
   mate academic work appropriate for the                internship.
   amount of academic credit requested and                  The objectives of the internship program
   that the student in question is qualified to          are:
   pursue the project.                                   1) to further the development of a central
2) The studies project must be approved by                   core of values, awarenesses, strategies,
   the chair of the department in which the                  skills, and information through experi
   studies project is to be undertaken. In the               ences outside the classroom or other
   case of catalog courses, all department                   campus situations, and
   members must approve offering the catalog             2) to facilitate the integration of theory and
   course as an independent studies course.                  practice by encouraging students to relate
3) After the project is approved by the                      their on-campus academic experiences
   instructor and the chair of the appropriate               more directly to society in general and to
   department, the studies project must be                   possible career and other post-baccalaure-
   approved by the Committee on Individual                   ate objectives in particular.
   Studies.                                                   Any junior or senior student in good acad-
                                                         emic standing may petition the Committee on
    Participation in independent studies
                                                         Individual Studies for approval to serve as an
projects which do not duplicate catalog
                                                         intern. A maximum of 16 credits can be
courses is subject to the following:
                                                         earned through internships, practica, and/or
• Students undertaking independent studies               student teaching. Guidelines for program
  projects must have a GPA of at least 2.50.             development, assignment of tasks and
• Students may not engage in more than one               academic requirements, such as exams,
  independent studies project during any                 papers, reports, grades, etc., are established in
  given semester.                                        consultation with a faculty director at
• Students may not engage in more than two               Lycoming and an agency supervisor at the
  independent studies projects during their              place of internship.
  academic careers at Lycoming College.                       Students with diverse majors have
• The Individual Studies Committee may                   participated in a wide variety of internships,
  exempt members of the Lycoming College                 including ones with NBC Television in New
  Scholar Program from these two limitations.            York City, the Allenwood Federal Prison
   As with other academic policies, any other            Camp, Pennsylvania State Department of
exceptions to these two rules must be approved           Environmental Resources, Lycoming County
by the Committee on Academic Standards.                  Historical Society, the American Cancer
                                                         Society, business and accounting firms, law
Internship Program — An internship is a                  offices, hospitals, social service agencies,
course jointly sponsored by the College and a            banks and Congressional offices.
public or private agency or subdivision of the
College in which a student is able to earn               Practica — Practica are offered in Account-
college credit by participating in some active           ing, Art, Biology, Business, Communication,
capacity as an assistant, aide, or apprentice.           Criminal Justice, Economics, Education, IMS,

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            49                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




and Psychology. These courses require 10 to            University for one semester. They may
12 hours of work per week in a business,               choose from seven different programs:
agency, or organization in addition to class-          Washington Semester, Urban Semester,
room time. A maximum of 16 credits can be              Foreign Policy Semester, International
earned through practica, internships, and/or           Development Semester, Economic Policy
student teaching.                                      Semester, Science and Technology Semester,
                                                       or American Studies Semester.
Teacher Intern Program — The purpose of
the Teacher Intern Program is to provide               United Nations Semester — With the
individuals who have completed a baccalaure-           consent of either the Department of History
ate degree with the opportunity to become              or Political Science and the Registrar, selected
certified teachers through on-the-job training.        students may enroll at Drew University in
Interns can earn a Lycoming College Teacher            Madison, New Jersey, in the United Nations
Education Certificate and be certified by the          Semester, which is designed to provide a first-
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in elementary,            hand acquaintance with the world organiza-
secondary (biology, chemistry, citizenship,            tion. Students with special interests in world
English, general science, mathematics,                 history, international relations, law, and
physics, social sciences, social studies), K-12        politics are eligible to participate.
(art, foreign languages, music), and special
                                                       Capitol Semester Internship Program —
education (cognitive, behavior and physical/
                                                       This program is available to eligible students
health disabilities).
                                                       on a competitive basis. The program is co-
    Interested individuals should file a formal
                                                       sponsored by Pennsylvania’s Office of
application with the Education Department for
                                                       Administration and Department of Education.
admission to the Intern Program. Upon
                                                       Paid internships are available to students in
completion of the application process, interns
                                                       most majors. Interested students should
receive a letter of Intern Candidacy from the
                                                       contact the Career Development Center for
Pennsylvania Department of Education which
                                                       additional information.
the candidate then uses to apply for a teaching
position. Necessary professional coursework
can be completed prior to the teaching                 STUDY ABROAD
experience when individuals obtain teaching            PROGRAMS
position. See Education Department on page                 Students are encouraged to participate in a
99 for more information.                               variety of study abroad programs sponsored by
The Philadelphia Urban Semester — A full               affiliates or other institutions. Students who
semester liberal arts program for professional         intend to study abroad must have a cumulative
development and field study is available to            grade point average of 2.50 or higher. Study
Lycoming students. The program is open to              abroad opportunities range from summer
juniors majoring in any discipline or program.         sessions to a full semester or academic year
The Philadelphia Urban Semester is sponsored           overseas. All overseas programs require prior
and administered by the Great Lakes Colleges           approval from the students’ major depart-
Association.                                           ments, the Study Abroad Coordinator, the
                                                       Dean of Students and the Registrar. Applica-
Washington Semester — With the consent                 tions may be obtained from the Study Abroad
of the Department of Political Science and the         Coordinator.
Registrar, selected students are permitted to              Before embarking on an overseas learning
study in Washington, D.C., at The American             experience, students should review the study

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  50                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                THE ACADEMIC PROGRAM




abroad materials in the Career Development
Center (2nd floor, Wertz Center). With the
help of the Study Abroad Coordinator, they
must identify any additional program require-
ments such as fluency in a foreign language.
   A limited number of competitive grants for
study abroad at our affiliate institutions are
available. Application forms are posted on
the College’s home page under Academic
Programs, Study Abroad. For more details,
contact the Study Abroad Coordinator.
Lycoming aid is not part of the Study Abroad
package.
Affiliate Programs — Lycoming has
cooperative arrangements with seven institu-
tions overseas: Anglia Polytechnic University
(Cambridge, England), CUEF Université
Stendhal-Grenoble 3 (Grenoble, France),
Estudio Sampere (Ecuador, Spain), Lancaster
University (Lake District, England), Oxford-
Brookes University (Oxford, England)
Regent’s College (London, England), Tandem
Escuela Internacional (Madrid, Spain), and
the University of Westminister (London,
England). Course offerings vary at each
institution, contact the Study Abroad Coordi-         Student Teaching Abroad — Lycoming
nator for details. Students interested in the         College has established a cooperative
programs at Grenoble, Sampere, and Tandem             program with Moorhead State University
should contact the Department of Foreign              enabling teacher education students to do all
Languages and Literatures.                            or part of their student teaching in a foreign
                                                      country.
Programs Sponsored by Other Institutions                  This program offers exceptional students
Lycoming students have taken advantage of             the opportunity to student teach in nearly any
opportunities offered by other institutions in        country in the world. Students are placed in
countries such as Australia, the Czech                independent international schools where
Republic, France, Germany, Hungary, Italy,            English is the instructional language. An
and Switzerland. Information regarding these          effort is made to assign students to geographi-
and other programs are available in the Career        cal areas that will enrich their backgrounds,
Development Center, the Department of                 serve their special interests and expand their
Foreign Languages and Literatures, and from           cultural horizons.
the Study Abroad Coordinator.
                                                      NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume
                                                      responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare
                                                      of students engaged in or en route to or from
                                                      any off-campus studies or activities which are
                                                      not under its exclusive jurisdiction.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         51                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
CURRICULUM




 CURRICULUM
Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses and              Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study
Freshman level courses                                Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for
Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses and              Departmental Honors
Sophomore level courses                               *N = course level 1, 2, 3 or 4 as determined
Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses and              by department
Junior level courses                                  Courses not in sequence are listed separately,
Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and                  as:
Senior level courses                                      Drawing ART 111
Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalog courses                      Color Theory ART 212
offered on a limited basis                            Courses which imply a sequence are indicated
Numbers 160-169 Applied Music, Theatre                with a dash between, meaning that the first
Practicums and other fractional credit courses        semester must be taken prior to the second, as:
Numbers 470-479 Internships                               Intermediate French
                                                         FRN 111-112
                                                      Except for academic reasons, all students
                                                      have the right of access to all courses.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 52                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                             ACCOUNTING




ACCOUNTING (ACCT)
Associate Professor: Kuhns
Assistant Professors: Slocum (Chairperson),
  Wienecke
    The purpose of the accounting major is to
help prepare the student for a career within the
accounting profession. In order to satisfy the
needs of an extremely diverse profession, the
major in accounting consists of two separate
tracks. Track I is a 150 semester hour
program designed to meet the 150 hour
requirement of the American Institute of
Certified Public Accounts for those students
whose goal is to become a member of the
AICPA in Pennsylvania or any other state.
Track II is a 128 semester hour program and is
designed to meet the requirements of the
Pennsylvania State Board of Accountancy for
those students whose goal is to become
Certified Public Accountants in Pennsylvania.
     Students planning to sit for the Uniform            Track requirements:
Certified Public Accounting Examination are              1. Accounting–150 hours:
advised to check with their State Board of                  ACCT 320, 442, 447, and either 449 or
Accounting to assure that they have completed               470-479; BUS 236; ECON 110 and 111;
all courses required for C.P.A. licensure.                  one course from SOC or PSY
    The Department of Accounting is a                    2. Accounting–128 hours:
member of the Institute for Management                      One course from ACCT 320, 442, 449,
Studies. See page 121.                                      470-479, or BUS 345
Core courses required of all majors:
                                                            The following courses, when scheduled as
ACCT 110, 223, 344, 345, 436, 440, 441, 443;
                                                         W courses, count toward the writing intensive
BUS 128, 210, 211, 223, 235, 244, 338, 441;
                                                         requirement: ACCT 223, 320, and 442.
ECON 110 or 111; MATH 123. All account-
ing majors are required to take and pass a               Minor
standardized accounting achievement exam                    A minor in the Department of Accounting
during their final semester. Students who fail           consists of ACCT 110 and four higher
may retake the exam or take an independent               numbered accounting courses as determined
study in the area(s) that were tested unsatisfac-        by the student’s interests.
torily.
                                                         100
                                                         PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING
                                                            This course prepares students to make
                                                         better informed financial decisions in a
                                                         complicated world. A practical, relatively non-
                                                         technical course designed to help the student
                                                         identify and plan to meet their financial goals.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            53                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACCOUNTING




110                                                   344
ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTING THEORY                          INTERMEDIATE
   An introductory course in recording,               ACCOUNTING THEORY I
classifying, summarizing, and interpreting the            An in-depth examination of the environ-
basic business transaction. Problems of               ment within which financial accounting
classification and interpretation of accounts         theory exists. An examination of the basic
and preparation of financial statements are           postulates that underlie financial statements
studied.                                              and a critique of what financial reporting
                                                      means. Prerequisite: ACCT 223 or consent
130                                                   of instructor.
ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERIAL
DECISION-MAKING                                       345
   An introduction to the various components          INTERMEDIATE
of managerial accounting. Emphasis is                 ACCOUNTING THEORY II
placed on managerial problem-solving                      An examination of the various accounting
techniques and the analysis of the results.           and reporting issues affecting assets. Prereq-
Accounting systems, costing procedures, cost-         uisite: ACCT 344.
volume profit relationships, managerial
control processes and the use of computers as         436
aids to decision-making are studied. Students         INTERMEDIATE
will gain hands-on experience with various            ACCOUNTING THEORY III
computer applications of managerial account-             An examination of the various accounting
ing. Prerequisite: ACCT 110.                          and reporting issues affecting liabilities,
                                                      stockholder equity, earnings per share, cash
223
                                                      flows and accounting changes. Prerequisite:
COST AND BUDGETARY
                                                      ACCT 345 with a minimum grade of C, or
ACCOUNTING THEORY
                                                      consent of instructor.
   Methods of accounting for material, labor
and factory overhead expenses consumed in
                                                      440
manufacturing using job order, process, and
                                                      AUDITING THEORY
standard costing techniques. Prerequisite:
                                                          A study of the science or art of verifying,
ACCT 110.
                                                      analyzing, and interpreting accounts and
320                                                   reports. The goal of the course is to empha-
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION                                size concepts which will enable students to
SYSTEMS/FUND ACCOUNTING                               understand the philosophy and environment
    An introduction to design and use of              of auditing. Special attention is given to the
accounting information systems (AIS) and              public accounting profession, studying
design and implementation of control systems          auditing standards, professional ethics, the
in AIS. An introduction to the theory and             legal liability inherent in the attest function,
practice of fund accounting. Prerequisite:            the study and evaluation of internal control,
ACCT 110. Co-requisite: BUS 211 (in the               the nature of evidence, the growing use of
first half of the semester)                           statistical sampling, the impact of electronic
                                                      data processing, and the basic approach to
                                                      planning an audit. Finally, various audit
                                                      reports expressing independent expert


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 54                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                        ACCOUNTING




opinions on the fairness of financial state-          449
ments are studied. Prerequisites: ACCT 344,           PRACTICUM IN ACCOUNTING
MATH 123, BUS 211, and senior status; or                  An introduction to the real world of
consent of instructor.                                accounting. Students are placed in Managerial
                                                      and Public Accounting positions in order to
441
                                                      effect a synthesis of the students’ academic
FEDERAL INCOME TAX
                                                      course work and its practical applications.
    Analysis of the provisions of the Internal
                                                      Specifics of the course work to be worked out
Revenue Code relating to income, deductions,
                                                      in conjunction with department, student and
inventories, and accounting methods. Practical
                                                      sponsor. May be repeated for credit with
problems involving determination of income
                                                      consent of instructor.
and deductions, capital gains and losses,
computation and payment of taxes through              470-479
withholding at the source and through declara-        INTERNSHIP (See index)
tion are considered. Planning transactions so            Interns in accounting typically work off
that a minimum amount of tax will result is           campus under the supervision of a public or
emphasized. Prerequisite: ACCT 110 or                 private accountant.
consent of instructor.
                                                      N80-N89
442
                                                      INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
FEDERAL INCOME TAX
                                                         Typical examples of recent studies in
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING
                                                      accounting are: computer program to generate
   An analysis of the provisions of the
                                                      financial statements, educational core for
Internal Revenue Code relating to partner-
                                                      public accountants, inventory control, and
ships, estates, trusts, and corporations. An
extensive series of problems is considered,           church taxation.
and effective tax planning is emphasized.             490-491
Prerequisite: ACCT 110, or consent of                 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
instructor.                                           DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
443
ACCOUNTING FOR BUSINESS
COMBINATIONS
    Certain areas of advanced accounting
theory, including business combinations and
consolidated financial statements. Prerequi-
site: ACCT 345. One-half unit of credit.
447
ADVANCED ACCOUNTING
   An intensive study of partnerships,
installment and consignment sales, branch
accounting, foreign currency transactions, and
segment interim reporting. Prerequisite:
ACCT 443. One-half unit of credit.




2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         55                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
ACCOUNTING-MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES • ACTUARIAL MATHEMATICS




                                                     ACTUARIAL
                                                     MATHEMATICS
                                                     Associate Professor: Sprechini (Coordinator)
                                                         The Actuarial Mathematics major is
                                                     designed to offer, within a liberal arts
                                                     framework, coursework to prepare for an
                                                     actuarial career. Students obtain the neces-
                                                     sary mathematical background for the first
                                                     actuarial exam and two or three exams
                                                     beyond the first one. Students also obtain
                                                     some background in accounting, economics,
                                                     and business which is needed for an actuarial
                                                     career. At the time of completion of all major
                                                     requirements, or shortly thereafter, a student
                                                     should be prepared to sit for up to four of the
                                                     examinations of the Society of Actuaries.
                                                         The Actuarial Mathematics major consists
                                                     of 14 unit courses and two semesters of non-
                                                     credit colloquia. In Mathematical Sciences
                                                     required courses are CPTR 125, MATH 128
ACCOUNTING -                                         (or exemption by examination from 128),
                                                     129, 130, 234, 238, 332, 333, and two courses
MATHEMATICAL                                         from MATH 321, 338, and 400. Also
                                                     required are ACCT 110, ECON 110; one of
SCIENCES                                             MATH 214 or ECON 230; one of ACCT 130,
                                                     ACCT 441, BUS 338, ECON 331 or 441; two
Associate Professor: Kuhns (Coordinator)
                                                     semesters of MATH 339 or 449 taken during
    The accounting-mathematical sciences             the junior and/or senior years with at least one
interdisciplinary major is designed to offer,        semester for a letter grade.
within a liberal arts framework, courses                 Recommended courses include: ACCT
which will aid in constructing mathematical          223, 224, 226, 344; BUS 339, 342; CPTR
models for business decision-making.                 108; ECON 220, 229, 332, 337; MATH 106,
Students obtain the necessary substantial            231, 432, 434. It is also strongly recom-
background in both mathematical sciences             mended that the student complete as many of
and accounting.                                      the actuarial examinations as possible prior to
    Required accounting courses are: ACCT            graduation.
110, 223, 320, 344, 345, 441, 442. In
mathematical sciences, required courses are:
CPTR 125, 321 and MATH 112, 128, 129,
338 and either 123 or 332. Recommended
courses include: MATH 130, 238, 333;
BUS 223, 235, 236, 338, 339; CPTR 108,
246; ECON 110, 111; PSY 224, 225; and
SOC 110.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                56                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                     AMERICAN STUDIES




                                                       courses from the other option give further
                                                       breadth to an understanding of America.
                                                       Students also will be encouraged to take
                                                       elective courses relating to other cultures.
                                                          Students should design their American
                                                       Studies major in consultation with the
                                                       program coordinator.
                                                       American Arts Concentration Option
                                                       ART 332 — American Art of the 20th Century
                                                       ENGL 222 — American Literature I
                                                       ENGL 223 — American Literature II
                                                       MUS 128 — American Music
AMERICAN                                               MUS N 80 — Studies in American Music
STUDIES (AMST)                                         THEA N 80 — Studies in American Theatre
                                                       American Society Concentration Option
Professor: Piper (Coordinator)                         ECON 224 — Urban Problems
    The American Studies major offers a com-           PSCI 331 — Civil Rights and Liberties
prehensive program in American civilization            PSCI 335 — Law and Society
which introduces students to the complexities          SOC 334 — Racial and Cultural Minorities
underlying the development of America and              Students interested in teacher certification
its contemporary life. Thirteen courses are            should refer to the Department of Education
included.                                              on page 99.
Four Course Requirements                               200
    The primary integrating units of the major,        AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION
these courses—some team-taught—will                       An analysis of the historical, sociocultural,
encourage students to consider ideas from              economic, and political perspectives of
different points of view and help them to              American civilization with special attention to
correlate information and methods from                 the interrelationships between these various
various disciplines:                                   orientations. May be taken for either one-half
1. AMST 200 — America as a Civilization                unit (Section 200A) or full unit (Section B);
                   (First semester of major            declared majors and prospective majors should
                   study)                              take the full-unit course, 200B. Alternate
2. AMST 220 —American Tradition in the                 years.
                   Arts and Literature
                                                       220
3. HIST 449 or SOC 447 — Research and
                                                       AMERICAN TRADITION IN
   Methodology (junior or senior year)
4. Internship or Independent Study (junior             THE ARTS AND LITERATURE
   or senior year)                                        The relationship of the arts and literature to
                                                       the various historical periods of American life.
Concentration Areas                                    470-479     INTERNSHIP (See Index)
    Six courses in one option and three in the
other are needed. Six primary concentration-           N80-N89     INDEPENDENT STUDY
option courses in American Arts or American                        (See Index)
Society build around the insights gained in            490-491     INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
the core courses. They focus particular                            DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
attention on areas most germane to academic                        (See Index)
and vocational interests. The three additional

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          57                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURE OF THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST




                                                          HIST 210         Ancient History
                                                          REL 113 or 114
                                                                           Old or New Testament Faith
                                                                           and History (not both)
                                                          REL 223          Backgrounds of Early
                                                                           Christianity
                                                          REL 224          Judaism and Islam
                                                          REL 228          History and Culture of the
                                                                           Ancient Near East
                                                       3. Two semesters of foreign language from:
                                                          HEBR 101-102 Old Testament Grammar
                                                                           and Readings
                                                          GRK 101-102 New Testament Grammar
ARCHAEOLOGY                                                                and Readings
                                                          (Modern Hebrew, Arabic, Classical Greek,
AND CULTURE OF                                            or Latin may be substituted)
THE ANCIENT                                            4. Two courses from related disciplines,
                                                          subject to advance approval by the
NEAR EAST                                                 supervisory committee. These courses
Assistant Professor: Knauth (Coordinator)                 may be taken from the fields of anthropol-
                                                          ogy, art, economics, geology, history,
   The interdisciplinary major in Archaeology             literature, philosophy, political science, or
and Culture of the Ancient Near East is                   religion (or other related fields); they can
designed to acquaint students with the “cradle            be taken as independent study projects.
of Western civilization.” The major requires              Topics should be relevant to some aspect
completion of ten courses relevant to the study           of ancient or modern Near Eastern or
of the ancient Mediterranean and Near Eastern             Greco-Roman study. Additional “culture”
worlds from the following courses, which are              courses as listed above are allowed in this
described in their departmental sections:                 category. Although not included in the
1. Two courses in archaeology:                            major, the study of German and/or French
   REL 226        Biblical Archaeology                    is highly recommended for those planning
                  and one course from:                    to pursue graduate studies in the field.
   REL 401        Field Archaeology (based             Minor
                  on an excavation trip)                  An interdisciplinary minor in Archaeology
   REL 421        Archaeological Field                 and Culture of the Ancient Near East requires
                  Supervision                          completion of one archaeology course from
   REL/HIST/ART 470-479                                REL 226 or 401, and four courses at least
                  Internship (in archaeology           three of which must be numbered 200 or
                  or museum work)                      higher from ASTR 102 or 112, ART 222,
   REL/HIST/ART N80-89                                 HIST 210, REL 113 or 114, 223, 224, 226,
                  Independent Study (project           228, 401, 421, SOC 114, and 229. At least
                  in archaeology)                      two of these courses must be from outside the
2. Four courses in culture from:                       Religion Department.
   ART 222        Survey of Art: Ancient,
                  Medieval, and Non-Western
                  Art
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  58                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                 ART




                                                      Department. Students who place out of ART
                                                      227 will take ART 337, Photography II, to
                                                      fulfill the foundation requirement in photogra-
                                                      phy. In addition, students placed into ART
                                                      337 who are specializing in Track IV, Com-
                                                      mercial Design, will be required to take both
                                                      ART 344, Computer Graphics for Electronic
                                                      Media, and ART 430, Interactive Multi-Media
                                                      and Web Design. Students specializing in
                                                      Track VI, Photography/Electronic Art, will be
                                                      required to take ART 344, Computer Graphics
                                                      for Electronic Media; ART 431, Advanced
                                                      Digital Imaging; or an approved independent
                                                      study.

                                                      Foundation Program
                                                      ART 111 — Drawing I
                                                      ART 115 — Two-Dimensional Design
                                                      ART 116 — Figure Modeling*
                                                      ART 212 — Color Theory
                                                      ART 222 — Survey of Art: Ancient Medieval
                                                                 and Non-Western Art
ART (ART)                                             ART 223 — Survey of Art: Ancient,
Professor: Golahny (Chairperson), Shipley                        Medieval, and Non-Western Art
Associate Professor: Estomin                          ART 227 — Photography I
Assistant Professor: Tran                             ART 148, 248, 348, 448 — Art Colloquium
Visiting Assistant Professor: Smith
                                                        *Students planning to follow the Art
Part-time Instructors: Bastian, Görg, Kaufman,
                                                      Generalist track are not required to take ART
  Rhone, States, Sterngold, Johnson
                                                      116 as part of the foundation program.
   The Art Department offers two majors in
the B.A. Degree—Studio Art and Art History.           Areas of Specialization
                                                      I. Painting
THE B.A. DEGREE -                                     ART 220 — Painting I
STUDIO ART                                            ART 221 — Drawing II
   To complete a Bachelor of Arts Degree              ART 330 — Painting II
with a major in studio art, students must             ART 446 — Studio Research
complete the seven-course foundation                  and two art history courses numbered
program and the requirements for an area of           300 or above.
specialization, successfully complete each
                                                      II. Printmaking
semester’s colloquium (while a declared
                                                      ART 221 — Drawing II
major), and successfully complete the senior
                                                      ART 228 — Printmaking I
exhibition. Exception to participation in the
colloquium may be made by the art faculty.            ART 338 — Printmaking II
   Placement into ART 227, Photography I,             ART 446 — Studio Research
will be based on the experience of the student        and two art history courses numbered
and determined by the faculty of the Art              300 or above.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         59                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ART




III. Sculpture                                              Students planning to complete the K-12 art
ART 225 — Sculpture I                                   certification program must also fulfill the
ART 226 — Figure Modeling II                            following requirements:
ART 335 — Sculpture II                                  ART 310 — History and Practice of Art
ART 446 — Studio Research                                               Education
and two art history courses numbered                    EDUC 200 — Introduction to the Study of
300 or above.                                                           Education
IV. Commercial Design                                   EDUC 339 — Middle and Secondary
ART 221 — Drawing II                                                    School Curriculum and
ART 337 — Photography II                                                Instruction
ART 343 — Introduction to Computer                      PSY 138 — Educational Psychology
               Art                                      EDUC 446, 447, 448, and 449 —
ART 344 — Computer Graphics for                                         Professional Semester
               Electronic Media, OR                     Students are also encouraged to take ART 116
ART 430 — Interactive Multi-Media and                   and EDUC 232.
               Web Design. (Commercial
               Design majors are strongly               VI. Photography/Electronic Art
               encouraged to take both.)                ART 337 — Photography II
ART 442 — Special Projects with                         ART 342 — Photography III
               Commercial Design                        ART 343 — Introduction to Computer
ART 470 — Internship OR                                                Art
ART 449 — Art Practicum                                 ART 431 — Advanced Digital Imaging OR
   A student is encouraged to take the follow-          ART 432 — Large Format Photography
ing courses: ART 431, Advanced Digital                  Two Art History courses numbered 300 or
Imaging; BUS 332, Advertising; BUS 344,                 above.
Electronic Commerce and Internet Marketing;
                                                           Students are also encouraged to take ART
COMM 323, Feature Writing for Special
                                                        344, Computer Graphics for Electronic Media,
Audiences; COMM 110, Principles of                      and ART 430, Interactive Multi-Media and
Communication; and PSY 224, Social                      Web Design.
Psychology.
                                                           The following courses satisfy the cultural
V. Generalist Art Major                                 diversity requirement: ART 222 and 339.
To be taken by those students who are seeking           The following courses, when scheduled as W
teaching certification in Art. In addition, this        courses, count toward the writing intensive
area of specialization is recommended for               requirement: ART 222, 223, 331, 333, 334,
those students also majoring or minoring in             336, and 339.
Psychology with a possible future career in art
therapy.                                                THE B.A. DEGREE -
ART 119 — Ceramics I
ART 220 — Painting
                                                        ART HISTORY
ART 225 — Sculpture I                                      To complete a Bachelor of Arts degree
                                                        with a major in art history, a student must take
ART 228 — Printmaking I
                                                        courses in art history, studio art, and history
ART 343 — Introduction to Computer
                                                        and/or religion. A student majoring in art
                Art
                                                        history is advised to take a foreign language.
and two art history courses numbered 300 or
                                                        Art History majors (once declared) are
above.                                                  required to participate in each semester’s art
                                                        colloquium.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   60                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                   ART




Required of all students:                             tory must take two additional upper level
ART 222 — Survey of Art: Ancient,                     courses beyond the two required for the minor
            Medieval, and Non-Western Art             intended for students who major in other dis-
ART 223 — Survey of Art: From the                     ciplines (i.e., Art 222, 223 and four upper
            Renaissance through the                   level courses).
            Modern Age
ART 447 — Art History Research                        111
ART 148, 248, 348, 448 — Art Colloquium               DRAWING I
                                                         Study of the human figure with gesture and
Choose four of the following:
                                                      proportion stressed. Student is made familiar
ART 310 — History/Practice Art Education
                                                      with different drawing techniques and media.
ART 331 — Recent Developments in Art
                                                      Some drawings from nature.
ART 333 — 19th Century European and
            American Art                              115
ART 334 — Art of the Renaissance                      TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN
ART 336 — Art of the Baroque                             The basic fundamentals found in the two-
ART 339 — Women in Art                                dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space,
                                                      color, and composition are taught in relation-
Choose two of the following:
                                                      ship to the other two-dimensional arts.
ART 111 — Drawing I
                                                      Perceptual theories and their relationships to
ART 115 — Two-Dimensional Design
                                                      what and why we see what we see in art are
ART 116 — Figure Modeling I
                                                      discussed with each problem.
ART 227 — Photography I
                                                      116
Two Additional Courses Outside the Art                FIGURE MODELING I
Department:                                               Understanding the figure will be approached
    Students must take at least two additional        through learning the basic structures and pro-
courses in the areas of History, Literature,          portions of the figure. The course is conceived
Theater or Religion. Students should select           as a three-dimensional drawing class. At least
these courses with their advisors.
                                                      one figure will be cast by each student.
    The following courses have been approved
to be offered as writing intensive courses and        119
may be offered as such: ART 222, 223, 331,            CERAMICS I
333, 334, 336 and 339. Students must check                Emphasis placed on pottery design as it
semester class schedules to determine which           relates to function of vessels and the design
courses are offered as “W” courses for that           parameters imposed by the characteristics of
semester.                                             clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught to
                                                      encourage expression rather than to dispense
Minors
                                                      merely a technical body of information.
   Five minors are offered by the Art Depart-
ment. Requirements for each follow: Com-              212
mercial Design: Art 111, 115, 212, 223, 227           COLOR THEORY
and 343; Painting: Art 111, 115, 220, 330 and             A study of the physical and emotional
221 or 223; Photography: ART 111, 212,                aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on
223, 227, 337 and 342; Sculpture: Art 116,            the study of color as an aesthetic agent for the
225, 226, 335, and 111, 119 or 445; Art His-          artist. The color theories of Johannes Itten
tory: Art 222, 223 and two advanced art his-          will form the base for this course with some
tory courses. Art majors who minor in art his-        study of the theories of Albert Munsell, Faber
                                                      Birren, and Wilhelm Ostwald.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         61                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ART




220                                                     will be a requirement to cast one of the works
PAINTING I                                              in plaster. Prerequisite: ART 116 and consent
   An introduction of painting techniques and           of instructor.
materials. Coordination of color, value, and
                                                        227
design within the painting is taught. Some
                                                        PHOTOGRAPHY I
painting from the figure. No limitations as to
                                                           Objectives of the course are to develop
painting media, subject matter, or style.
                                                        technical skills in the use of photographic
Prerequisite: ART 115 or consent of instructor.
                                                        equipment (cameras, films, darkroom,
221                                                     printmaker) and to develop sensitivity in the
DRAWING II                                              areas of composition, form, light, picture
   Continued study of the human figure.                 quality, etc. Each student must own (or have
Emphasis is placed on realism and figure-               access to) a 35mm camera capable of full-
ground coordination with the use of value and           manual operation.
design. Prerequisite: ART 111.
                                                        228
222                                                     PRINTMAKING I
SURVEY OF ART: ANCIENT,                                     Introduction to the techniques of
MEDIEVAL, AND NON-WESTERN ART                           silkscreen, intaglio, monotype and lithography
    A survey of the major developments in the           printing. One edition of at least six prints
visual arts of the Ancient, Medieval, and Non-          must be completed in each area. Prerequisite:
western fields. Emphasis is on the interrelation        ART 111 or 115; or consent of instructor.
of form and content, the function and meaning
                                                        229
of the visual arts within their respective
                                                        CERAMICS II
cultures, and the importance of visual literacy.
                                                           Continuation of Ceramics I. Emphasis on
223                                                     use of the wheel and technical aspects such as
SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE                                 glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite:
RENAISSANCE THROUGH                                     ART 119.
THE MODERN AGE
                                                        310
    A survey of Western architecture, sculp-
                                                        HISTORY AND PRACTICE
ture, and painting. Emphasis is on the
                                                        OF ART EDUCATION
interrelation of form and content and on the
                                                           This course concerns the teaching of art,
relatedness of the visual arts to their cultural
                                                        from the distant past to the present. Topics
environment: 14th-20th centuries.
                                                        include Discipline-Based Art Education: its
225                                                     philosophy, history, and context; lesson
SCULPTURE I                                             planning; and teaching methods. Course work
    An introduction to the techniques, materi-          includes observation of art classes in elemen-
als, and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax,        tary and secondary schools in the greater
wood, and other materials will be used. The             Williamsport area. Required of art majors in
course will be concerned with ideas about               the K-12 certification program.
sculpture as expression, and with giving
                                                        330
material form to ideas.
                                                        PAINTING II
226                                                        Continuation of Painting I (ART 220).
FIGURE MODELING II                                      Emphasis is placed on individual style and
    Will exploit the structures and understand-         technique. Artists and movements in art are
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce            studied. No limitations as to painting media,
larger, more complex figurative works. There            subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: ART 220.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   62                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                   ART




331                                                    photo art processes such as collage, multiple
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN ART                             images, hand-coloring and/or toning. Empha-
   Recent developments, taking into account            sis is placed on conceptual and aesthetic
global issues, historical reference, and news          aspects of photography. Prerequisite: ART
media.                                                 227.
                                                       338
333
                                                       PRINTMAKING II
19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN
                                                          Continuation of Printmaking I (ART 228).
AND AMERICAN ART
                                                       Emphasis on multi-plate and viscosity
   The art of Western Europe and the United
                                                       printing. Prerequisite: ART 228.
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on
painting in France. Those artists to be studied        339
include David, Goya, Delacroix, Courbet, the           WOMEN IN ART
Impressionists, Turner, Homer, Cole and                   A survey of women artists from a variety
Eakins.                                                of viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social,
334                                                    political and economic — which seeks to
ART OF THE RENAISSANCE                                 understand and integrate the contributions of
   The art of Italy and Northern Europe from           women artists into the mainstream of the
1300 to 1530, with emphasis on the painters            history of art.
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci,                   342
Raphael, Titian, Van Eyck, and Durer, the              PHOTOGRAPHY III
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Mich-                    Study of aesthetics and compositional
elangelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and          strategies using medium format cameras and
Alberti.                                               advanced printing techniques for black and
335                                                    white or color. Emphasis is placed on
SCULPTURE II                                           developing a comprehensive and conceptual
    A continuation of Sculpture I (ART 225).           portfolio. Prerequisites: ART 227, 337,
Emphasis is on advanced technical process.             and either ART 111 or 115; or consent of
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture               instructor.
will be done in the school foundry. Prerequi-          343
site: ART 225.                                         INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER ART
336                                                       Use of computers as an artist’s and
ART OF THE BAROQUE                                     designer’s tool. Concentrated, hands-on
   Seventeenth-century painting and sculp-             study of image manipulation, illustration and
ture in Italy and The Netherlands with                 layout programs. Content of course includes
emphasis on Bernini, Poussin, Rubens, and              funda-mentals of vector and raster imaging,
Rembrandt, with special attention given to the         typography, design, layout, color separation,
expressive, narrative, and painterly styles            and manipulating computer images obtained
present in their art.                                  from scanners, video sources, and the
                                                       students’ own original production using
337                                                    computer paint software. Prerequisites: ART
PHOTOGRAPHY II                                         227 and either ART 111 or 115; or consent of
   To extend the skills developed in Photog-           instructor.
raphy I (ART 227) by continued growth in
technical expertise including instruction in

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          63                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ART




344                                                      photographers in the Photography/Electronic
COMPUTER GRAPHICS                                        Art Track. Prerequisites: ART 342.
FOR ELECTRONIC MEDIA
                                                         440
   Use of the computer as a tool to create,
                                                         PAINTING III
manipulate and edit video for artistic and
                                                            Advanced study of painting techniques and
commercial purposes. Content of course
                                                         materials. A personal painting direction is
includes computer animation, multi-media
                                                         expected. There is some experimentation with
program production and computer interfaced
                                                         new painting techniques. Prerequisite: ART
video production. Prerequisite: ART 343 or
                                                         330.
consent of instructor.
430                                                      441
INTERACTIVE MULTI-MEDIA                                  DRAWING III
AND WEB DESIGN                                              Continued study of the human figure,
    This course is a concentrated, hands-on              individual style, and professional control of
study of interactive media for CD-ROM and                drawing techniques and media are empha-
the World Wide Web. It includes study of the             sized. Prerequisite: ART 221
history and design principles of interactive             442
art, creation of 2-D computer animation,                 SPECIAL PROJECT IN
digital sound editing, Web design and CD-                COMMERCIAL DESIGN
ROM production. Prerequisite: ART 343 or                     Concentrated research, preparation and
consent of instructor.                                   execution of a series of projects in commer-
431                                                      cial design utilizing computer graphics, page
ADVANCED DIGITAL IMAGING                                 layout programs and paint, draw and image
   This course continues the study of the                manipulation software that simulate tradi-
computer as an artist and designer’s tool. It is         tional airbrush, water-based mediums,
the capstone course for those Photography/               markers, colored pencils and ink pens. The
Electronic Media majors who wish to do the               following skills are involved: illustration,
majority of their senior show work in the                photography, design, typesetting, lettering,
digital media. Students learn advanced                   layout, overlays, scanning color separation,
imaging techniques, work with digital                    matching and proofing and preparation of
cameras, use scanners as “cameras,” combine              files for a service bureau or printer. Prerequi-
traditional and digital photography, and                 site: ART 343 or consent of instructor.
experiment with a variety of printing pro-
cesses and substrates. Prerequisite: ART 343             445
or consent of instructor.                                SCULPTURE III
                                                            In Sculpture III the student is expected to
432                                                      produce a series of sculptures that follow a
LARGE FORMAT PHOTOGRAPHY                                 conceptual and technical line of development.
    Study of techniques and aesthetics of large
                                                         Prerequisites: ART 116, 225, and 335.
format photography and alternative processes.
Integration of tools to student’s own artistic           446
process emphasized. A final portfolio of large           STUDIO RESEARCH
format photography and alternative process                  Independent research and creation of new
photography will be produced. Includes                   artwork in an elective studio area, conducted
creation of work which may be incorporated               under the supervision of the appropriate
in the senior group exhibition. This course              faculty member. Includes creation of work,
will serve as the capstone course for traditional        which may be incorporated in the senior group

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    64                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                            ART • ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




exhibition. This course will serve as the
capstone studio experience for Art majors in
the Painting, Printmaking and Sculpture
tracks.
447
ART HISTORY RESEARCH
   Independent research, conducted under the
supervision of the appropriate faculty member,
includes the research and writing of a thesis, to
be presented to a committee of Art Department
faculty. This course may be repeated for credit.
148, 248, 348 and 448
ART COLLOQUIUM
    A non-credit seminar in which faculty,
students and invited professionals discuss and
critique specific art projects. Required of all
students majoring in art. Taken each semes-
ter. Meets 2-4 times each semester. Pass/Fail.
                                                         ASTRONOMY
Non-credit seminar.                                      AND PHYSICS
449                                                      Associate Professors: Erickson (Chairperson),
ART PRACTICUM                                             Fisher, Wolfe
    This course offers students internship                   The department offers two majors. The
experience in commercial design or commer-               major in astronomy is specifically designed to
cial photography with companies and organi-              train students in the field of planetarium edu-
zations. Students work at least 10 hours per             cation; it also may serve as a basis for earning
week for a sponsoring company and attend                 state certification as a secondary school teacher
seminar sessions on issues relevant to their             of general science. The major in physics can
work assignments. Students must apply                    prepare students for graduate work in physics,
directly to the Art Department to arrange job            astronomy, and related physical sciences, for the
placement before pre-registration to be                  cooperative program in engineering, for state
eligible for this course. Prerequisite: ART 442          certification as secondary school teachers of
or consent of instructor.                                physics, or for technical positions in industry.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)
                                                         ASTRONOMY                  (ASTR)
                                                             The major in astronomy requires courses in
    This course offers students internship               astronomy, physics, chemistry and mathematics.
experience in commercial design or commer-               The required courses are ASTR 111, 448, and
cial photography with companies and organi-              five additional courses numbered ASTR 112 or
zations. Prerequisite: ART 430 or 442, or                higher four of which must be numbered ASTR
consent of instructor. Students must apply               230 or higher; PHYS 225-226; two courses in
directly to the Art Department to arrange job            chemistry to be selected from CHEM 110, 111,
placement before pre-registration to be                  330, 331, or 439; and MATH 128-129.
eligible for this course.                                Astronomy majors are also required to register
490-491                                                  for four semesters of ASTR 349 and 449 (non-
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                    credit colloquia)
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            65                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




    The requirement for taking ASTR 448 can             101
be satisfied by doing an individual studies or          PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY
honors project where the results would be pre-          111
sented at a departmental colloquium. A                  PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY
double major in astronomy and physics need                 A summary of current concepts of the
only take the course once. Students participat-         universe from the solar system to distant
ing in an engineering 3-2 program will be               galaxies. Describes the techniques and
exempt from taking ASTR 448. Students who               instruments used in astronomical research.
have success-fully completed a summer REU,              Presents not only what is reasonably well
RUG, or equivalent research experience may              known about the universe, but also considers
request departmental approval to substitute             some of the major unsolved problems.
that experience plus an additional advanced             Credit may not be earned for both 101 and
astronomy or physics course not already                 111. Corequisite for 111: MATH 127 or
required by the major in place of ASTR 448.             consent of instructor.
    The following courses are recommended:
PHIL 223 and 333, PHYS 333, and ART 227.                102
    Students interested in teacher certification        PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY
should refer to the Department of Education on          112
page 99.                                                PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY
    The following course, when scheduled as a               A study of the surface processes and
W course, counts toward the writing intensive           internal structure of the planet Earth. Shows
requirement: ASTR 230.                                  how past events and lifeforms can be recon-
                                                        structed from preserved evidence to reveal the
Minor
                                                        geologic history of our planet from its origin to
   A minor in astronomy consists of a grade of
                                                        the present. Describes the ways geology
C or better in both ASTR 111 and PHYS 225
                                                        influences our environment. Credit may not
plus any three additional courses selected from
                                                        be earned for both 102 and 112. Corequisite
PHYS 226 or ASTR courses numbered 200 or                for 112: MATH 127 or consent of instructor.
higher.                                                 Alternate years.
104                                                     120
FIELD GEOLOGY                                           MANNED SPACE FLIGHT
   A methods course introducing the field
                                                            Traces the development of space flight
techniques needed to study the geology
                                                        capability from Sputnik (1957) through the
of an area. May or summer term only.
                                                        early Space Race to achieve a manned
107                                                     landing upon the surface of the Moon, the era
OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY                                 of space stations, development of the Space
   A methods course providing the opportunity           Transportation System (space shuttle), to
to make a variety of astronomical observations,         current U.S. and Russian space efforts.
both visually and photographically, with and            Examination of scientific, engineering, and
without telescopes. The planetarium is used to          political motivations. Extensive use of
familiarize the student with the sky at various
                                                        NASA video. May incorporate travel to
times during the year and from different
                                                        NASA facilities. Offered only when possible
locations on earth. May or summer term only.
                                                        in May Term. Not for distribution.
                                                        230
                                                        PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES
                                                           A methods course covering major aspects of
                                                        planetarium programming, operation and
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   66                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                 ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




maintenance. Students are required to prepare            446
and present a planetarium show. Upon                     STELLAR DYNAMICS AND
successfully completing the course, students             GALACTIC STRUCTURE
are eligible to become planetarium assistants.               The motion of objects in gravitational
Three hours of lecture and demonstration and             fields. Introduction to the n-body problem.
three hours of practical training per week.              The relation between stellar motions and the
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in ASTR             galactic potential. The large-scale structure of
101 or 111. Alternate years.                             galaxies in general and of the Milky Way
243                                                      Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture per
PLANETARY SCIENCE                                        week. Prerequisites: ASTR 111 and PHYS
    A comparative survey of the various classes          225. Alternate years.
of natural objects that orbit the sun, including         448
the major planets, their satellites, the minor           RESEARCH TOPICS
planets, and comets. Topics include meteoro-                 Students participate in a research project
logical processes in atmospheres, geological             under the guidance of a faculty member in the
processes that shape surface features, internal          department. In weekly meetings, they share
structures, the role of spacecraft in the                reports from the literature and report on their
exploration of the solar system, and clues to            own work. Topics will range from abstract
the origin and dynamic evolution of the solar            theoretical to selected practical experimental
system. Four hours of lecture per week.                  investigations. Prerequisite: Permission of
Prerequisites: a grade of C or better in ASTR            the instructor. Cross-listed as PHYS 448.
111 or 112, or PHYS 225. Alternate years.                May be taken a second time with departmental
344                                                      approval.
RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY                                 349 & 449
    A detailed presentation of the special               ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
theory of relativity and an introduction to the              This non-credit but required course for
general theory. Topics include: observational            juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy and
and experimental tests of relativity, four-              physics offers students a chance to meet and
vectors, tensors, space-time curvature, alterna-         hear active scientists in astronomy, physics,
tive cosmological models, and the origin and             and related scientific areas talk about their own
future of the universe. Four hours of lecture per        research or professional activities. In addition,
week. Prerequisites: ASTR 111 and PHYS 225.              majors in astronomy and physics must present
Alternate years. Cross-listed as PHYS 344.               two lectures, one given during the junior year
445                                                      and one given during the senior year, on the
STELLAR EVOLUTION                                        results of a literature survey or their individual
    The physical principles governing the                research. Students majoring in this department
internal structure and external appearance of            are required to attend four semesters during the
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and               junior and senior years. A letter grade will be
transport within stars. The evolution of stars           given when the student gives a lecture.
from initial formation to final stages. The              Otherwise the grade will be P/F. Students in
creation of chemical elements by nucleosyn-              the Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and
thesis. Four hours of lecture per week.                  Engineering are required to attend two
Prerequisites: ASTR 111 and PHYS 226.                    semesters and present one lecture during their
Alternate years.                                         junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per
                                                         week. Cross-listed as PHYS 349 & 449.
                                                         470-479
                                                         INTERNSHIP (See index)
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            67                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




N80-N89                                                    Up to two courses chosen from ASTR111,
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)                          112, 243, 445 and 446 may substitute for two
  Independent studies may be undertaken in             physics electives. The following courses are
most areas of astronomy.                               recommended: MATH 214 or 332-333, 231,
490-491                                                238; CPTR 125 (these are required or useful
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                  for the cooperative engineering program and
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                        by many internships and graduate schools),
                                                       and PHIL 223, 333.
PHYSICS            (PHYS)                                  Students interested in teacher certification
                                                       should refer to the Department of Education
The B.A. Degree                                        on page 99.
  The required courses for the B.A. in physics             The following courses, when scheduled as
are PHYS 225, 226, 331, 332, 448 and four              W courses, count toward the writing intensive
additional courses numbered PHYS 333 or                requirement: PHYS 338 and 447.
higher; two courses in chemistry to be                 Minor
selected from CHEM 110, 111, 330, 331, or                 A minor in physics requires completion of
439; and MATH 128-129. Physics majors are              the following courses with a C grade or
also required to register for four semesters of        better: PHYS 225-226, 331, 332, and one
PHYS 349 and 449 (non-credit colloquia).               additional course selected from PHYS
                                                       courses numbered 300 or higher.
The B.S. Degree
                                                       106
  The required courses for the B.S. in physics
                                                       ENERGY ALTERNATIVES
are PHYS 225, 226, 331, 332, 337, 439, 448,
                                                         A physicist’s definition of work, energy, and
and three additional courses numbered PHYS
                                                       power. The various energy sources available
333 or higher; two courses in chemistry to be
                                                       for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission and
selected from CHEM 110, 111, 330, or 331;
                                                       fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geothermal. The
MATH 128,129; and two additional courses
                                                       advantages and disadvantages of each energy-
from MATH 130, 214, 231, 233, 238, 321,
                                                       conversion method, including availability,
332, 333; CPTR 125, 246; CHEM 330, 331,
                                                       efficiency, and environmental effects. Present
333, or 443. Physics majors are also required
                                                       areas of energy research and possible future
to register for four semesters of PHYS 349
                                                       developments. Projections of possible future
and 449 (non-credit colloquia).
                                                       energy demands. Exercises and experiments in
    The requirement for taking PHYS 448 can            energy collection, conversion, and utilization.
be satisfied by doing an individual studies or         May or summer term only.
honors project where the results would be
                                                       108
presented at a departmental colloquium. A
                                                       GREAT IDEAS OF THE
double major in astronomy and physics need
                                                       PHYSICAL UNIVERSE
only take the course once. Students partici-
                                                          An introduction to several major concepts
pating in an engineering 3-2 program will be
                                                       of physics which have developed over the
exempt from taking PHYS 448. Students
                                                       past several centuries, relating them to their
who have successfully completed a summer
                                                       broad implications. The emphasis is on a
REU, RUG, or equivalent research experience
                                                       descriptive rather than a mathematical
may request departmental approval to
                                                       discussion of topics which range from early
substitute that experience plus an additional
                                                       Greek concepts of science to present day
advanced astronomy or physics course not
                                                       methods and techniques used to describe the
already required by the major in place of
                                                       physical universe. Many distinctions and
PHYS 448.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  68                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                  ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




similarities between science and other areas of           lasers will be covered. Three hours of lecture
human endeavor will be studied to demon-                  and three hours of laboratory per week.
strate the beauty, simplicity, harmony, and               Prerequisites: PHYS 226 and MATH 128; or
grandeur of some of the basic laws which                  consent of instructor. Alternate years.
govern the universe. Three hours of lecture               336
and two hours of laboratory per week. Alter-              MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF PHYSICS
nate years.                                                 Solution of ordinary linear differential
225-226                                                   equations using power series and Laplace
FUNDAMENTALS OF PHYSICS I-II                              transforms, nonlinear differential and coupled
    A mathematically rigorous introduction to             differential equations, Fourier analysis using
physics designed for majors in physics, astro-            both trigonometric and complex exponential
nomy, chemistry and mathematics. Topics                   functions, complex variables, eigenvalue
include mechanics, thermodynamics, electric-              problems, infinite dimensional vector spaces,
ity and magnetism, waves, optics, and modern              partial differential equations, boundary value
physics. Five hours of lecture and recitation             problem solutions to the wave equation, heat
and one three-hour laboratory per week.                   flow equation and Laplace’s equation. Prereq-
Corequisite: MATH 128 or 129. With consent                uisites: MATH 231 and 238. Alternate years.
of department, MATH 109 may substitute for
                                                          337
MATH 128 or 129 as a prerequisite.
                                                          THERMODYNAMICS AND
331                                                       STATISTICAL MECHANICS
CLASSICAL MECHANICS                                           Classical thermodynamics will be pre-
   An analytical approach to classical mechan-            sented, showing that the macroscopic proper-
ics. Topics include: kinematics and dynamics              ties of a system can be specified without a
of single particles and systems of particles,             knowledge of the microscopic properties of
gravitation and other central forces, moving              the constituents of the system. Then statistical
reference frames, and Lagrangian and Hamil-               mechanics will be developed, showing that
tonian formulations of mechanics. Four hours              these same macroscopic properties are
of lecture and three hours of laboratory per              determined by the microscopic properties.
week. Prerequisites: MATH 129 and a grade                 Four hours of lecture and recitation per week.
of C or better in PHYS 225.                               Prerequisites: PHYS 226 and MATH 129.
                                                          Alternate years.
332
ELECTROMAGNETISM                                          338
   A theoretical treatment of classical electro-          MODERN PHYSICS
magnetism. Topics include: electrostatics,                    Thorough investigation of changes in the
magnetostatics, electric and magnetic poten-              classical understanding of space and time
tials, electric and magnetic properties of matter,        together with those of energy and matter that
Maxwell’s equations, the electromagnetic                  led to the time development of relativistic and
field, and the propagation of electromagnetic             quantum mechanical theories. Topics include:
radiation. Four hours of lecture and three hours          introduction to special relativity, blackbody
of laboratory per week. Prerequisites: MATH               radiation, the postulation of the photon and
129 and a grade of C or better in PHYS 226.               quantization, atomic spectra, interactions of
                                                          matter and energy, Bohr model of the atom,
333                                                       concepts of symmetry, and development and
OPTICS                                                    applications of the Schrodinger equation. Four
  Geometrical optics, optical systems,                    hours of lecture and one-three hour labora-
physical optics, interference, Fraunhofer                 tory per week. Prerequisites: MATH 129 and
and Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and                a grade of C or better in PHYS 226.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                             69                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS




339                                                      447
CONDENSED MATTER PHYSICS                                 NUCLEAR AND PARTICLE PHYSICS
    Structural topics include ordinary crystal-              The course will consider properties of
line structures, liquid crystals, quasi-crystals,        nuclei, nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear
and nanostructures. Property-related topics              reactions (including fission and fusion), and
include periodic potentials, band structure,             properties of elementary particles. The
electromagnetic and thermal properties,                  interactions of nuclear particles with matter
superconductivity, superfluidity, aspects of             and the detection of nuclear particles will be
surface physics, and aspects of polymer                  covered. It will be shown how observed
physics. Four hours of lecture and three                 phenomena lead to theories on the nature of
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisites:             fundamental interactions, how these forces act
PHYS 332 and MATH 129, or consent of                     at the smallest measurable distances, and
instructor. Alternate years.                             what is expected to occur at even smaller
344                                                      distances. Four hours of lecture and recita-
RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY                                 tion and three hours of laboratory per week.
   A detailed presentation of the special theory         Prerequisites: PHYS 226, MATH 129, and
of relativity and an introduction to the general         either PHYS 338 or CHEM 110. Alternate
theory. Topics include: observational and                years.
experimental tests of relativity, four vectors,          448
tensors, space-time curvature, alternative               RESEARCH TOPICS
cosmological models, and the origin and future               Students participate in a research project
of the universe. Four hours of lecture per week.         under the guidance of a faculty member in the
Prerequisites: ASTR 111 and PHYS 225.                    department. In weekly meetings, they share
Alternate years. Cross-listed as ASTR 344.               reports from the literature and report on their
439                                                      own work. Topics will range from abstract
INTRODUCTION TO                                          theoretical to selected practical experimental
QUANTUM MECHANICS                                        investigations. Prerequisite: Permission of
    Introduction to the basic concepts and               the instructor. Cross-listed as ASTR 448.
principles of quantum theory. Solutions to               May be taken a second time with departmen-
the free particle, the simple harmonic oscilla-          tal approval.
tor, the hydrogen atom, and other central                349 & 449
force problems are presented using the                   ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS
Schrodinger wave equation approach. Topics               COLLOQUIA
also include operator formalism, eigenstates,                This non-credit but required course for
eigenvalues, the uncertainty principles,                 juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy and
stationary states, representation of wave                physics offers students a chance to meet and
functions by eigenstate expansions, and the              hear active scientists in astronomy, physics and
Heisenberg matrix approach. Four hours of                related scientific areas talk about their own
lecture. Prerequisites: Either PHYS 226 or               research or professional activities. In addition,
CHEM 331, and MATH 231. Cross-listed as                  majors in astronomy and physics must present
CHEM 439.                                                two lectures, one given during the junior year
                                                         and one given during the senior year, on the
                                                         results of a literature survey or their individual
                                                         research. Students majoring in this department
                                                         are required to attend four semesters during the
                                                         junior and senior years. A letter grade will be
                                                         given when the student gives a lecture. Other-

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    70                           2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                      ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS • BIOLOGY




                                                        BIOLOGY (BIO)
                                                        Professor: Zimmerman
                                                        Associate Professor: Gabriel
                                                        Assistant Professors: Briggs (Chairperson),
                                                          McGarvey, Morrison, Newman
                                                           The Department of Biology offers both B.A.
                                                        and B.S. degree programs, with minors avail-
                                                        able in Biology and Environmental Science.
                                                        Consent of instructor may replace BIO 110-
                                                        111 as a prerequisite for all upper level
                                                        biology courses.
                                                        The B.A. Degree
                                                           To earn the B.A. degree students must
                                                        complete the 13 course major which consists of
                                                        BIO 110, 111, 222, 224, 225, 321, 323 and
                                                        one course in Biology numbered 328 or
                                                        higher (excluding BIO 400, 401 or 470); one
                                                        course from CHEM 115, 220, or 221 plus two
                                                        additional units of Chemistry; two units of
                                                        mathematical sciences chosen from CPTR
                                                        108, 125 and/or MATH 109, 123, 127, 128 or
                                                        above. In addition, juniors and seniors are
                                                        required to successfully complete BIO 349/449
                                                        (non-credit colloquium) for a maximum of four
wise the grade will be P/F. Students in the             semesters and complete the capstone experi-
Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and                 ences described below. Enrollment in student
Engineering are required to attend two semes-           teaching and/or other similar off-campus
ters and present one lecture during their junior        academic experiences will be accepted by the
year. Non-credit course. One hour per week.             department in lieu of that semester’s collo-
Cross-listed as ASTR 349 & 449.                         quium requirement. Only two courses
470-479                                                 numbered below 221 may count toward the
INTERNSHIP (See index)                                  major. Declared Biology majors may
   Interns in physics work off campus under             substitute BIO 106-107 for BIO 110-111 with
the supervision of professional physicists              written consent of the department chair.
employed by local industries or hospitals.
                                                        The B.S. Degree
N80-N89                                                    To earn the B.S. degree students must
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)                           complete the 13 course major described for
  Independent studies may be undertaken in              the B.A., meet the colloquium requirement,
most areas of physics.                                  complete the capstone experiences described
490-491                                                 below, and pass three courses chosen in any
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                   combination from the following: BIO 328 or
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                         above (including BIO 400, 401 and/or 470),
                                                        CHEM 200 or above, PHYS 200 or above, or
                                                        MATH 127 or above.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           71                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
BIOLOGY




Cooperative Programs                                   3. Assessment: All majors are required to
   Certain specific exceptions to the B.A. and            take at least one of the exams listed
B.S. degrees will be made for students in                 below or pass a Biology Department Exit
accelerated programs. The requirements for                Exam. GRE - Bio subject exam, MCAT,
accelerated programs in Optometry, Forestry               OAT, DAT, VCAT, or the Praxis. By the
or Environmental Studies, Medical Technol-                end of their first semester of their senior
ogy, and Podiatry can be found in the Aca-                year, students must provide the Depart-
demic Program section of the catalog.                     ment official documentation of the scores
Students interested in these programs should              they have earned on one of these exams.
contact the program director before finalizing            If one or more of these requirements
their individual programs.                                have not been met by the end of their
                                                          first semester of their senior year, the
Writing Intensive Courses
                                                          student must submit a plan signed by
   The following courses, when scheduled as
                                                          their advisor showing when and how
W courses, count toward the writing intensive
                                                          these requirements will be completed.
requirement: BIO 200, 222 and 224.
                                                      Certification in Secondary Education
Capstone Experiences for Biology Majors
                                                          A Biology major interested in becoming
   In order to graduate, all biology majors
                                                      certified at the secondary level to teach
must demonstrate to the Department their
                                                      Biology and/or General Science should, as
command of biology by meeting the follow-
                                                      early as possible, consult the current Depart-
ing three criteria.
                                                      ment of Education Teacher Education
 1. Practical Experience: All students must           Handbook and should make their plans known
    complete at least one of the experiences          to their advisor and the Chair of the Education
    in the following list: Internship,                Department so the required courses can be
    Practicum, Relevant Summer Experi-                scheduled before the Professional Semester.
    ence, Independent Studies, Honors,                  a) To obtain certification in Secondary
    Medical Technology Internship, Teach-                  Biology a student must successfully
    ing Semester, Biology Laboratory                       complete a Biology major, EDUC 200,
    Assistant, Biology-related volunteer                   PSY 138, EDUC 338, EDUC 339, the
    work. (Summer experiences, Biology-                    Pre-Student Teaching Participation, and
    related volunteer work, or working as a                the Professional Semester (EDUC 446,
    lab assistant must be approved by the                  447 and 449). Students may choose
    Department in order to be used to meet                 EDUC 232 as an Education elective.
    this requirement.)                                  b) Students interested in obtaining General
                                                           Science/Biology certification must com-
 2. Research & Presentation Component:
                                                           plete all the requirements for secondary
    All junior and senior majors are
                                                           Biology listed in (a) as well as PHYS 108
    required to successfully complete
                                                           or 225 and any two courses from ASTR
    Biology Colloquia (BIO 349 and 449)
                                                           111, 112 or 243. ASTR 230 is strongly
    during all their semesters on campus.
                                                           recommended as an additional course.
    During their final year, students will
    research a biological topic and make an           Minors
    oral presentation at the Biology Collo               The Department of Biology offers two
    quium. This will provide the student              minors: Biology and Environmental Science.
    with the basic level of information                  A minor in biology requires the comple-
    literacy in the biological science.               tion of four courses numbered 200 or higher,

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 72                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                               BIOLOGY




with their appropriate prerequisites (i.e., two        107
introductory biology courses). At least two of         ANATOMY FOR HEALTH
these must be from the series of courses BIO           CARE CONSUMERS
222, 224, 225, 321, or 323.                               This course is a brief survey of human
    A minor in Environmental Science                   anatomy and physiology, which includes
consists of two introductory biology courses           study of the complementary nature of form
(one of which must be BIO 220), BIO 224,               and function, as well as study of the levels of
two additional courses numbered 200 or                 biological organization within the body. The
higher, one course in economics (recom-                objective is to provide students with a back-
mended ECON 225), and ASTR 102.                        ground which will allow them to read,
    Biology majors who minor in Environ-               comprehend, and appreciate current articles
mental Science must complete all require-              on this subject in the popular press. Students
ments of the biology major. In addition, they          learn the names, structure, and general
need to complete BIO 220, BIO 401, ECON                functions of the major organs of the body.
225, ASTR 112, and one course selected from            Animal dissec-tion is optional. Credit may
either ECON 240, SOC 229, or an advanced               not be earned for both BIO 107 and 111.
biology course (328 or higher).                        BIO 106 is not a pre-requisite for BIO 107.
                                                       Three hours of lecture and one-three hour
Clean Water Institute
                                                       laboratory per week.
   This institute is designed to provide a
forum for the natural resource heritage of             110-111
North Central Pennsylvania, the Susquehanna            INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY
River and its major tributaries (Pine,                    An introduction to the study of biology
Loyalsock, Lycoming, and Muncy Creeks).                designed for students planning to major in the
The institute provides a service not only to           biological sciences. Major topics considered
Lycoming College students, through coordi-             include the origin of life, cellular respiration
nation of Environmental internships, practica          and photosynthesis, genetics, development,
(BIO 401) and independent study/honors                 anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior,
projects, but also the community. This may             and evolution. Credit may not be earned for
include seminars or workshops on environ-              both BIO 106 and 110 or for both BIO 107
mental issues as well as monitoring assistance         and 111. Prerequisite for BIO 111: BIO 110.
to watershed groups.                                   Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
                                                       laboratory per week.
106
CELLS, GENES AND SOCIETY                               200
    This course investigates the roles cellular        THE 4TH AND 5TH KINGDOMS
phenomena, genes and biotechnology play in                 While food, oxygen and medicines are all
everyday life. The primary goal of this course         necessary for human existence, the impor-
is to improve recognition and understanding            tance of plants and fungi are often ignored by
of the implications of biology in health care,         our society. Plants and fungi play an essential
agriculture, law, bioethics, and business.             role in our planet’s ecology and are central in
Credit may not be earned for both BIO 106              human cultural evolution. Topics covered by
and 110. BIO 106 is not a prerequisite for             this course include the ways plants and fungi
BIO 107. Three hours of lecture and one-               work, how humans have used plant and
three hour lab per week.                               fungal products for their benefit and pleasure
                                                       through-out history, and how different
                                                       phytochemicals can influence human health.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          73                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
BIOLOGY




We will also examine human impacts on                  224
plant and fungal biodiversity, how we have             ECOLOGY
altered the environment in our quest for food             The study of the principles of ecology with
and the perfect American lawn, and the                 emphasis on the role of chemical, physical,
impacts of genetic engineering. Three hours            and biological factors affecting the distribu-
of lecture and one three-hour laboratory per           tion and succession of plant and animal
week. This course does not count towards the           populations and communities. Included will
biology major.                                         be field studies of local habitats as well as
213-214                                                laboratory experimentation. Three hours of
HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY                           lecture and one three-hour laboratory per
   Using the organ-systems approach, the               week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111.
course is an introduction to the human body —          225
its anatomy, physiology, and normal develop-           PLANT SCIENCES
ment — with particular attention to structure              A survey of the structure, development,
and function at all levels of its biological           function, classification, and use of plants and
organization (molecular through organismal).           related organisms. The study will comprise
Three hours of lecture, and one three-hour             four general topic areas: form, including
laboratory per week. Prerequisite for BIO              morphology and anatomy of plants in growth
213: CHEM 115 or 220, or consent of                    and reproduction; function, concentrating on
instructor. Prerequisite for BIO 214: BIO 213.         nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo-
                                                       synthetic organisms; classification systems
220
                                                       and plant identification, and human uses of
ENVIRONMENTAL BIOLOGY
                                                       plants. Three hours of lecture and one three
   This course provides an introduction to eco-
                                                       hour lab-oratory per week. Prerequisites:
logical principles and concepts with an
                                                       BIO 110-111.
examination of the biological basis of contem-
porary environmental problems. The effects of          226
human population on earth’s resources are              MICROBIOLOGY FOR
studied against a background of biological and         THE HEALTH SCIENCES
health sciences. This course is designed                  A study of microorganisms with emphasis
primarily for students not planning to major in        given to their taxonomy and their role in various
the biological sciences. Three hours of lecture        aspects of human infectious disease. Mecha-
and one three-hour laboratory per week.                nisms for treating and preventing infectious
Prerequisite: BIO 110. This course is not a            diseases will be presented. Laboratory to
substitute for BIO 111 for majors.                     include diagnostic culture procedures, antibiotic
                                                       sensitivity testing, serology, anaerobic tech-
222
                                                       niques and a study of hemolytic reactions. Three
GENETICS
                                                       hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per
   A general consideration of the principles
                                                       week. Prerequisites: One year of introductory
governing inheritance, including treatment of
                                                       level biology, one year of chemistry or consent of
classical, molecular, cytological, physiology,
                                                       instructor. Not open to students who have
microbial, human, and population genetics.
                                                       received credit for BIO 321.
Three hours of lecture and two two-hour
laboratory periods per week. Prerequisites:
BIO 110-111.



LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  74                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                BIOLOGY




321                                                      333
MICROBIOLOGY                                             MEDICINAL AND POISONOUS PLANTS
   A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is                   An overview of plants that produce
given to the identification and physiology of            physiologically active substances that are
microorganisms as well as to their role in               important to humans and animals. Major
disease, their economic importance, and                  themes include: Mechanisms and symptoms
industrial applications. Three hours of lecture          of poisoning, and plant chemicals with useful
and two two-hour laboratory periods per week.            physiological effects. Laboratory topics
Prerequisites: BIO 110-111. Not open to                  include plant classification and techniques for
students who have received credit for BIO 226.           compound identification. Three hours of
                                                         lecture and one three-hour laboratory per
323
                                                         week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111, or
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
                                                         consent of instructor. Alternate years.
   The mechanisms and functions of systems,
including the autonomic, endocrine, digestive,           334
cardiovascular, respiratory, renal, nervous,             INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
and reproductive systems. Three hours of                    Comparative study of the invertebrate
lecture and one three-hour laboratory per                phyla with emphasis on phylogeny, physiol-
week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111.                        ogy, morphology, and ecology. Two three-
                                                         hour lecture/laboratory periods per week.
328                                                      Prerequisites: BIO 110-111. Alternate years.
AQUATIC BIOLOGY
    A field-oriented course dealing with                 338
freshwater ecosystems. Studies will include a            HUMAN ANATOMY
survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish—as                 An upper-division elective course which
well as the physical and chemical characteris-           uses a combined organ-system and regional
tics of water that influence their distribution.         approach to the study of human anatomy. The
Several local field trips and an extended field          course includes lecture, laboratory and
trip to a field station will familiarize students        individual and/or group mini-projects.
with the diver- sity of habitats and techniques          Computer simulated dissection software
of limnologists. Alternate years. Prerequi-              packages are used extensively. Video presen-
sites: BIO 110-111.                                      tations of cadaver dissections and a video disk
                                                         of cross-sectional anatomy are available for
329                                                      study. Prerequisites: BIO 110 and 111.
TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY
    A field-oriented course where students               340
study the creatures of the fringing reefs,               PLANT ANIMAL INTERACTIONS
barrier reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and                 An investigation of different herbivorous
mangrove swamps at a tropical marine                     animals, plant defenses, and how herbivores
laboratory. Studies will include survey of               influence plants. Topics include evolution of
plankton, invertebrates, and fish as well as the         herbivores and plants, effects of herbivory on
physical and chemical characteristics that               individuals and communities, and types of
influence their distribution. Prerequisites:             plant defenses. We will also discuss how
BIO 110-111. Alternate May terms.                        animals deal with plant defenses, the advan-
                                                         tages and disadvantages of monophagous and
                                                         polyphagous lifestyles, different types of
                                                         herbivores and herbivore damage, and
                                                         mutualisms between plants and their herbi-
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            75                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
BIOLOGY




vores. Three hours of lecture and one three-            Serological assays will include: agglutination,
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites:                precipitations, immunofluorescence,
BIO 110-111, or consent of instructor.                  immunoeletrophoresis, and complement
Alternate years.                                        fixation. Other topics are: immediate and
                                                        delayed hypersensitivities (i.e. allergies such as
341
                                                        hay fever and poison ivy), immunological renal
VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY
                                                        diseases, immunohematology (blood groups,
   A study of the development of vertebrates
                                                        etc), hybridome technology, the chemistry and
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus.
                                                        function of complement, autoimmunity, and
Particular attention is given to the chick and
                                                        organ graft rejection phenomena. Three hours
human as representative organisms. Two
                                                        of lecture, one three-hour laboratory, and one
three-hour lecture/laboratory periods per
                                                        hour of arranged work per week. Prerequi-
week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111. Alter-
                                                        sites: BIO 110-111. Alternate years.
nate years.
                                                        348
342
                                                        ENDOCRINOLOGY
ANIMAL BEHAVIOR
                                                            This course begins with a survey of the
    A study of causation, function, evolution,
                                                        role of the endocrine hormones in the
and biological significance of animal behav-
                                                        integration of body functions. This is
iors in their normal environment and social
                                                        followed by a study of the control of hormone
contexts. Three hours of lecture and one
                                                        synthesis and release, and a consideration of
four-hour laboratory each week. Prerequi-
                                                        the mechanisms by which hormones accom-
sites: BIO 110-111. Alternate years.
                                                        plish their effects on target organs. Two
346                                                     three-hour lecture/laboratory periods per
VIROLOGY                                                week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111. Alter-
    An introduction to the study of viruses.            nate years.
The course will cover virus anatomy and
                                                        400
reproduction, diseases caused by viruses,
                                                        BIOLOGY PRACTICUM
modern treatments of viral infections and viral
                                                            A work-oriented experience for junior or
vaccines produced by recombinant DNA and
                                                        senior biology majors jointly sponsored by
other technologies. Course content will also
                                                        the Department and a public or private
include a description of how viruses are used
                                                        agency. The practicum is designed to
as tools for genetic engineering and for
                                                        integrate classroom theory with field or
studying cellular processes like membrane
                                                        laboratory practice. In addition to attendance
signal transduction, regulation of genetic
                                                        at a weekly seminar, students will spend 10-
expression and oncogenesis (cancer). Four
                                                        12 hours per week at the sponsoring agency.
hours of lecture per week. Prerequisites: BIO
                                                        Academic work will include, but is not
110-111 or consent of instructor. Alternate
                                                        limited to: a log, readings, recitation and an
years.
                                                        assigned research paper related to the specific
347                                                     agency’s activities. May be repeated once for
IMMUNOLOGY                                              credit with consent of instructor.
    The course introduces concepts concerning
                                                        401
how pathogens cause disease and host defense
                                                        ENVIRONMENTAL PRACTICUM
mechanisms against infectious diseases.
                                                           A work-oriented experience for junior or
Characterization of and relationships between
                                                        senior students interested in environmental
antigens, haptens, and antibodies are presented.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   76                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                 BIOLOGY




science. Students work on projects jointly                436
sponsored by the Clean Water Institute and a              EVOLUTION
public or private agency. The practicum is                    The study of the origin and modification of
designed to integrate classroom theory with               life on earth. Topics discussed include
field and/or laboratory practice. In addition to          molecular evolution, population genetics,
attendance at a weekly seminar, students                  gene flow, natural selection, sexual selection,
spend 10-12 hours per week at the sponsoring              kin selection, neutral theory, extinction, co-
agency or project. Academic work includes,                evolution, and the evolution of man. Four
but is not limited to a log, readings, recitation         hours of lecture per week. Prerequisites:
and an assigned research paper related to the             BIO 110-111, or consent of instructor.
specific agency or project activity. May be               Alternate years.
repeated once for credit with consent of
                                                          437
instructor.
                                                          MOLECULAR BIOLOGY
430                                                          An in-depth analysis of fundamental
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY                                       cellular information flow processes with
OF VERTEBRATES                                            particular emphasis on how these processes
    Detailed examination of the origins,                  have been harnessed in the laboratory,
structure, and functions of the principal                 resulting in technologies such as DNA cloning
organs of the vertebrates. Special attention is           and sequencing, the Polymerase Chain
given to the progressive modification of                  Reaction (PCR), genetic testing, gene therapy,
organs from lower to higher vertebrates.                  genetic engineering, DNA forensics, and
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour                  construction of gene libraries. Two hours of
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-              lecture, a one-hour lab and a three-hour lab
111. Alternate years.                                     per week. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111 and
                                                          one semester of organic chemistry.
431
HISTOLOGY                                                 439
    A study of the basic body tissues and the             MEDICAL GENETICS
microscopic anatomy of the organs and                         This course is concerned with the relation-
structures of the body which are formed from              ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will
them. Focus is on normal human histology.                 focus on topics such as chromosomal abnor-
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour                  malities, metabolic variation and disease,
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO                   somatic cell genetics, genetic screening, and
110-111. Alternate years.                                 immunogenetics. Laboratory exercises will
                                                          offer practical experiences in genetic diagnos-
435                                                       tic techniques. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111.
CELL BIOLOGY                                              May term only.
    An intensive study of the cell as the basic
                                                          440
unit of life. Topics will include: origins of
                                                          PARASITOLOGY AND
cellular life, biochemistry of the cell, enzymatic
                                                          MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY
reactions, cellular membranes, intracellular
                                                             The biology of parasites and parasitism.
communication, the cell cycle, the cytoskeleton
                                                          Studies on the major groups of animal parasites
and cell motility, protein sorting, distribution
                                                          and anthropod vectors of disease will involve
and secretion. Prerequisites: BIO 110-111 and
                                                          taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis will be
one semester of organic chemistry. Alternate
                                                          made on parasites of medical and veterinary
years.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                             77                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
BIOLOGY




importance. Three hours of lecture and one             349 & 449
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi-              BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM
sites: BIO 110-111. Alternate years.                      This course offers the student a chance to
                                                       become familiar with research in the biologi-
444
                                                       cal sciences using techniques such as meeting
BIOCHEMISTRY
                                                       and talking with active researchers, reading a
   Emphasis is given to the metabolism of
                                                       nd critically analyzing the current literature,
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,
                                                       and discussing the ideas and methods shaping
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism;
                                                       biology. Students will be required to read and
and biochemical control mechanisms,
                                                       analyze specific papers, actively participate in
including allosteric control, induction,
                                                       discussions. Biology majors with junior and
repression, signal transduction as well as the
                                                       senior standing are required to successfully
various types of inhibitive control mecha-
                                                       complete colloquim during all semesters on
nisms. Three hours of lecture, one three-hour
                                                       campus except for semesters when student
laboratory and one hour of arranged work
                                                       teaching. The grade will be P/F. Non-credit
per week. Prerequisite: CHEM 221, or
                                                       course. One hour per week. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor. Cross-listed as CHEM
                                                       biology majors with junior or senior class
444. Alternate years.
                                                       standing.
445
                                                       470-479
RADIATION BIOLOGY
                                                       INTERNSHIP (See index)
   A study of the effects of ionizing and non-
                                                          Recent samples of internships in the
ionizing radiations on cells, tissues and
                                                       department include ones with the Department
organisms. Consideration will be given to
                                                       of Environmental Resources, nuclear medi-
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien-
                                                       cine or rehabilitative therapies at a local
cies elucidate the nature of radiation damage.
                                                       hospital.
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO                N80-N89
110-111, one year of chemistry. Alternate              INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
years.                                                    Departmental studies are experimentally-
                                                       oriented and may entail either lab or field
446
                                                       work.
PLANT PHYSIOLOGICAL ECOLOGY
   A study of plant resource acquisition in the        490-491
face of competing neighbors and the quickly            INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
changing global environment. The course                DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
will focus on how differences in the environ-             Examples of recent honors projects have
ment affect plant water use, carbon dioxide            involved stream analysis, gypsy moth
acquisition, light capture and nutrient uptake.        research, drug synthesis and testing.
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: BIO
110-111 and 225. Alternate years.




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  78                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                              BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION




                                                           The Department of Business Administra-
                                                       tion is a member of the Institute for Manage-
                                                       ment Studies. See page 121.
                                                           All students majoring in Business Admin-
                                                       istration must complete the core courses and at
                                                       least one of the four tracks listed below.
                                                       Core courses required of all majors:
                                                       ACCT 110, 130 or 223; BUS 128, 210, 211,
                                                       223, 235, 244, 338, 441; ECON 110 and 111.
                                                       Statistics is also required. It is recommended
                                                       that students complete most of the core
                                                       courses (except BUS 441) before starting their
                                                       track requirements.

                                                       Track requirements:
                                                       1. General Management:
                                                          Three courses from BUS 330, 344, 345, or
                                                          449
                                                       2. Financial Management:
                                                          BUS 339; two courses from BUS 345,
                                                          410, or ECON 220
                                                       3. Marketing Management:
                                                          BUS 429; two courses from BUS 319,
                                                          332, 342, or 344
BUSINESS                                               4. International Business Management
ADMINISTRATION                                            BUS 319, 330; and two higher-numbered
                                                          language courses beyond those used to
(BUS)                                                     meet the distribution requirement. Majors
Associate Professor: Weaver (Chairperson)                 in the International Management track are
Assistant Professors: Kolb, Matus, Sterngold              encouraged to minor in a foreign language.
Part-time Instructors: Larrabee, Remoff
                                                       Minor
    This major is designed to educate students
                                                          A minor in Business Administration
about business and management functions in
                                                       consists of ACCT 110; BUS 128, 244, 338;
both commercial and non-commercial
                                                       and one course from BUS 330, 339, or 429.
organizations. The program provides a well-
balanced preparation for a wide variety of             Internships
professions and careers, including banking,                Through BUS 439, Business Practicum, the
financial services, small business manage-             department facilitates a wide variety of
ment, marketing, sales, advertising, retailing,        internships with businesses, government
general management, supervision, invest-               agencies and nonprofit organizations. In
ments, human resources management, and                 addition, the department is a member of the
management information systems. The major              Institute for Management Studies, which also
is also appropriate for students who plan to           facilitates internships, including full-time
attend graduate school in business or related          internships during the summer.
fields, such as law or public administration.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          79                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION




Diversity and Writing Intensive Courses                emerging technologies and business
  The following courses satisfy the cultural           applications. One-half unit of credit.
diversity requirement: BUS 244 and 319.
                                                       223
The following courses, when scheduled as W
                                                       QUANTITATIVE BUSINESS ANALYSIS
courses, count toward the writing intensive
                                                           A study of the quantitative approach to
requirement: BUS 244, 342, 344, 410 and
                                                       managerial decision-making. Using deci-
441.
                                                       sional models, students explore quantitative
128                                                    applications to quality control, resource
MARKETING PRINCIPLES                                   allocation, inventory control, decisional
   A study of the methods used by business             analysis, network scheduling, forecasting, and
and nonprofit organizations to design, price,          other topics. Prerequisite: Statistics, or
promote and distribute their products and              consent of instructor.
services. Topics include new product
                                                       235
development, advertising, retailing, consumer
                                                       LEGAL PRINCIPLES I
behavior, marketing strategy, ethical issues in
                                                           Lectures and analyses of cases on the
marketing and others.
                                                       nature, sources, and fundamentals of the law
210                                                    in general, and particularly as relating to
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT                              contracts, agency, and negotiable instruments.
   A study of the recruitment, selection,
                                                       236
development, compensation, retention,
                                                       LEGAL PRINCIPLES II
evaluation, and promotion of personnel                     Lectures on the fundamentals and history
within an organization. Emphasis is on                 of the law relating to legal association, real
understanding these major activities                   property, wills, and estates.
performed by Human Resource Management
professionals as organizations deal with               244
increased laws and regulations, the                    MANAGEMENT AND
proliferation of lawsuits related to Human             ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR
Resources, changes in work force                          A study of the complex character of
characteristics, and an increasingly                   organizational life and the discipline and
competitive work environment. One-half unit            process of management. Topics include the
of credit.                                             evolution and scope of organizations and
                                                       management, plan-ning, organizing, leading,
211                                                    and controlling. Emphasis is placed on the
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION                                 importance of man-aging in a global environ-
SYSTEMS                                                ment, understanding the ethical implications of
   A study of computer information systems             managerial decisions, and appreciating work
and digital networks from the perspective of           place diversity.
business managers and other end-users.
Topics include the components and functions            319
of management information systems, personal            INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
productivity applications, distributed networks          An investigation of the challenges of
and communication systems (including the               marketing products in an increasingly global
Internet and World Wide Web), database                 environment. Special emphasis is placed on
management, electronic commerce and other              the cultural and social diversity of interna-
                                                       tional markets. Examines the marketing
                                                       strategies of global firms, and the challenges
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  80                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION




of international pricing, distribution, promo-          capital structures, cost of capital, financial
tion and product development. Prerequisite:             analysis and forecasting. Extensive use of
BUS 128 or consent of instructor.                       directed and non-directed cases. Prerequisite:
                                                        BUS 338 or consent of instructor.
330
INTERNATIONAL MANAGEMENT                                342
   A study of the dynamic process of applying           MARKETING RESEARCH
management concepts and techniques in a                    This is a study of the principles and
multinational environment. Topics include               practices of marketing research. The focus is
global strategy and competitiveness, the                on the development and application of
cultural context, intercultural communica-              marketing research methods. Topics covered
tions, organizational behavior and human                include selection of a research design, data
resource management, and ethics and social              collection, analysis and report writing. Both
responsibility. Special emphasis is placed on           quantitative and qualitative methods will be
managing organizational cultures and diversity          covered. The class will focus on an applied
and the environment for international manage-           project. Prerequisites: BUS 128 and statis-
ment. Prerequisite: BUS 244 or consent of               tics, or consent of instructor.
instructor.
                                                        344
332                                                     ELECTRONIC COMMERCE AND
ADVERTISING AND PROMOTION                               INTERNET MARKETING
   How businesses and other institutions                  A study of Internet marketing, electronic
promote their products to consumers. The                commerce, and related business uses of the
role of advertising and promotion in the                Internet and Web. Topics include the
marketing strategy of the firm is investigated,         challenges of developing, managing, and
and the effects of different promotional tools          marketing commercial web sites and online
and advertising techniques is discussed.                stores; the growing use of company intranets,
Prerequisite: BUS 128 or consent of instruc-            extranets and virtual teams to improve
tor.                                                    communications, collaboration, and business
                                                        performance; and the effects of electronic
338                                                     commerce on consumers, competition and
FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL                               marketing practices. Students also study
MANAGEMENT                                              social links to electronic commerce, such as
   A study of the fundamental theory, tools,            the privacy and security concerns of online
and methods of financial management. Topics             customers, and the challenges of electronic
include the mathematics of finance, working             commerce to more traditional industries,
capital management, capital budgeting, and              occupations, and local business and commu-
analysis of financial statements. Prerequisites:        nities. Prerequisite: BUS 128 or consent of
ACCT 110 and statistics, or consent of                  instructor.
instructor.
                                                        345
339                                                     FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL                                     Deals with the analysis of financial state-
MANAGEMENT                                              ments as an aid to decision making. The theme
   An intensive study of issues and applica-            of the course is understanding the financial data
tions of financial management. Topics                   which are analyzed as well as the methods by
covered include international finance, ethics,          which they are analyzed and interpreted. This

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           81                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION




course should prove of value to all who need a          students must apply directly to the business
thorough understanding of the uses to which             department before preregistration to be eligible
financial statements are put as well as to those        for the course. Prerequisite: Consent of
who must know how to use them intelligently             instructor.
and effectively. This includes accountants,
                                                        441
security analysts, lending officers, credit
                                                        STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
analysts, managers, and all others who make
                                                            An intensive study using case analysis of the
decisions on the basis of financial data.
                                                        planning and control of business enterprises
Prerequisite: ACCT 110.
                                                        designed to build students’ skills in conducting
410                                                     strategic analysis in a variety of industries and
INVESTMENTS                                             competitive situations. Through case studies,
    An introduction to the financial sector of          research, presentations, and discussions,
the economy and the structure and functions             students examine industry structure, functional
of financial markets and the agencies                   strategies, competitive challenges of a global
involved; brokerage houses and stock                    marketplace, and sources of sustainable
exchanges; the various types of investments             competitive advantage. This course is designed
available. Techniques used to evaluate                  to integrate the knowledge and skills gained
financial securities. Also covered are recent           from previous coursework in business and
developments in investment theory.                      related fields. Prerequisites: All core courses
Prerequisite: BUS 338 or consent of instructor.         or consent of instructor. Seniors only.
429                                                     449
MARKETING STRATEGY                                      SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT
    A study of the methods used by business             AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
and nonprofit organizations to analyze and                  This course provides the student with the
select target markets, and then to develop              information needed to develop a business plan
strategies for gaining and maintaining these            for starting and operating a small business
customers. Topics include competitive                   enterprise. The course focuses on the key
strategy, market segmentation, product                  elements of planning and the essential charac-
positioning, promotional design and market-             teristics of small businesses. The discussion
ing-related financial analysis. Case studies,           and analysis of small business cases and the
and the development of a detailed marketing             problems/opportunities facing small businesses
plan are covered. Prerequisite: BUS 128 or              are used to reveal trends in the small business
consent of instructor.                                  community and the role of government.
439                                                     Prerequisite: BUS 244.
BUSINESS PRACTICUM                                      470-479
    This course provides students with                  INTERNSHIP (See index)
practical work experience with local compa-
nies and organizations. Students work 10-12             N80-N89
hours per week for their sponsor organiza-              INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
tions, in addition to attending a weekly
                                                        490-491
seminar on management topics relevant to
                                                        INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
their work assignments. Since enrollment is
                                                        DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
limited by the available number of positions,



LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   82                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                         CHEMISTRY




CHEMISTRY (CHEM)                                     The B.A. degree
                                                         To earn the B.A. degree a student must
Professor: McDonald                                  complete CHEM 110-111, 220-221, 330-331,
Associate Professor: Bendorf (Chairperson)           332, 333; PHYS 225-226; MATH 128-129;
Assistant Professor: Mahler, Ramsey                  and, as a Capstone experience, one of the
Part-time Assistant Professor: Berkheimer            following: CHEM 449, 470, 490 or the
   The Department of Chemistry offers both           Professional Semester (EDUC 446, 447, 449).
B.A. and B.S. degree programs, and is                The B.S. degree
approved by the American Chemical Society                To earn the B.S. degree a student must
(ACS) to certify those students whose                complete the thirteen course major described
programs meet or exceed requirements                 above as well as CHEM 443, CHEM 444, and
established by the ACS. Students who wish to         one additional full-credit course from the
earn ACS certification must complete the             following list: any 400-level CHEM course;
requirements for the B.S. degree. Students           PHYS 331 or above; BIO 222 or above;
who complete the ACS certified degree are            MATH 123, 130, 214, 216, 231, 238, 332; or
also eligible for admission to the American          CPTR 125.
Chemical Society following graduation.
   For students planning on graduate study in        Certification in Secondary Education
chemistry, German is the preferred foreign              A Chemistry major interested in becoming
language option, and additional courses in           certified in secondary education in Chemistry
advanced mathematics and computer science            and/or General Science/Chemistry should, as
are also recommended.                                early as possible, consult the current Depart-
   The following courses, when scheduled as          ment of Education Teacher Education Hand-
W courses, count toward the writing intensive        book and make their plans known to their
requirement: CHEM 330, 331, and 332.                 advisor and the Chair of the Education


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                        83                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
CHEMISTRY




Department so the required courses can be              110
scheduled for the Professional Semester. A             GENERAL CHEMISTRY I
Chemistry major who successfully completes                 A quantitative introduction to the concepts
the Professional Semester (EDUC 446, 447,              and models of chemistry. Topics include
449) has also satisfied the Chemistry Capstone         stoichiometry, atomic and molecular structure,
experience.                                            nomenclature, bonding, thermochemistry,
     a) To be certified in secondary education         gases, solutions, and chemical reactions. The
        in chemistry a student must: complete          laboratory introduces the student to methods of
        a chemistry major; pass two biology            separation, purification, and identification of
        courses numbered 110 or higher,                compounds according to their physical
        PSY 110 and 138, EDUC 200, 338 and             properties. This course is designed for
        339; complete the Pre-Student Teach-           students who plan to major in one of the
        ing Participation and pass the Profes-         sciences. Three hours lecture, one hour of
        sional Semester (EDUC 446, 447,                discussion and one three-hour laboratory
        449). The student may choose EDUC              period each week. Prerequisite: MATH 100
        232 as an additional Education                 or consent of department.
        elective.
                                                       111
     b) A student interested in obtaining
                                                       GENERAL CHEMISTRY II
        General Science/Chemistry certifica-
                                                          A continuation of CHEM 110, with emphasis
        tion must complete all the require-
                                                       placed on the foundations of analytical, inor-
        ments for secondary certification in           ganic, and physical chemistry. Topics include
        chemistry shown in (a) and must also           kinetics, general and ionic equilibria, acid-base
        pass any two units from ASTR 111,              theory, electrochemistry, thermodynamics,
        112 or 243. ASTR 230 is strongly               nuclear chemistry, coordination chemistry, and
        recommended as an additional course.           descriptive inorganic chemistry of selected
Minor                                                  elements. The laboratory treats aspects of
   A minor in chemistry requires completion            quantitative and qualitative inorganic analysis.
of CHEM 110-111, 220-221, and two CHEM                 Three hours of lecture, one hour of discus-
courses numbered 300 or higher.                        sion, and one three-hour laboratory period
                                                       each week. Prerequisite: CHEM 110 or
100                                                    consent of department.
CHEMISTRY IN CONTEXT
   A science distribution course for the non-          115
science major. The course will explore real-           BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
world societal issues that have important                  A descriptive study of the compounds of
chemical components. Topics covered may                carbon. This course will illustrate the prin-
include air and water quality, the ozone layer,        ciples of organic chemistry with material
global warming, energy, acid rain, nuclear             relevant to students in medical technology,
power, pharmaceuticals and nutrition. The              biology, forestry, education and the humani-
chemistry knowledge associated with the                ties. Topics include nomenclature, alkanes,
issues is built on a need-to-know basis. Three         arenes, functional derivatives, amino acids
hours of lecture and one two-hour laboratory           and proteins, carbohydrates and other
period each week. Not open for credit to stu-          naturally occurring compounds. This course is
dents who have received credit for CHEM 110.           designed for students who require only one
                                                       semester of organic chemistry, and is not
                                                       intended for students planning to enroll in

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  84                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                CHEMISTRY




chemistry courses numbered 200 or above.                 chemistry of selected elements and their
Three hours of lecture, one hour of discussion,          compounds. Three hours of lecture and one
and one three-hour laboratory period each                four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre-
week. Prerequisite: CHEM 111. Not open for               requisites: CHEM 330, MATH 129, and one
credit to students who have received credit for          year of physics; or consent of instructor.
CHEM 220.
                                                         439
220-221                                                  INTRODUCTION TO QUANTUM
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY                                        MECHANICS
   A systematic study of the compounds of                    Introduction to the basic concepts and
carbon, including both aliphatic and aromatic            principles of quantum theory. Solutions to the
series. The laboratory work introduces the               free particle, the simple harmonic oscillator,
student to simple fundamental methods of                 the hydrogen atom, and other central force
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis.              problems are presented using the Schrodinger
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour                 wave equation approach. Topics also include
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite for            operator formalism, eigenstates, eigenvalues,
CHEM 220: CHEM 111. Prerequisite for                     the uncertainty principles, stationary states,
CHEM 221: A grade of C- or better in CHEM                representation of wave functions by eigenstate
220.                                                     expansions, and the Heisenberg matrix
                                                         approach. Four hours of lecture. Prerequi-
330-331                                                  sites: Either PHYS 226 or CHEM 331, and
PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY                                       MATH 231. Cross-listed as PHYS 439.
    A study of energy, time and structure in
chemistry and its reactions, including in-depth          440
gas laws, thermodynamics, phases, equilib-               ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
rium, electrochemistry, kinetics, quantum                    Theory and application of modern synthetic
mechanics and statistical mechanics. The                 organic chemistry. Topics may include
laboratory work includes techniques in                   oxidation-reduction processes, carbon-carbon
physiochemical measurements. Three hours                 bond forming reactions, functional group
of lecture and one four-hour laboratory                  transformations, and multi-step syntheses of
period each week. Prerequisites: CHEM 111,               natural products (antibiotics, antitumor agents,
MATH 129, PHYS 225-226; or consent of                    and antiviral agents). Three hours of lecture and
instructor.                                              one four-hour laboratory period. Prerequisite:
                                                         CHEM 221.
332
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY                                     442
    A study of the fundamental methods of                SPECTROSCOPY AND
gravimetric, volumetric and elementary                   MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
instrumental analysis together with practice in             Theory and application of the identification of
lab-oratory techniques and calculations of these         organic compounds. Special emphasis will be
methods. Two hours of lecture and two three-             placed on the utilization of spectroscopic
hour laboratory periods each week. Prerequi-             techniques (H-NMR, C-NMR, IR, UV-VIS,
site: CHEM 111 or consent of instructor.                 and MS). Three of hours lecture and one four-
                                                         hour laboratory period each week. Prerequisite:
333                                                      CHEM 221.
ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
   A study of modern theories of atomic and
molecular structure and their relationship to the
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            85                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
CHEMISTRY




443                                                     research activities or those of others which
ADVANCED ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY                           have appeared in recent chemical literature.
   A study of advanced analytical methods               Prerequisite: Three semesters of non-credit
with emphasis on chromatographic, electro-              Chemistry Colloquium taken during the junior
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of                  and senior years.
instrumental analysis. Three hours lecture
and one four-hour laboratory period each                449
week. Prerequisites: CHEM 331 and 332, or               CHEMISTRY RESEARCH METHODS
consent of instructor.                                      This course focuses on the nature and
444                                                     practice of chemistry. Students will conduct
BIOCHEMISTRY                                            research into a particular chemical problem
    Emphasis is given to the metabolism of              with a faculty research advisor, and will
carbohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,           explore different aspects of chemistry and
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism;           discuss their research in a weekly seminar. A
and biochemical control mechanisms, includ-             report on the research will be written. Majors
ing allosteric control, induction, repression,          are strongly encouraged to enroll in this course
signal transduction as well as the various types        in either their junior or senior year. Eight to
of inhibitive control mechanisms. Three                 ten hours of laboratory work and one hour
hours of lecture, one three-hour laboratory             seminar each week. Prerequisites: CHEM
and one hour of arranged work per week.                 221 and consent of instructor; Corequisite:
Prerequisite: CHEM 221, or consent of                   CHEM 330.
instructor. Cross-listed as BIO 444.
                                                        470-479
446                                                     INTERNSHIP (See index)
ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY                                    The student will ordinarily work under
   An introduction to the chemistry of                  supervision in an industrial laboratory and
compounds containing metal-carbon bonds.                submit a written report on the project. To
Topics include structure and bonding, reac-             satisfy the Chemistry Capstone requirement,
tions and mechanisms, spectroscopy, and                 participation in the seminar portion of CHEM
applications to organic synthesis. The use of
                                                        449 is required.
organometallic compounds as catalysts in
industrial processes will be emphasized. Three          N80-N89
hours of lecture and one four-hour laboratory           INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
period each week. Prerequisite: CHEM 221.                  The student will ordinarily work on a
447                                                     laboratory research project and will write a
POLYMER CHEMISTRY                                       thesis on the work.
    An introduction to the synthesis, charac-           490-491
terization, and applications of high molecular
                                                        INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
weight materials, i.e., macro-molecules.
                                                        DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
Special emphasis will be given to synthetic
                                                            The student will ordinarily work on a
polymer systems. Three hours of lecture, one
four-hour lab per week. Prerequisites: CHEM             laboratory research project with emphasis on
221 and 330, or consent of instructor.                  showing initiative and making a scholarly
                                                        contribution. A thesis will be written. To
348 & 448                                               satisfy the Chemistry Capstone requirement,
CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM                                    participation in the seminar portion of CHEM
   A seminar in which faculty, students and             449 is required.
invited professional chemists discuss their own

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   86                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                      COMMUNICATION




COMMUNICATION
Assistant Professors: Koehn (Chairperson),
    Wild
Visiting Instructor: Knapp
Part-time Instructors: Ogurcak, Van Auken
    The major in Communication seeks to
provide a foundation in communication theory
and media criticism as well as expertise in a
particular area of communication. All
students majoring in Communication must
complete the five courses listed in the Core
and eight additional courses in one of the three
areas of concentration listed below: four
required courses and four elective courses.
Sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have
declared a major in Communication are
required to enroll in and successfully complete
the non-credit Media Arts Colloquium during
each semester they are on campus or until they
have successfully completed at least four
semesters of this noncredit course. All
students in this major should consider
electing an internship before graduation.               Minor
    The major in Communication enables                     A minor in Communication consists of any
students to pursue employment and/or                    five courses offered by the Communication
graduate studies in a variety of fields includ-         Department (courses offered by other depart-
ing corporate communication, public relations,          ments count only toward the major in Com-
audio and video production, print and broad-            munication, not toward the minor). One of
cast journalism, professional media writing,            these five courses must be selected from
and media research and analysis.                        COMM 326, COMM 348, or COMM 440.
    All majors in Communication are encour-
aged to take advanced courses in a foreign              CORE COURSES REQUIRED OF
language and to consider the following liberal          ALL MAJORS
arts electives: MATH 123 and/or courses in              COMM 110 Communication Principles
Computer Science; ART 222 and 223; courses                        and Ethics
in contemporary American and/or interna-                COMM 211 Public Speaking: Research,
tional history, economics, and political                          Principles, and Practice
science; and courses in literature from the             COMM 326 Media Criticism and Cultural
Departments of Theatre, English, and Foreign                      Studies: Literature, Film, and
Languages and Literatures.                                        Television
    The following courses, when scheduled as            COMM 440 Senior Seminar
W courses, count toward the writing intensive           COMM 246, Media Arts Colloquium
requirement: COMM 211, 326, 332 and 440.                 346, 446
                                                        THEA 212  Multicultural America on
                                                                  Screen
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           87                              LYCOMING COLLEGE
COMMUNICATION




Majors must concentrate in one of the                       Elective choices for students in this
following three areas of study.                         concentration must include at least one
1. Corporate Communication                              additional course in Communication as well as
Required for all students in this concentration:        one course at the 300-level or above. Students
                                                        may elect to take as many additional commu-
COMM 212 Group Communication and
                                                        nication courses as they choose. Elective
                 Conflict Resolution
                                                        courses offered by other departments that may
COMM 235 Writing and Speaking in
                                                        also be used to fulfill elective requirements in
                 Business and the Professions
                                                        this concentration include the following:
COMM 324 Public Relations Cases and
                                                        ART 227        Photography I
                 Problem-Solving
                                                        ART 343        Introduction to Computer Art
PSCI 436         Mass Media Law and Regulation
                                                        ART 344        Computer Graphics for
    Elective choices for students in this
                                                                       Electronic Media
concentration must include at least one
                                                        BUS 128        Marketing Principles
additional course in Communication as well as
                                                        BUS 244        Management and Organizational
one course at the 300-level or above. Students
                                                                       Behavior
may elect to take as many additional communi-
                                                        ENGL 218 Classical and Modern Rhetoric
cation courses as they choose. Elective courses
                                                        ENGL 322 Advanced Writing: The
offered by other departments that may also be
                                                                       Creative Essay
used to fulfill elective requirements in this
                                                        HIST 220       Women in History
concentration include the following:
                                                        HIST 230       African American History
ART 227         Photography I
                                                        PSCI 210       Communication and Society
ART 343         Introduction to Computer Art
                                                        PSCI 316       Public Opinion and Polling
BUS 128         Marketing Principles
                                                        PSY 225        Industrial and Organizational
BUS 244         Management and Organizational
                                                                       Psychology
               Behavior
                                                        PSY 324        Social Psychology
ENGL 218 Classical and Modern Rhetoric
ENGL 322 Advanced Writing: The Creative
                                                        3. Media Writing and Culture
               Essay
                                                        Required for all students in this concentration:
HIST 220        Women in History
                                                        COMM 217 Print Journalism
HIST 230        African American History
                                                        COMM 321 Screenwriting
PSCI 210        Communication and Society
                                                        COMM 323 Feature Writing for Special
PSCI 316        Public Opinion and Polling
                                                                       Audiences
PSY 225         Industrial and Organizational
                                                        COMM 329 Broadcast Journalism
               Psychology
PSY 324         Social Psychology                       Elective choices for students in this concentra-
THEA 114 Film Art: Motion Picture                       tion must include at least one additional
               Masterpieces                             course in Communication as well as one
                                                        course at the 300-level or above. Students
2. Electronic Media
                                                        may elect to take as many additional commu-
Required for all students in this concentration:        nication courses as they choose. Elective
COMM 218 Digital Audio Production                       courses offered by other departments that may
COMM 223 Basic Digital Video Production                 be used to fulfill elective requirements in this
COMM 348 Advanced Digital Video Production              concentration include the following:
THEA 114 Film Art: Motion Picture                       ART 227 Photography I
             Masterpieces                               ART 343 Introduction to Computer Art

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   88                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                         COMMUNICATION




BUS 128  Marketing Principles                           and informative speaking. Training in using
BUS 244  Management and Organizational                  rhetorical theory to prepare, deliver, and
         Behavior                                       evaluate the student’s own speeches. Prerequi-
ENGL 218 Classical and Modern Rhetoric                  site: ENGL 106 or 107.
ENGL 322 Advanced Writing: The Creative
         Essay                                          212
                                                        GROUP COMMUNICATION
HIST 220 Women in History
                                                        AND CONFLICT RESOLUTION
HIST 230 African American History                           Readings, case studies, simulations, and
PSCI 210 Communication and Society                      practice in the methods of working in groups
PSCI 316 Public Opinion and Polling                     and in resolving conflicts within and between
PSY 225  Industrial and Organizational                  groups in various contexts, including educa-
         Psychology                                     tion, industry, and professional situations.
PSY 324  Social Psychology                              Contemporary theory and methods for motivat-
THEA 114 Film Arts: Motion Picture                      ing and maintaining the productivity of groups
         Masterpieces                                   will be examined in some detail. Prerequi-
                                                        sites: ENGL 106 or 107 and one other course
110                                                     in Communication (211 recommended),
COMMUNICATION PRINCIPLES                                Psychology, Education, or Business.
AND ETHICS
   Introduction to the basic theories and               217
principles of communication as they apply to            PRINT JOURNALISM
the process of sending messages among                      This course studies and applies practical
individuals, small groups, and mass audiences.          experience in the newsgathering process for
Consideration of the ethical issues involved in         print media. Emphasis is on beat reporting,
the communication process. Active learning              copy editing, interviewing, reporting and
through readings, case studies, simulations,            writing as applied to a variety of forms for both
oral reporting, and library research.                   news and persuasive print media formats as
                                                        well as on the ethical issues concerning
120                                                     reporting for the print media. Prerequisite:
INTERPERSONAL AND                                       ENGL 106 or 107.
INTERCULTURAL COMMUNICATION
    This is a workshop course in the theory and         218
practice of communication between individu-             DIGITAL AUDIO PRODUCTION
als in both formal as well as informal situa-              This course studies the principles and
tions with particular attention given to the            techniques of audio production using both
impact of culture upon communication                    analog and digital technologies. Various
between individuals in international situations.        program formats and the use of sound as an art
Open to freshmen or sophomores only.                    form are also considered.
Alternate years.
                                                        223
211                                                     BASIC DIGITAL VIDEO PRODUCTION
PUBLIC SPEAKING: RESEARCH,                                  This course trains students in the fundamen-
PRINCIPLES, AND PRACTICE                                tals of pre-production, production, and
    Speaking extemporaneously in a variety of           postproduction for video using digital and
situations to general as well as targeted               analog formats. Emphasis is on mastering the
audiences. Emphasis on researching and                  basic styles of video production from concept
solving problems having to do with persuasion           to completion within as well as outside the studio.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           89                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
COMMUNICATION




230                                                    feature stories for television. Readings, peer
DESKTOP PUBLISHING AND                                 review, and training in how to develop ideas
PHOTOJOURNALISM                                        using primary and secondary research.
    This interactive course teaches students to        Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107.
design, layout, and produce print media using          324
electronic desktop publishing tools. Students          PUBLIC RELATIONS CASES AND
will develop approaches that will be applied in        PROBLEM SOLVING
this course. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107                 Training in methods of public relations
235                                                    research, program planning and evaluation,
WRITING AND SPEAKING IN BUSINESS                       working with the media, writing for public
AND THE PROFESSIONS                                    relations and advertising, and conducting a
   Study of communication theory as applied            public relations campaign to solve a problem or
to business and professional settings. Using           crisis. Emphasis on writing, speaking, and
writing, speaking, research, and the electronic        electronic communication. Prerequisites:
media to solve a variety of communication              ENGL 106 or 107 and COMM 235; or consent
problems that frequently occur in the world of         of instructor.
work. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107.                   326
312                                                    MEDIA CRITICISM AND CULTURAL STUD-
LEADERSHIP COMMUNICATION                               IES: LITERATURE, FILM, AND TELEVISION
   The theory and practice of leadership                   Introduction to methods of analyzing
communication in diverse settings and                  popular culture and the arts using one or more
contexts. Classical leadership styles will be          of these approaches: textual criticism, content
examined and researched in regard to how               analysis, semiotics, auteur criticism, historical
these relate to goal-setting and motivating            criticism, frame theory, and structural
individuals and groups. Field work on- and             analysis. Comparison of the ways in which
off-campus is a major component of this                different media create values and portray
course. Prerequisites: ENGL 106 or 107; at             individuals, social conflicts, and human
least one of these: COMM 211, 212, or 235;             aspirations. Prerequisite: One course from:
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.             THEA 212, ENGL 217 or 331; or consent of
                                                       instructor.
321
SCREENWRITING                                          329
   This course trains students to analyze and          BROADCAST JOURNALISM
write scripts for radio, film, and television.             This course provides practical experiences
The development of the original screenplay is          in the newsgathering process for electronic
emphasized. Prerequisite: THEA 212, or                 media with an emphasis on covering the local
consent of instructor.                                 story from the small-station perspective.
                                                       Students in the course are responsible for
323                                                    writing, producing, editing, and broadcasting
FEATURE WRITING FOR SPECIAL                            newscasts for radio as well as television.
AUDIENCES                                              Major emphasis is placed on the ethical issues
   Practice in writing a variety of feature            concerning reporting for the broadcast media.
stories and editorials for different media and         Prerequisite: COMM 217 or 323. Alternate
audiences. Study of the ways in which feature          years.
writing for magazines compares and contrasts
with feature writing for newspapers and

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  90                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                         COMMUNICATION




332                                                     regular basis. The areas of work can relate to
TOPICS IN MEDIA THEORY AND PRACTICE                     campus media, campus public relations,
    Study of communication theory as applied            admissions, non-profit organizations, and
to a special area or style of communication.            other communication-based organizations
Readings, discussions, and practical experi-            approved by the supervising faculty member.
ences in creating materials for print and/or            Students enrolled in the colloquium are required
electronic media. Possible topics include:              to keep a log and to work for a minimum of
docudrama and investigative reporting,                  three hours each week in their approved work
communicating in cyberspace, creative                   situation. Open only to majors. Non-credit
advertising, instructional television and video.        and Pass/Fail. Once the major is declared,
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107. May be                   students are required to enroll in the seminar
repeated for credit with change of topic.               each semester until they graduate or until they
                                                        have successfully completed four semesters,
335
                                                        whichever comes first. Only one colloquium
MEDIA HISTORY AND THEORY
                                                        may be taken per semester.
    This course reviews the recent history of
the media with a major emphasis on the                  400
cultural theories that have been used to                PRACTICUM
describe and critique the media and its                    An elective for junior and senior majors
influence upon audiences. Prerequisite:                 who wish to acquire additional experience in
THEA 212. Alternate years.                              working with practicing professionals. Open
                                                        only to majors and minors.
340
ACTING AND DIRECTING                                    440
FOR THE CAMERA                                          COMMUNICATION RESEARCH
    This workshop course analyzes, rehearses,           METHODOLOGY
directs, and shoots scripted scenes for film and            This course trains students in quantitative
television. The course studies classic screen           and qualitative communication research
acting and directing styles. All students act as        methodology. Students do intensive reading
well as direct. Prerequisites: COMM 223                 in an area related to their track and produce a
and THEA 145; or consent of instructor.                 research project which involves written as
Alternate years.                                        well as oral presentation. Prerequisites:
                                                        COMM 326 and Senior standing, or consent
348
                                                        of instructor.
ADVANCED DIGITAL
VIDEO PRODUCTION                                        470-479
Advanced production of documentary,                     INTERNSHIP (See index)
narrative and experimental video. Exploration              Interns usually work off-campus in a field
of a variety of approaches to motivating talent         related to their area of study. Prerequisite:
and directing for the camera. Prerequisites:            junior or senior standing.
COMM 223 and THEA 114, or advanced                      N80-N89
course work in acting and directing, or                 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
consent of instructor.                                      Studies involve research related to the area
246, 346, and 446                                       of study of the student.
MEDIA ARTS COLLOQUIUM                                   490-491
   A seminar in which students are expected             INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
to work in the field of communication on a              DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           91                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
CRIMINAL JUSTICE




COMPUTER
SCIENCE
(see Mathematical Sciences)
CRIMINAL
JUSTICE (CJ)
Associate Professor: Carter (Chairperson)
Visiting Instructor: Guttendorf
Part-time Instructors: Anderson, Bluth, Robbins
    Criminal Justice is an interdisciplinary
social science program. Course work leading
to this baccalaureate degree will provide
students with strong communication and
analytical skills. This is accomplished through a
critical and in-depth interdisciplinary analysis
of the causes of crime, formal and informal
efforts at preventing and controlling crime,
and treatment of the field of criminal justice as
an applied social science where students are
taught to integrate theory construction with
practical application. The Criminal Justice
program offers opportunities for internship
and practicum experiences in the field, and              PHIL 218    Issues in Criminal Justice
prepares students for careers in law enforce-            PSY 116     Abnormal Psychology
ment, court services, institutional and commu-           SOC 300     Criminology
nity-based corrections, treatment and counsel-           Two courses from:
ing services, and for further education at the           PSCI 331 Civil Rights and Liberties
graduate level. The Criminal Justice program
                                                         PSCI 332 Courts and the Criminal Justice
also prepares students for activist and leader-
                                                                    System
ship roles in their communities by exploring
                                                         PSCI 335 Law and Society
core issues related to quality of life, security
and freedom.                                             One course from:
                                                         CJ 204      Youth, Deviance and Social
  The major in Criminal Justice consists of 10
                                                                     Control
courses, distributed as follows:
                                                         SOC 222 Introduction to Human Services
A. Criminal Justice core courses (four                   SOC 331 Sociology of Gender
    courses):                                            SOC 334 Racial and Cultural Minorities
CJ 100 Introduction to Criminal Justice
CJ 201 Policing and Society                              C. Criminal Justice Practicum (strongly
CJ 203 Correctional Systems                                 recommended, but not required for the
CJ 447 Research Methods in Criminal                         major) Majors should seek advice
         Justice                                            concerning course selection from their
                                                            advisors or the criminal justice coordina-
B. Courses in the social, psychological,
                                                            tor, and should note course prerequisites
    philosophical, and political dimensions
                                                            in planning their programs.
    of crime, law and justice (six courses):

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    92                        2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                        CRIMINAL JUSTICE




Minor in Criminal Justice                                primary emphasis is on critical analysis of
    A minor in criminal justice consists of five         contemporary correctional programming for
courses: CJ 100, CJ 201, CJ 203, PSCI 332,               adult and juvenile offenders in the United
and SOC 300. A student may substitute another            States. Other social issues and structures
relevant course for one of the required courses          directly related to corrections are explored.
with consent of the criminal justice coordinator.        Prerequisite: CJ 100.
Writing Intensive Courses                                204
   The following courses, when scheduled as              YOUTH, DEVIANCE AND
W courses, count towards the writing inten-              SOCIAL CONTROL
sive requirement: CJ 447, PHIL 218, and                      This course is designed to provide the
SOC 331.                                                 student with a general understanding of
100                                                      juvenile deviance and state processes intended
INTRODUCTION TO CRIMINAL JUSTICE                         to interrupt youth deviance and juvenile
   This course explores the role of law                  delinquency, particularly in the juvenile
enforcement, courts and corrections in the               justice system. Students will explore historical
administration of justice; the development of            perspectives, deviant juvenile subculture,
police, courts and corrections; the scope and            underlying philosophies, the formal processes
nature of crime in America; introduction to the          and organization of juvenile justice systems,
studies, literature and research in criminal             promising prevention/treatment approaches
justice; basic criminological theories; and              and juvenile probation practices. Students will
careers in criminal justice.                             be asked to think critically and offer solutions
                                                         or strategies to a range of dilemmas confront-
201                                                      ing the juvenile justice system, including the
POLICING AND SOCIETY                                     transfer of juveniles to adult status and the
    Who are the police and what is policing?             movement to privatize juvenile justice
Exploration of these questions provides a con-           services. Prerequisite: CJ 100 or consent of
text for critical inquiry of contemporary law            instructor.
enforcement in the United States. Attention is
given to law enforcement purposes and strate-            340
gies, the work force and work environment, and           PROBATION AND PAROLE
why sworn officers do what they do. Emphasis                This course provides an in-depth study of
is also placed on being policed and policing the         community-based corrections programs and
police. Treatment of these issues enables                their impact on the offender, the criminal
exploration of basic and applied questions               justice system, and society. Particular atten-
about the projection of state power in commu-            tion is given to offender diagnostics and
nity relations, including those related to               classification, treatment and supervision
homeland security. Prerequisite: CJ 100.                 needs, pre-sentence and pre-parole investiga-
                                                         tions, casework planning, applicable laws, and
203                                                      corrections policies. Prerequisite: CJ 100 or
CORRECTIONAL SYSTEMS                                     consent of instructor.
   This course presents an overview of
offenders, punishment, correctional ideolo-              341
gies, and societal reaction to crime. The                CRIME PREVENTION
historical and philosophical development of                 Students examine crime prevention and
the correctional system is examined. The                 control policies, programs, and procedures to
                                                         determine what works and why. The focus is

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            93                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
CRIMINAL JUSTICE




on social, situational, and environmental                 understanding of key definitions, theoretical
sources of crime. Crime prevention measures               frameworks, and forensic science’s role
focus on reducing crime by re-creating                    within the contemporary law enforcement
physical design, by empowering citizen                    environ-ment. In addition, the course
organizations, through programs that build                addresses the impact that this developing field
safe communities, and through programs in                 has had on society as a whole. Prerequisite:
place among “at risk” populations in schools,             CJ 100 or consent of instructor.
neighborhoods, and homes. Prerequisite: CJ
                                                          447
100 or consent of instructor.
                                                          RESEARCH METHODS
342                                                       IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE
ORGANIZATIONAL CRIME                                          Students learn social science methods,
    Three major areas of organizational crimes            research design and implementation, and
are covered, including traditional organized              evaluation of contemporary research in
crime, crimes of the corporate world, and                 criminal justice. Topics covered include the
crimes committed under auspices of the                    logic of causal order, sampling theory,
government. Examples of topics include                    qualitative and quantitative design, data
international organized crime cabals, drug                collection, and proper analysis of data. This
trafficking and money laundering by the CIA,              course is a how-to-do research course that
political bribe taking, government brutality              requires students to conduct original research
and physical/economic coercion, civil rights              projects under supervision. Students actively
violations, and crimes situated in the manufac-           engage in content analysis, behavioral
turing, pharmaceutical, and service trades.               observation, survey and interview-based
Prerequisite: CJ 100 or consent of instructor.            research, and limited quasi-experimental
345                                                       design studies. Emphasis is placed on con-
SPECIAL TOPICS IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE                        ducting field research and communicating
   This is a seminar for advanced students                research in writing. Each student prepares a
offered in response to student request and                literature review and written research proposal
faculty interest. This course may be repeated             that can be carried out while placed with a
for additional credit with approval of the                criminal justice agency on practicum (CJ 448).
criminal justice coordinator, but only when               Prerequisites: CJ 100, CJ 201, and CJ 203, or
course content differs. Sample topics include             consent of instructor.
the death penalty, hate crimes, civil liability in        448-449
criminal justice, justice in the media, environ-          CRIMINAL JUSTICE PRACTICUM
mental crime, etc. Prerequisite: CJ 100 or                    Students are placed with criminal justice
consent of instructor.                                    agencies, providing opportunities to apply
347                                                       classroom knowledge in an organizational
CRIMINAL JUSTICE FORENSICS                                setting, encouraging development of profes-
    This course is an exploration of the history          sional skills, helping students identify and
and application of forensic sciences that                 clarify career interests, and providing opportu-
provides a wide overview of the many                      nities to conduct hands-on field research. Each
subfields within this discipline. Specifically,           student completes an original research project
this course provides the student with an                  under supervision of the instructor with input




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     94                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                           CRIMINAL JUSTICE • ECONOMICS




from the on-site agency representative.
Students will prepare a comprehensive,
formal, written research paper on an appropri-
ate topic. Prerequisite: CJ 100 or consent of
criminal justice coordinator.
470
INTERNSHIP (See index)
    Students desiring an internship in criminal
justice must get considerably advanced
approval by the criminal justice coordinator.
Criminal justice internships normally will not
be approved for semesters during which
practicums are also available. Internships are
intended as a four-credit-only course. How-
ever, under unusual circumstances, up to 12
credits may be approved by the criminal
justice coordinator. An example of an appro-
priate 12-credit internship is the FBI Honors
Internship Program, which requires relocation
to Washington, D.C., and participation in a
full-time program that runs the duration of the
summer. Prerequisite: CJ 100.
N80
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
    This course represents an opportunity to
                                                        ECONOMICS (ECON)
pursue specific interests and topics not usually        Professor: Madresehee
covered in regular courses. Through a                   Associate Professor: Sprunger (Chairperson)
program of readings and tutorials, the student          Assistant Professor: Gandhi
will have the opportunity to pursue these                   The Department of Economics offers two
interests and topics in greater depth than is           tracks. Track I (Managerial Economics)
usually possible in a regular course. Prerequi-         develops students’ capacity to analyze the
site: CJ 100 and consent of criminal justice            economic environment in which an organiza-
coordinator.                                            tion operates and to apply economic reasoning
                                                        to an organization’s internal decision making.
N90                                                     These courses have more of a managerial
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                   emphasis than traditional economics courses.
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                         Track II (General Economics) is designed to
                                                        provide a broad understanding of economic,
                                                        social, and business problems. In addition to
                                                        preparing students for a career in business or
                                                        government, this track provides an excellent
                                                        background for graduate or professional
                                                        studies.
                                                        Track I - Managerial Economics requires
                                                        ECON 110, 111, 220, 332 and 441; ACCT
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           95                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ECONOMICS




110 and either BUS 223 or any accounting                110
course numbered 130 or higher; BUS 338;                 PRINCIPLES OF MACROECONOMICS
and two other economics courses numbered                    Macroeconomics deals with problems of the
200 or above, excluding ECON 349.                       economic system as a whole. What influences
                                                        the level of national income and employment?
Track II - General Economics requires
                                                        What is inflation and why do we have it? What
ECON 110, 111, 331, 440, and 441, and three
                                                        is the role of government in a modern capitalis-
other courses in economics. Depending on
                                                        tic system? How does business organize to
their academic and career interests, students
                                                        produce the goods and services we demand?
are encouraged to select a minor in another
                                                        How are the American financial and banking
department such as political science, philoso-
                                                        systems organized? What is the nature of
phy, or history.                                        American unionism? What are the elements of
  In addition, the following courses are                government finance and fiscal policy?
recommended: all majors - MATH 123 and
BUS 223; majors planning graduate work -                111
MATH 112 and 128; Track II majors - ACCT                PRINCIPLES OF MICROECONOMICS
110 and either 130 or 344.                                  This course focuses upon microeconomics
   The following courses, when scheduled as             and selected current economic problems. It
W courses, count toward the writing intensive           deals with the relatively small units of the
requirement: ECON 236, 337, and 440.                    economy such as the firm and the family.
    Students interested in teacher certification        Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses how
should refer to the Department of Education             business firms decide what and how much to
on page 99.                                             produce and how goods and services are
                                                        priced in different types of markets. Also
Minor                                                   considers such problems as economic growth,
   A minor in economics requires the comple-            international trade, poverty, discrimination,
tion of ECON 110, 111 and three other eco-              ecology, and alternative economic systems.
nomics courses numbered 200 or above, or any
four economics courses numbered 200 or                  220
above.                                                  MONEY AND BANKING
   The Department of Economics is a member                 Covers business fluctuations and monetary
of the Institute for Management Studies. See            and fiscal policy; the financial organization of
page 121.                                               society; the banking system; credit institu-
                                                        tions; capital markets, and international
102                                                     financial relations. Prerequisite: ECON 110.
CONSUMER ECONOMICS
                                                        224
   A course in “ family” or “practical”
                                                        URBAN PROBLEMS
economics, designed to teach students how
                                                           The application of economic theory to the
they and their families can be intelligent
                                                        study of significant social, political, and
consumers; that is, how they can spend, save,
                                                        economic problems associated with urbaniza-
and borrow so as to maximize the value they
                                                        tion, including poverty, employment, educa-
receive for the income they have. Treats
                                                        tion, crime, health, housing, land use and the
subjects such as intelligent shopping; the uses
                                                        environment, transportation, and public
and abuses of credit; investing, savings,
                                                        finance. Analysis of solutions offered.
buying insurance, automobiles and houses;
                                                        Prerequisite: ECON 110 or 111, or consent of
medical care costs; estates and wills, etc.
                                                        instructor. Alternate years.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   96                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                               ECONOMICS




225                                                      global organization. This course considers the
ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS                                  forces reshaping global economic geography
   A study of the relationship between                   including the factors that determine the competi-
environmental decay and economic growth,                 tive advantage of nations. These factors include
with particular reference to failures of the             resources such as food, energy, materials, and
price and property-rights systems; application           changing patterns of world population. Also
of cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at the          included will be theoretical literature reparding
creation of an ecologically viable economy.              locational decisions and choice, as well as the
                                                         rapidly changing global economy in the context
229                                                      of trade theory and the shifting focus of
BUSINESS CYCLES AND FORECASTING                          international economics activity.
   An introduction to the nature and history of
business fluctuations, the tools used in                 327
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to explain        PUBLIC CHOICE
the cycle, and techniques used in forecasting                This course focuses on the application of
economic activity. Prerequisite: ECON 110                economics to the political processes of voting
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.               and bureaucratic behavior. A major theme will
                                                         be the study of problems that can occur within
230
                                                         the democratic process because the incentives
ECONOMETRICS
                                                         given to public servants do not always match
    Econometric models provide one of the
                                                         society’s best interests. Policies and institu-
most useful and necessary sets of tools for
                                                         tions that can improve such problems will be
decision-making. By using a variety of
                                                         explored. U.S. elections and campaigns will
modern statistical methods, econometrics
                                                         provide many of the applications for the class.
helps us to estimate economic relationships,
                                                         Prerequisite: ECON 110 or 111, or consent of
test different economic behaviors, and forecast
                                                         instructor. Alternate years.
different economic variables. Prerequisites:
MATH 123, ECON 110 and 111; or consent of                330
instructor. Alternate years.                             INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS
 236                                                        An advanced analysis of contemporary theory
AMERICAN ECONOMIC HISTORY                                regarding consumer demand, production costs
    This course examines topics in American              and theory, profit maximization, market
Economic History from the post-Civil War era             structures, and the determinants of returns to the
through World War II. Topics covered                     factors of production. Prerequisite: ECON 110 .
include the causes of the rise of big business           Alternate years.
as the dominant means of production, the
                                                         331
emergence of the union movement, the growth
                                                         INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS
of the U.S. economy to the largest in the
                                                            An advanced analysis of contemporary
world, and the changing role of government in
the economic system.                                     theory and practice with regard to business
                                                         fluctuation, national income accounting, the
240                                                      determination of income and employment levels,
ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY                                       and the use of monetary and fiscal policy.
   An introduction to the theory and practice            Prerequisite: ECON 110. Alternate years.
of economic geography with emphasis upon
the historical dynamics of local, regional, and



2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            97                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ECONOMICS




332                                                     349
GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY                              MANAGEMENT PRACTICUM
    An analytical survey of government’s                    An apprentice-level work experience for
efforts to maintain competition through                 junior or senior economics majors jointly
antitrust legislation to supervise acceptable           sponsored by the department and a public or
cases of private monopoly, through public               private agency (or a subdivision of the college
utility regulation and via means of regulatory          itself) designed to better integrate classroom
commissions, and to encourage or restrain               theory and workplace practice. In addition to
various types of private economic activities.           attendance at a weekly seminar, students will
Prerequisites: ECON 110 and 111, or                     spend 10-12 hours per week at the sponsoring
consent of instructor.                                  agency per unit of credit. At least one-half of
                                                        the effort expended will consist of academic
335                                                     work related to agency activities.
LABOR PROBLEMS
    The history of organized labor in the               440
United States, including the structure of               HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT
unions, employers’ opposition to unions, the                A discussion of the origins, development,
role of government in labor-management                  and significance of the economic ideas embodied
relations and the economic impact of unions.            in the works of Smith, Marx, Schumpeter,
Alternate years. Prerequisite: ECON 110 or              Keynes, and others. Prerequisite: ECON 110
111, or consent of instructor.                          or consent of instructor. Alternate years.

337                                                     441
PUBLIC FINANCE                                          MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
   An analysis of the fiscal economics of the              The application of economic theory and
public sector, including the development,               methodology to the solution of business
                                                        problems. Subjects include: optimizing
concepts, and theories of public expenditures,
                                                        techniques, risk analysis, demand theory,
taxation, and debt at all levels of American
                                                        production theory, cost theory, linear pro-
government. Also includes the use of fiscal
                                                        gramming, capital budgeting, market struc-
policy as an economic control device. Prereq-
                                                        tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequisites:
uisites: ECON 110 and 111, or consent of
                                                        ECON 110 and 111.
instructor. Alternate years.
                                                        470-479
343
                                                        INTERNSHIP (See index)
INTERNATIONAL TRADE
                                                           Typically off-campus in business, banking,
   A study of the principles, theories, develop-        or government, supervised by assigned
ment, and policies concerning international             employee of sponsoring organization.
economic relations, with particular reference to
the United States. Subjects covered include:            N80-N89
U.S. commercial policy and its development,             INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
international trade theory, tariffs and other              Superior students may select independent
protectionist devices, international monetary           study in various courses, particularly in
system and its problems, balance of payments            preparation for graduate school.
issues. Alternate years. Prerequisites: ECON
                                                        490-491
110 and 111.                                            INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                        DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   98                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                           EDUCATION




                                                      years before applying for the professional
                                                      semester. All students must complete a
                                                      minimum of 30 hours of observations and
                                                      participation with the assigned cooperating
                                                      teacher during the semester prior to their
                                                      professional semester.
                                                      Elementary Teacher Certification
                                                         Students seeking elementary teacher
                                                      certification must complete PSY138,
                                                      EDUC000, 340, 341, 342, 343, and 344 prior
                                                      to being accepted to the professional
                                                      semester.
                                                      Secondary Teacher Certification
                                                          Students seeking secondary teacher
                                                      certification must complete PSY 138, EDUC
                                                      338 and 339 prior to being accepted into the
                                                      professional semester as well as the necessary
                                                      subject area courses. (See exception below
                                                      for students seeking K-12 certifications.)
                                                      Students may earn one or more of the
                                                      following certifications:
                                                        Biology
                                                        Chemistry
EDUCATION (EDUC)                                        Citizenship (economics, history, political
Assistant Professors: Chamberlain,                         science)
  Hungerford (Chairperson)                              English
Visiting Instructor: Postal                             General science (astronomy, physics,
Part-time Instructors: Furman, Gordon, Huff,               biology, chemistry)
   Johnson, Missigman, Patterson, Rhinehart,            Mathematics
  Salvatori                                             Physics
Student Placement Coordinator: Curry                    Social sciences (psychology, sociology-
    The Education department offers                        anthropology)
Pennsylvania-approved teacher certification             Social studies (economics, history,
programs in elementary, secondary, Art (K-              philosophy, political science, psychology,
12), Foreign Language (K-12), Music (K-12),                sociology-anthropology)
and Special Education (Cognitive, Behavior                Students seeking certification in secondary
and Physical/Health Disabilities). Education          math must also complete EDUC 345 before
is not a major at Lycoming College. All               acceptance into the professional semester.
students wishing to be certified in                   Students seeking certification in any of the
Elementary, Secondary Education areas, K-12           secondary science area (biology, chemistry,
areas, or Special Education must choose a             physics) and general science (astronomy,
major from any offered by the College.                physics, biology, chemistry) must also
    All students seeking teacher certification        complete the required safety and maintenance
must complete EDUC 200 with at least a B-             workshop in their content area. These
or consent of the department within the five          workshops will address safety issues

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         99                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
EDUCATION




(laboratory instruction, regulations for use of      (f) achieved an overall grade point average of
chemicals, materials and specialized                 3.00 or better. Major departments have differ-
equipment) and general lab behavior.                 ent criteria for their recommendations; there-
Students will also be taught how to actually         fore, the student should consult with the
set up and maintain a laboratory (in their           chairperson of the major department about
particular science field) in a middle/secondary      those requirements. The Pennsylvania state
school.                                              requirements override any contractual agree-
                                                     ment the student teacher has with the college
K-12 Teacher Certification
                                                     via the catalog under which they were admitted.
    Students seeking K-12 certification must
                                                         Additional teacher intern program informa-
complete PSY 138 and EDUC 339 and the
                                                     tion can be found on page 50.
necessary subject area courses including the
                                                         The following courses, when scheduled as
methods course appropriate to their discipline
                                                     W courses, count toward the writing intensive
and offered by that department prior to being
                                                     requirement: EDUC 338, 339, 343, 344, and
accepted to the professional semester. EDUC          447.
338 is not required for K-12 certification.
Students may earn K-12 certification in one          000
or more of the following areas:                      SEMINAR IN ART, MUSIC, PHYSICAL
         Art                                         EDUCATION, and MATH ACTIVITIES
         Music                                          Each elementary student teacher attends a
         French                                      series of 24 seminars, conducted prior to
         German                                      student teaching, during the fall semester of the
         Spanish                                     senior year. These seminars, conducted by
                                                     certified public school personnel, emphasize
Special Education Teacher Certification              activities and knowledge which are helpful in
                                                     the self-contained elementary classroom. Non-
   Students seeking Special Education
                                                     credit course.
certification must complete PSY 138, PSY
216, EDUC 000, 230, 330, 331, 332, 344, and          200
430 prior to being accepted to the profes-           INTRODUCTION TO THE
sional semester.                                     STUDY OF EDUCATION
                                                        A study of teaching as a profession with
    Students interested in the teacher education
                                                     emphasis on the economic, social, political, and
program should refer to the Teacher Educa-
                                                     religious conditions which influence American
tion Handbook, which specifies the current
                                                     schools and teachers. Consideration is given to
requirements for certification. Early consulta-
                                                     the school environment, the curriculum, and the
tion with a member of the Education Depart-
                                                     children with the intention that students will
ment is strongly recommended. Application
                                                     examine more rationally their own motives for
for the professional semester must be made
                                                     entering the profession.
during the fall semester of the junior year.
  The Department of Education admits to the          230
professional semester applicants who have            INTRODUCTION TO SPECIAL
(a) completed the participation requirements,        EDUCATION
(b) paid the student teaching fee, (c) obtained         This course covers historical, philosophical,
a recommendation from the student’s major            and legal perspectives related to exceptional
department, (d) passed a screening and               students. All major areas of exceptionality are
interview conducted by the Education Depart-         covered including those who are categorized as
ment, (e) passed the PPST Reading, Writing,          “gifted.” A study of typical and atypical
and Math portions of the NTE exam, and               development of children provides the basis for

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   100                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                              EDUCATION




an in-depth study of the characteristics and             programs for parents and students, assistive
classifications of exceptional students. An              technologies, and related services such as
emphasis is placed upon the ethical and                  occupational therapy and counseling. Theo-
professional behaviors of teachers of students           retical perspectives of emotional and behav-
with disabilities in special education and/or            ioral disorders and educational approaches to
regular classrooms settings including multi-             behavioral issues are discussed. Group
cultural and multilingual situations. Prereq-            processes and communication are studied.
uisite: EDUC 200 or consent of department.               Significant field experiences are required.
232                                                      Prerequisite or co-requisite: EDUC 331.
INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA                                      338
AND COMMUNICATIONS                                       LITERACY FOR
    A study of the value, design, construction,          MIDDLE/SECONDARY SCHOOLS
and application of the visual and auditory aids              This course is designed to teach the
to learning. Practical experience in the                 strategies necessary to implementing literacy
handling of audio-visual equipment and                   skills in the middle/secondary content areas.
materials is provided. Application of audio-             Reading, writing, speaking, listening and
visual techniques. Application of the visual             media interpretation in content areas will be
and auditory aids to learning. Students will             the focus. Developmental stages for
plan and carry out actual teaching assign-               adolescents and critical reading strategies will
ments utilizing various A-V devices.                     be addressed in addition to strategies for
330                                                      using young adult literature in the content
READING FOR SPECIAL POPULATIONS:                         areas. Prerequisite: EDUC 200 or consent of
ASSESSMENT AND INSTRUCTION                               instructor.
    This course provides students seeking                339
certification in Special Education with a                MIDDLE AND SECONDARY SCHOOL
course that addresses the assessment tools and           CURRICLUM AND INSTRUCTION
the teaching strategies for evaluating reading               An examination of the various curricula of
needs, skills, and strengths and with specific           the public schools and their relationship to
teaching strategies to help special needs                current practices. Special attention will be
students accomplish reading success. Prereq-             given to development of the curriculum, state
uisite: EDUC 344 or consent of department.               and national curriculum standards, and
331                                                      criteria for the evaluation of curricula and
CURRICULUM AND ASSESSMENT FOR                            student pro-gress. A particular emphasis will
STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES                               be placed upon emerging issues and technol-
    This course provides information and                 ogy as they relate to curriculum. Emphasis
experiences in assessment strategies, curricu-           will be placed upon the curriculum work
lum requirements, and planning for students              within the teaching field of each individual.
with disabilities. Legal and ethical issues are          Prerequisites: PSY 138 and EDUC 200, or
covered. Curriculum for early intervention,              consent of instructor.
elementary and secondary education, and                  340
transition planning for adult life are included.         TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN THE
Prerequisite: EDUC 230.                                  ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
333                                                         This course is intended for prospective
PROGRAMS AND SERVICES FOR                                elementary and middle school teachers and is
INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABILITIES                            required for all those seeking elementary
   This course investigates community based-             certification. Topics include number systems,
services, professional organizations, support            computational algorithms, measurement,
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           101                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
EDUCATION




geometry, and children’s development of             for developing creative characteristics in
mathematical concepts. Includes an emphasis         children and for ensuring an appreciation of
on adapting instruction for diverse learners.       the creative writing of others. Observation
Prerequisites: PSY 138, EDUC 200, and two           and participation in Lycoming County
courses in mathematics; or consent of instruc-      elementary schools. Prerequisites: EDUC
tor.                                                200 and PSY 138, or consent of instructor.
341                                                 344
TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES IN                      TEACHING READING IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL                               THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
   Studies and experiences to develop a basic           A basic course in the philosophy and
understanding of the structure, concepts, and       rationale for the implementation of an
processes of anthropology, economics,               elementary reading program from kindergar-
geography, history, political science, and          ten through sixth grade. Emphasis is upon
sociology as they relate to the elementary          designing a reading instructional program
school social science curriculum. Practical         which reflects the nature of the learning
applications, demonstrations of methods, and        process and recognizes principles of child
the development of integrated teaching units        development through examination of the
using tests, reference books, films, and other      principles, problems, methods, and materials
teaching materials. Observation and                 used in elementary reading programs.
participation in Lycoming County elementary         Prerequisite: EDUC 200 or PSY 138, or
schools. Prerequisites: EDUC 200 and PSY            consent of instructor.
138, or consent of instructor.
                                                    345
342                                                 CURRICULUM AND INSTRUCTION IN
TEACHING SCIENCE IN                                 MIDDLE/SECONDARY MATHEMATICS
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL                                  This is a basic course in the theory and
   Science methods and materials interpreting       pedagogy needed for the instruction of
children’s science experiences and guiding the      mathematics in the Middle/Secondary
development of the scientific concepts. A           Schools. It is designed to examine and
study of the science content of the curriculum,     implement curriculum, teaching strategies,
its material and use. Observation and partici-      and required standards in math in the middle
pation in Lycoming County elementary                and secondary schools. The needs and
schools. Prerequisites: EDUC 200 and PSY            developmental stages of middle/secondary
138, or consent of instructor.                      adolescents will also be addressed.
343                                                 Prerequisite: EDUC 200 and two courses in
TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS AND                          mathematics; or consent of instructor.
CHILDREN’S LITERATURE IN THE                        The Professional Semester
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL                                      Students are considered full time when
    A course designed to consider means of          enrolled in the Professional Semester. Those
communication, oral and written, including
                                                    students needing an additional course must
both practical and creative uses. Attention
                                                    comply with the standards stated in the
will be given to listening, speaking, written
                                                    College catalog.
expression, linguistics and grammar, and
spelling. Stress will be placed upon the            The Elementary Professional Semester
interrelatedness of the language arts. Chil-        The following courses comprise the Elemen-
dren’s literature will be explored as a vehicle     tary Professional Semester:


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  102                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                             EDUCATION




EDUC 445       Methods of Teaching                      The Secondary Professional Semester
               in the Elementary School                    The following courses comprise the
EDUC 447       Problems in Contemporary                 Secondary Professional Semester:
               American Education                       EDUC 446 Methods of Teaching in the
EDUC 448       Student Teaching in the                           Middle Level and Secondary
               Elementary School                                 Schools
445                                                     EDUC 447 Problems in Contemporary
METHODS OF TEACHING IN THE                                       American Education
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF THE                          EDUC 449 Student Teaching in the
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                                           Secondary School
    The course emphasizes the relationship              The K-12 Professional Semester
between the theoretical studies of physical,               The following courses comprise the K-12
social and cognitive development and the                Professional Semester:
elementary classroom environment. Particu-              EDUC 445 or 446 Elementary or
lar consideration will be given to the appro-                               Secondary
priate age and developmental level of the                                   Methods
students with an emphasis upon selection and            EDUC 447            Problems in Contemporary
utilization of methods in all the elementary                                American Education
subject areas, including art and music.                 EDUC 448            Student Teaching in the
Specific attention is given to the development                              Elementary Schools
of strategies for structuring lesson plans, for                             (4 semester hours/6 weeks)
maintaining classroom control, and for                  EDUC 449            Student Teaching in the
overall classroom management. Direct                                        Secondary Schools
application is made to the individual student                               (4 semester hours/6 weeks)
teaching experience. Prerequisites: EDUC
000, 340, 341, 342, 343, and 344, and pre-              446
student teaching participation.                         METHODS OF TEACHING IN MIDDLE
                                                        LEVEL AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS
447                                                     (PART OF THE PROFESSIONAL
PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY                                SEMESTER)
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF THE                            A study of materials, methods, and
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                                  techniques with emphasis on the student’s
    Seminar on the issues, problems, and                major. Specific attention is given to structur-
challenges encountered by teachers in the               ing unit and lesson plans, maintaining
American public schools, especially those               classroom discipline, and to overall classroom
related to the student teaching experience.             management. Stress is placed on the selection
448                                                     and utilization of a variety of strategies,
STUDENT TEACHING IN THE                                 materials, and technologies to support
ELEMENTARY SCHOOL (PART OF                              learning for a diverse student population.
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                              Students teach demonstration lessons in the
    Professional experience under the supervi-          presence of the instructor and members of the
sion of a selected cooperating teacher in an            class and observe superior teachers in
elementary school. Student teachers are                 Lycoming County middle and secondary
required to follow the calendar of the school           schools. Prerequisites: EDUC 200, PSY 138,
district to which they are assigned. Two units          and pre-student teaching participation.
maximum.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          103                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
EDUCATION




447                                                 and resource room settings, and technology
PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY                            are stressed. Prerequisites or co-requisites:
AMERICAN EDUCATION (PART OF THE                     EDUC 330, 331, 333, and 344.
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                              431
    Seminar on the issues, problems, and            CURRENT ISSUES IN SPECIAL EDUCA-
challenges encountered by teachers in the           TION
American public schools, especially those           (PART OF THE PROFESSIONAL SEMES-
related to the student teaching experience.         TER)
449                                                    This capstone course for Special Education
STUDENT TEACHING IN THE                             requires students to reflect upon their course
SECONDARY SCHOOL (PART OF                           of study, field experiences, and student
THE PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                          teaching; to research and analyze current
   Professional laboratory experience under         issues in the field; and to complete their
the supervision of a selected cooperating           professional portfolios. The content of the
teacher in a secondary school. Student              course will vary according to the needs of
teachers are required to follow the calendar of     students, current events, and issues in Special
the school district to which they are assigned.     Education.
Two units maximum.                                  432
The Special Education                               STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
Professional Semester                               ELEMENTARY SCHOOL FOR
The following courses comprise the Special          SPECIAL EDUCATION (PART OF THE
Education Professional Semester:                    PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
                                                        Professional experience under the supervi-
EDUC 430           Methods of Teaching              sion of a selected cooperating teacher in an
                   Students with Special            elementary school. Student teachers are
                   Needs                            required to follow the calendar of the school
EDUC 431           Current Issues in Special
                   Education                        district to which they are assigned.
EDUC 432           Student Teaching in the          433
                   Elementary School                STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
                   (4 semester hours/7 weeks)       SECONDARY SCHOOL FOR
EDUC 433           Student Teaching in the          SPECIAL EDUCATION (PART OF THE
                   Secondary School                 PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
                   (4 semester hours/7 weeks)           Professional experience under the supervi-
430                                                 sion of a selected cooperating teacher in a
METHODS OF TEACHING STUDENTS                        secondary school. Student teachers are
WITH SPECIAL NEEDS (PART OF THE                     required to follow the calendar of the school
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)                              district to which they are assigned.
    This course addresses planning and
methods for teaching students with disabili-
ties in all content areas. Integration of
content and skill areas, least restrictive
environment strategies including inclusion




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  104                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                  ENGLISH




                                                          221; two courses selected from 222, 223, 227;
                                                          two from 311, 312, 313, 314, and 315; one
                                                          from 335 and 336; two electives from among
                                                          courses numbered 215 and above; and the
                                                          Capstone Experience.
                                                             Students who wish to earn secondary teacher
                                                          certification must complete a minimum of
                                                          twelve courses in English. Required courses
                                                          are ENGL 217; 220; 221; 335; 336; 338; two
                                                          courses from 222, 223, 227; three courses from
                                                          311, 312, 313, 314, and 315; one elective from
                                                          among courses numbered 215 and above; and
                                                          the Capstone Experience. Required courses
                                                          outside English are EDUC 200, 338, 339, 446,
                                                          447, and 449; PSY 110 and 138; and THEA
                                                          100.
                                                              Students who intend to pursue graduate
                                                          study in British or American literature should
                                                          complete the twelve English courses specified
                                                          for secondary certification and, as part of that
                                                          sequence, take ENGL 449, Advanced Criti-
                                                          cism, as their English elective.
                                                          Track II - English Major in Creative Writing
ENGLISH (ENGL)                                               This track is designed for students who
Professors: Feinstein, Hawkes (Chairperson),              aspire to careers as professional writers, as
   Moses                                                  editors, and as publishers; for students who
Associate Professors: Hafer, Lewes                        plan to continue studies in an M.F.A. or M.A.
Assistant Professor: Leiter                               program; or for students who would like to
Visiting Assistant Professor: Preston                     discover their creative potential while pursu-
                                                          ing a fundamental liberal arts education.
   The department offers two programs
                                                             A minimum of ten courses is required for
leading to the major in English:
                                                          Track II. Required courses are ENGL 240;
Track I - English Major in Literature                     two courses selected from 220, 221, 222, 223,
  This track is designed for students who                 225, and 227; two from 311, 312, 313, 314
choose English as a liberal arts major that pre-          and 315; one from 331 or 332; one from 335
pares them for a wide range of career options;            and 336; two from 341, 342, 441, and 442
for students who choose English as their subject          (note prerequisites); and one from 411 or 412.
area for elementary certification or who wish to             Students who wish to earn secondary
earn secondary certification in English; for              teacher certification must complete a mini-
students who wish to improve their verbal and             mum of twelve courses in English. Required
analytic ability in preparation for a specific            courses are ENGL 240, 335, 336, 338; two
career, such as technical writing, business, or           courses selected from 220, 221, 222, 223, 225,
law; and for students who intend to pursue                and 227; two from 311, 312, 313, 314, and
graduate study in British or American literature.         315; one from 331 and 332; two from 341,
   A minimum of ten courses is required for               342, 441, 442 (note prerequisites); and one
Track I. Required courses are ENGL 217; 220;
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            105                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
ENGLISH




from 411 and 412; ENGL 217 recommended.              215
Required courses outside English are EDUC            INTRODUCTION TO
200, 338, 339, 446, 447, and 449; PSY 110 and        LITERARY INTERPRETATION
138; and THEA 100.                                      Practice in the methods of close reading and
   The following courses satisfy the cultural        formal analysis. Identification of primary elements
diversity requirement: ENGL 332 and 334.             and structures of literary representation. Literature
The following courses, when scheduled as W           chosen for study will vary. Prerequisite: ENGL
courses, count toward the writing intensive          106 or107, or consent of instructor.
requirement: ENGL 218, 225, 311, 334, 336,
and 338.                                             217
                                                     CRITICAL WRITING SEMINAR
Capstone Experience                                      An introduction to writing critically about
    Seniors in the literature track must hand in     literary texts. Workshop setting offers inten-
a portfolio of writing during the first week of      sive practice in the writing and critiquing of
their final semester. The portfolio must             papers. Designed for beginning students of
include four major papers from English               literature. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or
courses and a self-assessment essay. Seniors         consent of instructor. Not open to juniors or
in the creative writing track must successfully      seniors except for newly declared majors or
complete either ENGL 411 or ENGL 412.                with consent of instructor.
Minors                                               218
  The department offers two minors in                CLASSICAL AND MODERN RHETORIC
English:                                                 An exploration of the province, content,
Literature: Five courses in literature at the        strategies, and techniques comprising ancient
200 level or above, at least three of which          and modern discourse, with particular emphasis
must be numbered 300 or above.                       on written lines of argument. Prerequisite:
                                                     ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.
Writing: Five courses, four of which are
chosen from ENGL 217, 218, 240, 322, and             220
338; plus one writing-intensive course in            BRITISH LITERATURE I
literature at the 300 level.                            A survey of literary forms, dominate ideas,
                                                     and major authors from the Anglo-Saxon
106
                                                     period through the 18th century. Emphasis on
COMPOSITION
                                                     such writers as Chaucer, Shakespeare, Donne,
   Extensive practice in analytical writing.
                                                     Milton, Swift, Pope, and Johnson; representa-
Special emphasis on developing the compos-
                                                     tive works from Beowulf to Burney’s Evelina.
ing skills needed to articulate and defend a
                                                     Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of
position in various situations requiring the use
                                                     instructor.
of written English. Credit may not be earned
for both 106 and 107.                                221
                                                     BRITISH LITERATURE II
107
                                                       Literary movements and authors from the
HONORS COMPOSITION
                                                     beginnings of Romanticism to the end of the 19th
   Extensive practice in analytical writing.
                                                     century. Particular emphasis on such writers as
Special emphasis on developing the writing
                                                     Wordsworth, Shelley, Keats, Tennyson,
skills of students who have the potential to
                                                     Browning, Carlyle, Arnold, Hardy, and Yeats.
benefit from advanced work. Placement by
                                                     Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of
examination only. Credit may not be earned
                                                     instructor.
for both 106 and 107.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   106                        2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                 ENGLISH




222                                                    narrative, drama, and romance with emphasis
AMERICAN LITERATURE I                                  on the cultural context from which these
   Survey of American literature from the              forms emerge. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or
beginning to 1865, with major emphasis on the          107, or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
writers of the Romantic period: Poe, Emerson,
                                                       312
Thoreau, Hawthorne, Melville, Dickinson, and
                                                       RENAISSANCE LITERATURE
Whitman. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or
                                                          An examination of themes and literary
consent of instructor.
                                                       forms of the Renaissance. Authors studied
223                                                    will include Donne, Marlowe, More,
AMERICAN LITERATURE II                                 Shakespeare, Sidney, Spenser, and Surrey.
    Survey of American literature from 1865 to         Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of
1945, emphasizing such authors as Twain,               instructor. Alternate years.
James, Crane, Hemingway, Faulkner, Frost,
                                                       313
Eliot, Stevens, O’Neill, and Williams. Prerequi-
                                                       RESTORATION AND
site: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.
                                                       18TH-CENTURY LITERATURE
225                                                        Consideration of selected themes, writers,
CLASSICAL LITERATURE                                   or modes of Restoration and 18th-century
    A study, in translation, of Greek and Roman        literature (1660-1800) with emphasis on the
works that have influenced Western writers.            social, political, and intellectual life of that
Literary forms studied include epic, drama,            era. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or
satire, and love poetry. Writers studied include       consent of instructor. Alternate years.
Homer, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides,
Virgil, Juvenal, Horace, Lucretius, and Ovid.          314
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of           ROMANTIC LITERATURE
instructor.                                               Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
                                                       and themes of the Romantic period (1789-
227                                                    1832) with emphasis on the social, political,
AMERICAN LITERATURE III                                and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite:
   Survey of American literature from 1945 to          ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.
the present, focusing on such writers as Bellow,       Alternate years.
O’Connor, Updike, Roth, Morrison, Bishop,
Lowell, Ginsberg, and Plath. Prerequisite:             315
ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.             VICTORIAN LITERATURE
                                                          Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
240                                                    and themes of the Victorian period (1832-
INTRODUCTION TO CREATIVE WRITING                       1901) with emphasis on the social, political,
   Workshop discussions, structured exercises,         and intellectual life of that era. Prerequisite:
and readings in contemporary literature to             ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.
provide practice and basic instruction in the          Alternate years.
writing and evaluation of poetry and fiction.
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of           322
instructor.                                            ADVANCED WRITING:
                                                       THE CREATIVE ESSAY
311                                                       A course in which students from all
MEDIEVAL LITERATURE
                                                       disciplines learn to explore and define
   Readings in Old and Middle English poetry
                                                       themselves through the essay, a form used to
and prose from Bede’s Ecclesiastical History
                                                       express the universal through the particular
to Malory’s Arthurian romance. Study of lyric,
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         107                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
ENGLISH




and the personal. Readings will include              Tales will be read in Middle English. The
essayists from Montaigne to Gould.                   course includes a brief study of language
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of         development to Chaucer, a study of Middle
instructor. Alternate years.                         English sufficient to comprehend Chaucer,
                                                     and an examination of the cultural traditions
331                                                  that inform Chaucer’s works. Prerequisite:
MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY FICTION                      ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.
    Examination of the novels and short fiction      Alternate years.
of such major writers as Conrad, Woolf,
Joyce, Faulkner, Fowles, and Nabokov, with           336
special emphasis on the relationship of their        SHAKESPEARE
works to concepts of modernism. Prerequi-               A study of representative plays in the
site: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of instructor.     context of Shakespeare’s life and times.
                                                     Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of
332                                                  instructor. Alternate years.
MODERN AND CONTEMPORARY POETRY
    Studies in the themes and visions of             338
modern and contemporary poets, beginning             LINGUISTICS
with Yeats and the American Modernists,                 An intensive look at the English language,
covering a variety of central movements (such        focusing on three grammatical systems
as the Harlem Renaissance), and concluding           (traditional, structural, transformational) to
with a range of multi-cultural authors.              identify their strengths and weaknesses.
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107 or consent of          Attention is also given to larger issues,
instructor.                                          including language change, the politics of
                                                     language, the creation of meaning, language
333                                                  acquisition, and dialects. Prerequisite: ENGL
THE NOVEL                                            106 or 107, or consent of instructor. Alternate
    An examination primarily of British and          years.
American works from the 18th century to the
present, focusing on the novel’s ability—since       341
its explosive inception—to redefine its own          POETRY WORKSHOP I
boundaries. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107,              An intermediate workshop focusing on the
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.           writing of poetry and methods of analysis.
                                                     Prerequisite: Grade of B or better in ENGL
334                                                  240, or consent of instructor.
WOMEN AND LITERATURE
   An examination—literary, social, and              342
historical—of literature by women represent-         FICTION WORKSHOP I
ing diverse cultures. Each course will examine         An intermediate course in the writing of
a particular theme significant to women              short fiction in a workshop environment, where
writers from more than one cultural back-            the student is trained to hear language at work.
ground. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or            Emphasis on characterization and story.
consent of instructor. Alternate years.              Prerequisite: Grade of B or better in ENGL
                                                     240, or consent of instructor.
335
CHAUCER                                              411
   Concentrated study of The Canterbury              FORM AND THEORY: POETRY
Tales with emphasis on the variety of medi-            Principles of meter, rhyme, formal structure,
eval narrative genres represented. Chaucer’s         and traditional and contemporary poetic forms

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   108                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                   ENGLISH




will be studied through readings, discussion,             in evaluating the work of their peers.
and exercises. Designed to enhance skills in both         Prerequisite: ENGL 341.
practical criticism and in creative writing, this
                                                          442
course will pay particular attention to theories
                                                          FICTION WORKSHOP II
concerned with the relationship between form
                                                              An advanced course in the writing of short
and content in poetry. Prerequisite: ENGL 341
                                                          fiction. Emphasis on the complexities of
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
                                                          voice and tone. The student will be encouraged
412                                                       to develop and control his or her individual
FORM AND THEORY: FICTION                                  style and produce publishable fiction. Prereq-
    A course that examines philosophical and              uisite: ENGL 342.
aesthetic theories of fiction, and the resulting
fiction based on those theories. Authors will             449
most likely include Aristotle, Calvino, Gardner,          ADVANCED CRITICISM
Gass, and Nabokov. Prerequisite: ENGL 342                    Reading and discussion in the theory and
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.                history of criticism. Examination of both
                                                          traditional and contemporary ideas about the
420                                                       value and nature of literary expression and its
SELECTED WRITERS                                          place in human culture generally. Work in the
   An intensive study of no more than three               course includes practical as well as theoretical
writers, selected on the basis of student and             use of the ideas and methods of critical
faculty interest. Possible combinations                   inquiry. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or
include: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner;                  consent of instructor. Alternate years.
O’Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and
Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and Dickens;                 470-479
Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence; Joyce and                   INTERNSHIP (See index)
Yeats. Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or                     The department provides internships in
consent of instructor. Alternate years.                   editing, legal work, publishing, and technical
                                                          writing.
421
TOPICS IN LITERATURE                                      N80-N89
    Examination of a literary theme, idea, or             INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
movement as it appears in one or more types                  Recent studies include the role of Pennsyl-
of literature and as it cuts across various               vania in the fiction of John O’Hara; the
epochs. Possible topics include: American                 changing image of women in American art
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and                   and literature (1890-1945); the hard-boiled
Depression; The Bible and Literature; Gothic              detective novel; contemporary women writers;
Tradition in American Literature; Mystery and             and Milton’s use of the Bible in Paradise
Detective Fiction; The Hero in Literature.                Lost.
Prerequisite: ENGL 106 or 107, or consent of              490-491
instructor. Alternate years.                              INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
441                                                       DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
POETRY WORKSHOP II                                           Recent projects include “The Function of
   An advanced workshop in the writing of                 the Past in the Fiction of William Faulkner”
poetry. Students will receive intensive anal-             and “Illusion, Order, and Art in the Novels of
ysis of their own work and acquire experience             Virginia Woolf.”


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            109                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




                                                         translating, and writing. It prepares for
                                                         graduate work in literature or linguistics and
                                                         the international fields of politics, business,
                                                         law, health, and area studies.
                                                         MAJOR FIELDS OF STUDY
                                                            French, German, and Spanish are offered as
                                                         major fields of study. The major consists of at
                                                         least 32 semester hours of courses numbered
                                                         111 and above. Students who intend to pursue
                                                         graduate study in a foreign language should
                                                         take additional 300- and 400-level courses.
                                                         Majors seeking teacher certification are
                                                         advised to begin the study of a second foreign
                                                         language.
                                                            The department encourages students to
                                                         consider allied courses from related fields, a
                                                         second major, or an interdisciplinary major
                                                         such as International Studies.
                                                         STUDY ABROAD AND INTERNSHIPS
                                                             The department recommends that all
                                                         language majors study abroad in a Lycoming
                                                         College affiliate program or in a department-
                                                         approved program. Students seeking teacher
                                                         certification are required to study abroad for a
                                                         minimum of eight weeks, although a semester-
FOREIGN                                                  length program is recommended. Lycoming
LANGUAGES AND                                            offers affiliate programs in France (Université
                                                         de Grenoble), Spain (Tandem Escuela
LITERATURES                                              Internacional or Estudio Sampere) and
                                                         Ecuador (Estudio Sampere). Approved
Associate Professors: Buedel, Kingery                    programs in Austria, Germany, and Switzer-
Assistant Professors: Cartal-Falk,                       land include the Institute for International
 Heysel (Chairperson),                                   Education, the Goethe Institute, and
Visiting Assistant Professor: Bernal                     Universität Frieburg. Students who intend to
Visiting Instructors: Cagle, McNerney, Tira              study abroad should begin planning with their
   Study of foreign languages and literatures            major advisor by the first week of the semester
offers opportunity to explore broadly the                prior to departure. To qualify, students must
varieties of human experience and thought. It            have sophomore standing or higher, an overall
contributes both to personal and to interna-             GPA of 2.50, a GPA of 3.00 in language
tional understanding by providing competence             courses, and recommendation from faculty in
in a foreign language and a critical acquain-            the major. Overseas internships are offered
tance with the literature and culture of foreign         through approved programs. They typically
peoples. A major can serve as a gateway to               require substantial language skills and junior
careers in business, government, publishing,             or senior standing.
education, journalism, social agencies,

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   110                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                    FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




CAPSTONE EXPERIENCE                                      regularly with peers, professors, and invited
   All foreign language majors are required to           guest speakers to discuss linguistic, literary,
pass two semesters of FLL 449 (Junior-Senior             cultural, and pedagogical topics. Each student
Colloquium). In addition, all majors must                enrolled in 449 is required to deliver at least
complete at least two of the following six               one oral presentation of approximately 20
options: (1) appropriate study abroad for a              minutes in a language other than English in
minimum of 8 weeks; (2) an internship; (3)               their second semester. Prerequisite: junior
department-approved volunteer work in the                standing. The department recommends that,
foreign language; (4) FRN 418, GERM 418, or              when possible, students take one semester of
SPAN 418 with a grade of C or better; (5)                449 during their junior year and another
secondary teaching certification in French,              semester during their senior year. Taught in
German, or Spanish; (6) a total of 12 credit             English. The Colloquium will meet a minimum
hours at the 400-level in French, German, or             of 6 times during the semester for 1 hour each
Spanish.
                                                         session. After successful completion of two
   If the colloquia and other two requirements
                                                         semesters of the Colloquium, a student may
have not been met by the end of the first
                                                         enroll for additional semesters on a pass-fail
semester of the senior year, the student must
                                                         basis and no oral presentation will be required.
submit to the chair of the department a plan
signed by the advisor showing when and how               Non-credit course.
these requirements will be completed.                    FRENCH (FRN)
TEACHER CERTIFICATION                                    Major
   Students interested in teacher certification              A major consists of a minimum of 32
should refer to the Department of Education              semester hours of FRN courses numbered 111
on page 99.                                              and above or approved courses from a Study
                                                         Abroad program, including at least eight
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND                                    semester hours from the 400 level, not includ-
LITERATURES (FLL)                                        ing FLL 449. French majors must pass at least
338                                                      two semesters of FLL 449 and complete two of
FOREIGN LANGUAGE:                                        the additional requirements as explained under
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS                                      Capstone Experience. Students who wish to be
    Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool         certified for secondary teaching must complete
for language learning and teaching. Discussion           the major with at least a 3.00 GPA and pass
and application of language teaching techniques,         FRN 221-222, 228, 418, and FLL 338 (the
including work in the language laboratory.               latter two courses with a grade of B or better).
Designed for future teachers of one or more                  The following course satisfies the cultural
languages and normally taken in the junior year.         diversity requirement: FRN 311. The following
Students should arrange through the Depart-              courses, when scheduled as a W course, counts
ment of Education to fulfill the requirements            toward the writing intensive requirement: FRN
of a participation experience in area schools in         222 and FRN 412.
the same semester. Prerequisite: Consent of
instructor. Taught in English. Does not                  Minor
count toward majors in French, German, and                  A minor in French consists of at least 16
Spanish.                                                 semester hours of courses numbered 221 and
                                                         above. Courses 111 and 112 may be counted
449
                                                         towards the minor, but then the minor must
JUNIOR-SENIOR COLLOQUIUM
                                                         consist of at least 20 semester hours of
    This colloquium offers French, German,
and Spanish majors the opportunity to meet
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           111                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




courses, 12 hours of which must be numbered           315
200 or above.                                         INTRODUCTION TO FRENCH AND
101-102                                               FRANCOPHONE LITERATURES
ELEMENTARY FRENCH                                        Diverse readings in this course draw from
   The aim of this sequence of courses is to          both French and Francophone literatures and
acquire the fundamentals of the language with         represent significant literary movements from
a view to using them. Regular practice in             the Middle Ages to the present. The course is
speaking, understanding, and reading.                 designed to acquaint the student with literary
Prerequisite for 102: FRN 101 or equivalent.          concepts and terms, genre study and the basic
                                                      skills of literary analysis. Prerequisite: FRN
111-112                                               222 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
INTERMEDIATE FRENCH
    Review and development of the fundamen-           321
tals of the language for immediate use in             SPECIAL TOPICS OR AUTHORS
speaking, understanding, and reading, with a          IN LITERATURE
view to building confidence in self-expres-               Examination of significant cultural or
sion. Prerequisite for 111: FRN 102 or                literary topics concerning the French-speaking
equivalent; for 112: FRN 111 or equivalent.           world. Possible topics or genres include:
221-222                                               Francophone short stories; modern French
CONVERSATION, REVIEW,                                 theatre; French-speaking women writers;
AND COMPOSITION                                       French and Francophone poetry; Paris and the
   Intensive discussion and writing on a              Avant-garde. Prerequisites: FRN 222, 311;
variety of subjects in conjunction with               or consent of instructor. May be repeated for
contemporary readings. Focus on phonetics,            credit with consent of instructor.
pronunciation and in-depth grammar review
including the study of French stylistics,             412
semantics and syntax. Designed to provide             FRENCH LITERATURE OF
greater breadth and fluency in spoken and             THE 19TH CENTURY
written French. Prerequisite for FRN 221:                 The dimensions of the Romantic sensibil-
FRN 112 or equivalent; for FRN 222: FRN               ity: Musset, Hugo, Madame de Staël, Vigny,
221.                                                  Balzac, Stendhal, Sand; realism and natural-
                                                      ism in the novels of Flaubert and Zola; and
311
                                                      reaction in the poetry of Baudelaire,
MODERN FRANCE
                                                      Desbordes-Valmore, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and
    A course designed to familiarize students
                                                      Mallarmé. Prerequisite: At least one French
with social and political structures and cultural
attitudes in contemporary French and                  course from the 300 level. Alternate years.
Francophone societies. Material studied may           418
include such documents as newspaper articles,         ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
interviews and sociological surveys, and                 Intensive practice for advanced students
readings in history, religion, anthropology,          who wish to improve further their spoken and
and the arts. Some attention to the changing          written French. Includes work in oral
education system and the family and to events         comprehension, phonetics, pronunciation, oral
and ideas which have shaped French-speaking           and written composition, and translation.
societies. Includes some comparative study of         Prerequisites: Either two French 300 level
France and the United States. Prerequisite:           courses or one French 400 level course; or
FRN 221 or consent of instructor. Alternate           consent of instructor.
years.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    112                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                       FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




426                                                        GERMAN (GERM)
SPECIAL TOPICS IN MODERN FRENCH                            Major
AND FRANCOPHONE LITERATURE AND                                A major consists of a minimum of 32
CULTURE                                                    semester hours of GERM courses numbered 111
    Readings of important works and move-                  and above or approved courses from a Study
ments in modern French and/or Francophone                  Abroad program. GERM 426 or 441 is required
literature and culture. Reading selections may             of all majors. German majors must pass at least
focus on a particular genre or they may be a               two semesters of FLL 449 and complete two of
combination of drama, poetry and prose.                    the additional requirements as explained under
Possible topics include: 20th century poetry;              Capstone Experience on page 110.
French cinema; children’s literature; surreal-                Students who wish to be certified for
ism and the avant-garde; the Francophone                   secondary teaching must complete the major
novel; French literature and art between the               with at least a 3.00 GPA and pass GERM 221-
wars. Prerequisites: Either two French 300                 222, 323, 325, 418, and either 426 or 441. In
level courses or one French 400 level course,              addition to the 32 semester hours of courses for
or consent of instructor. May be repeated for              the major, they must also pass FLL 338 and
credit with consent of instructor.                         GERM 418 with a grade of B or better. All
                                                           majors are urged to enroll in HIST 416, MUS
427
                                                           336, PSCI 221, and THEA 335.
FRENCH LITERATURE OF
                                                              The following courses satisfy the cultural
THE 20TH CENTURY
                                                           diversity requirement: GERM 221 and 222.
   Representative poets and novelists of
                                                           The following course, when scheduled as a W
modern France. Readings selected from the
                                                           course, counts toward the writing intensive
works of authors such as Proust, Colette,
                                                           requirement: GERM 321.
Gide, Aragon, Giono, Mauriac, Céline,
Malraux, Saint-Exupéry, Camus, the “new                    Minor
novelists” (Robbe-Grillet, Butor, Sarraute, Le                A minor in German consists of at least 16
Clézio), Duras, and the poetry of Apollinaire,             semester hours of courses numbered 221 and
Valéry, the Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy,                  above. Courses 111 and 112 may be counted
Eluard, Char), Saint-John Perse, Supervielle,              toward the minor, but then the minor must
Prévert, and others. Prerequisite: At least                consist of at least 20 semester hours of courses,
one French course from the 300 level.                      12 hours of which must be numbered 200 or
Alternate years.                                           above. One unit of FLL 225 may be included
                                                           in the minor with permission.
470-479
INTERNSHIP (See index)                                     101-102
                                                           ELEMENTARY GERMAN
N80-N89
                                                               The aim of this sequence of courses is to
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
                                                           acquire the fundamentals of the language with a
    Examples of recent studies in French include
                                                           view to using them. Regular practice in
translation, Existentialism, the classical period,
                                                           speaking, understanding, and reading. Prerequi-
enlightenment literature, and Saint-Exupery.
                                                           site for 102: GERM 101 or equivalent.
490-491
                                                           111-112
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                           INTERMEDIATE GERMAN
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
                                                              This sequence of courses reviews and
                                                           develops the fundamentals of the language for


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                             113                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




immediate use in speaking, understanding,                 and culture from the 19th century through the
and reading with a view to building confi-                1960's. Prerequisite: GERM 222 or consent
dence in self-expression. Prerequisite for                of instructor.
111: GERM 102 or equivalent; for 112:
                                                          411
GERM 111 or equivalent.
                                                          THE NOVELLE
221-222                                                      The German Novelle as a genre relating to
COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW                                      various literary periods. Prerequisite: GERM
AND LANGUAGE PRACTICE                                     323 or 325, or consent of instructor.
   This sequence of courses is designed to
                                                          418
review and develop skills in speaking, listening,
                                                          ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabulary
                                                             Intensive practice for advanced students
building are stressed with intensive review,
                                                          who want to improve their spoken and written
writing practice and some reading on contem-
                                                          German. Includes work in oral comprehen-
porary issues in German-speaking countries.
                                                          sion, phonetics, pronunciation, oral and
Prerequisite for 221: GERM 112 or equiva-
                                                          written composition, translation, and the
lent; for 222: GERM 221.
                                                          development of the language and its relation-
321                                                       ship to English. Prerequisite: GERM 222 or
SPECIAL TOPICS OR AUTHORS                                 consent of instructor.
IN LITERATURE
                                                          426
     Examination of significant cultural or
                                                          SPECIAL TOPICS IN MODERN GERMAN
literary topics concerning the German-speaking
                                                          LITERATURE AND CULTURE
world. Possible topics or genres include: the
                                                             The study of important works and move-
German Novelle; modern German theatre; the
                                                          ments in modern German literature and culture.
fairy tale; German poetry. Prerequisite:
                                                          Reading selections may focus on a particular
GERM 222 or consent of instructor. May be
                                                          genre or they may be a combination of drama,
repeated for credit with consent of instructor.
                                                          poetry and prose. Possible topics include:
323                                                       Goethe, East and West Germany, the Weimar
SURVEY OF GERMAN                                          Republic. Prerequisite: One German 300 level
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION I                             course, or consent of instructor. May be
   Designed to acquaint the student with                  repeated for credit with consent of instructor.
important periods of German literature,
                                                          441
representative authors, and major cultural
                                                          CONTEMPORARY GERMAN
developments in Germany, Austria, and
                                                          LITERATURE
Switzerland. The course deals with literature
                                                             Representative poets, novelists and
and culture from the Early Middle Ages
                                                          dramatists of contemporary Germany, Swit-
through the 18th century. Prerequisite:
                                                          zerland and Austria covering the period from
GERM 222 or consent of instructor.
                                                          the 1960's to the present. Readings selected
325                                                       from writers such as: Böll, Brecht, Frisch,
SURVEY OF GERMAN                                          Dürrenmatt, Bichsel, Handke, Walser, Grass,
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION II                            Becker, and others. Prerequisite: GERM 323
   Designed to acquaint the student with                  or 325, or consent of instructor.
important periods of German literature,
                                                          470-479
representative authors, and major cultural
developments in Germany, Austria, and                     INTERNSHIP (See index)
Switzerland. The course deals with literature
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    114                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                  FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




N80-N89                                                Minor
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)                             A minor in Spanish consists of at least 16
   Examples of recent studies in German                semester hours of courses numbered 221 or
include Classicism, Germanic Mythology,                above. Courses 111 and 112 may be counted
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch and                toward the minor, but then the minor must
Dürrenmatt.                                            con-sist of at least 20 semester hours of
                                                       courses, 12 hours of which must be numbered
490-491
                                                       200 or above.
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                        101-102
                                                       ELEMENTARY SPANISH
GREEK (GRK) SEE RELIGION                                  The aim of this sequence of courses is to
HEBREW (HEBR) SEE RELIGION                             acquire the fundamentals of the language with
                                                       a view to using them. Regular practice in
SPANISH (SPAN)                                         speaking, understanding, and reading.
Major                                                  Prerequisite for 102: SPAN 101 or equiva-
    A major consists of 32 semester hours of           lent.
SPAN courses numbered 111 and above or
                                                       111-112
approved courses from a Study Abroad
                                                       INTERMEDIATE SPANISH
program. From courses numbered 315 or
                                                           This sequence of courses reviews and
higher, one course must focus on literature or
                                                       develops the fundamentals of the language for
culture from Spain and one course must focus
                                                       immediate use in speaking, understanding,
on literature or culture from Latin America.
                                                       reading and writing with a view to building
SPAN 315 and approved topics courses may
                                                       confidence in self-expression. Prerequisite
focus on Hispanic literatures with representa-
                                                       for 111: SPAN 102 or equivalent; for 112:
tive readings from both Spain and Latin
                                                       SPAN 111 or equivalent.
America. When this is the case, the course
may count toward either the Spanish or Latin           221-222
American requirement. Eight semester hours             CONVERSATION, REVIEW, AND
must be at the 400 level, not including 449.           COMPOSITION
Spanish majors must pass at least two semes-              Intensive discussion and writing on a
ters of FLL 449 and complete two of the                variety of subjects in conjunction with
additional requirements as explained under the         contemporary readings. Includes in-depth
Capstone Experience section. Recommended               grammar review. Designed to provide greater
course: HIST 120. Students who wish to be              breadth and fluency in spoken and written
certified for secondary teaching must complete         Spanish. Prerequisite for 221: SPAN 112 or
the major with at least a 3.00 GPA and pass            equivalent; for 222: SPAN 221.
SPAN 221, 222, 311, 418 and FLL 338 (the
                                                       311
latter two with a grade of B or better).
                                                       HISPANIC CULTURE
    The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                           To introduce students to Spanish-speaking
diversity requirement: SPAN 221, 222, and 311.
                                                       peoples—their values, customs and institu-
The following courses, when scheduled as W
                                                       tions, with reference to the geographic and
courses, count toward the writing intensive
                                                       historical forces governing present-day Spain
requirement: SPAN 323, 418, 424, and 426.
                                                       and Spanish America. Prerequisite: SPAN
                                                       222 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         115                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES




315                                                 and poetry, from the 16th century to the
INTRODUCTION TO HISPANIC                            present. Prerequisite: SPAN 222 or consent of
LITERATURES                                         instructor. Alternate years.
    Diverse readings in this course include         418
both Spanish and Latin American literatures         ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
designed to acquaint the student with signifi-           Intensive practice for advanced students
cant Hispanic authors and literary move-            who wish to improve their spoken and written
ments. The course deals with genre study,           Spanish. Includes work in oral comprehen-
literary terms in Spanish, literary concepts        sion, pronunciation, oral and written composi-
and forms, as well as the basic skills of           tion, and translation. Prerequisite: One SPAN
literary analysis. The course counts toward         course at the 300 level or consent of instruc-
the requirement in the major as either a            tor. Alternate years.
course in the literature of Spain or in the
                                                    424
literature of Latin America. Prerequisite:          SPANISH LITERATURE OF
SPAN 222 or consent of instructor.                  THE GOLDEN AGE
321                                                     A study of representative works and principal
SPECIAL TOPICS OR AUTHORS                           literary figures in the poetry, prose, and drama
IN LITERATURE                                       of the 16th and 17th centuries. Prerequisites:
    Examination of significant cultural or          SPAN 323 and 325, or consent of instructor.
literary topics concerning the Spanish-             426
speaking world. Possible topics or genres           SPECIAL TOPICS IN MODERN HISPANIC
include: Latin American short stories; modern       LITERATURE AND CULTURE
Spanish theatre; Latin American women writers;          Readings of important works in modern
Chicano literature. Prerequisite: SPAN 222          Spanish and/or Latin American literature.
or consent of the instructor. May be repeated       Reading selections may focus on a particular
for credit with consent of instructor.              genre or they may be a combination of drama,
                                                    poetry and prose. Possible topics include:
323                                                 Romanticism and realism in Spain and Latin
SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE                        America; the Modernist movement in Latin
AND CIVILIZATION                                    America; 20th century poetry; Lorca and the
   Designed to acquaint the student with            avant-garde; the Latin American novel; the
important periods of Spanish literature,            literature of post-Franco Spain. Prerequisites:
representative authors, and major socio-            two Spanish courses at the 300 level, or
economic developments. The course deals             consent of instructor. May be repeated for
with the literature from the Middle Ages to         credit with consent of instructor.
the present. Prerequisite: SPAN 222 or
                                                    470-479
consent of instructor. Alternate years.
                                                    INTERNSHIP (See index)
325
                                                    N80-N89
SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN                          INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION                            Recent studies include literary, linguistic,
    Designed to acquaint the student with           and cultural topics and themes such as urban
important periods of Spanish-American               problems as reflected in the modern novel.
literature, representative authors, and major
socio-economic developments. The course             490-491
deals with the literature, especially the essay     INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                    DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  116                       2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                             HISTORY




                                                     American Legal History. History majors are
                                                     encouraged to participate in the internship
                                                     program.
                                                        Students interested in teacher certification
                                                     should refer to the Department of Education
                                                     on page 99.
                                                        The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                     diversity requirement: HIST 120, 140, 220,
                                                     230 and 240. The following courses, when
                                                     scheduled as W courses, count toward the
                                                     writing intensive requirement: HIST 215,
                                                     218, 230, 247, 312, 328, 330, 332, 335, and
                                                     449.
                                                     Minor
                                                        Three minors are offered by the Department
                                                     of History. The following courses are required
                                                     to complete a minor in American history:
                                                     HIST 125, 126, and three courses in American
                                                     history numbered 200 and above (HIST 120
                                                     and/or 220 may be substituted.) A minor in
                                                     European history requires the completion of
HISTORY (HIST)                                       HIST 115, 116 and three courses in European
Professors: Larson (Chairperson), Morris,            history numbered 200 and above. To obtain a
  Piper                                              minor in History (without national or geo-
Associate Professor: Witwer                          graphical designation), a student must com-
Visiting Assistant Professor: Chandler               plete six courses in history, of which three
Visiting Instructor: Younger                         must be chosen from HIST 115, 116, 125, and
   A major consists of 10 courses, including         126 and three must be history courses num-
HIST 115, 116, and 449. At least seven courses       bered 200 and above.
must be taken in the department. The following       115
courses may be counted toward fulfilling the         WESTERN CIVILIZATION I
major requirements: AMST 200, ECON 236,                  A survey of the major developments in the
PSCI 221 and 439, REL 226 and 228. Other             history of Western Civilization from its roots
appropriate courses outside the department may       in the Ancient Near East to the era of the
be counted upon departmental approval. For           Renaissance. The course will consider the
history majors who student teach in history, the     political, social and cultural aspects of
major consists of nine courses. In addition to       Mesopotamia, Egypt, the ancient Hebrews,
the courses listed below, special courses, inde-     Greece, Rome, and Western Europe. Byzan-
pendent study, and honors are available.             tine and Islamic civilizations will be studied
Special courses recently taught and anticipated      to provide a wider scope for comparison.
include a biographical study of European
Monarchs, the European Left, the Industrializa-      116
tion and Urbanization of Modern Europe,              WESTERN CIVILIZATION II
Utopian Movements in America , the Peace                 A survey of the major developments in the
Movement in America, The Vietnam War, and            history of Western Civilization from the era
                                                     of the Renaissance to the present. The course
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                       117                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
HISTORY




will focus on the political, economic, social,      well as political and economic changes.
intellectual, and cultural aspects of European      Alternate years.
history and how Europe interacted with the          212
rest of the world.                                  MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND ITS NEIGHBORS
120                                                    The history of Europe from the dissolution of
LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY                              the Roman Empire to the mid-15th century. The
   An examination of the native civilization,       course will deal with the growing estrangement
the age of discovery and conquest, Spanish          of western Catholic Europe from Byzantium and
colonial policy, the independence movements,        Islam, culminating in the Crusades; the rise of
and the development of modern institutions          the Islamic Empire and its later fragmentation;
and governments in Latin America. Alternate         the development and growth of feudalism; the
years.                                              conflict of empire and papacy, and the rise of the
                                                    towns. Alternate years.
125
UNITED STATES HISTORY 1601-1877                     215
  A study of the people, measures, and              CONFLICT IN WESTERN CIVILIZATION
movements which have been significant in the           An in-depth study of the changing nature of
development of the United States between            war and its relationship to the development of
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the             Western Civilization since the end of the
problems of minority groups as well as to           Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be
majority and national influences.                   placed on the role of war in the development of
126                                                 the modern nation state and the origins and
UNITED STATES HISTORY 1877-                         nature of total war. Alternate years.
PRESENT                                             218
   A study of people, measures, and movements       EUROPE IN THE ERA OF THE WORLD WARS
which have been significant in the develop-            An intensive study of the political, economic,
ment of the United States since 1877. Atten-        social, and cultural history of Europe from
tion is paid to the problems of minority groups     1900-1945. Topics include the rise of irratio-
as well as to majority and national influences.     nalism, the origins of the First World War, the
140                                                 Communist and Fascist Revolutions, and the
SURVEY OF ASIAN HISTORY                             attempts to preserve peace before 1939.
    A comprehensive overview of Asian               Prerequisite: HIST 116 or consent of instruc-
history with emphasis on those Pacific Rim          tor. Alternate years.
countries which have greatest current impact        219
on political and economic development in the        CONTEMPORARY EUROPE
United States. Alternate Years.                        An intensive study of the political, eco-
210                                                 nomic, social, and cultural history of Europe
ANCIENT HISTORY                                     since 1945. Topics include the post-war
   A study of the ancient western world,            economic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization
including the foundations of the western            of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold War,
tradition in Greece, the emergence and              decolonization, and the flowering of the welfare
expansion of the Roman state, its experience        state. Prerequisite: HIST 116 or consent of
as a republic, and its transformation into the      instructor.
Empire. The course will focus on the social
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  118                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                 HISTORY




220                                                      234
WOMEN IN HISTORY                                         ORIGINS OF EUROPE
   An examination of the social, political,                  This course takes an in-depth look at the
economic and intellectual experience of                  formative period of European civilization
women in the Western World from ancient                  from the decline and fall of the Roman Empire
times to the present.                                    to the formation, around the year 1000, of
                                                         monarchies that resemble modern states.
226
                                                         Important issues covered include the develop-
COLONIAL AMERICA AND
                                                         ment and spread of early Christianity, the
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA
                                                         assumption of rule over Roman territory by
   The establishment of British settlements on
                                                         barbarians, and the blending of Roman,
the American continent, their history as
                                                         Christian, and Germanic barbarian traditions
colonies, the causes and events of the Ameri-
                                                         into one European civilization.
can Revolution, the critical period following
independence, and proposal and adoption of               236
the United States Constitution. Alternate                CRUSADES: CONFLICT AND
years.                                                   ACCOMMODATION
230                                                          An intensive consideration of interactions
AFRICAN AMERICAN HISTORY                                 between Muslims and Christians in the Middle
    A study of the experiences and participa-            Ages. Hostile and fruitful relations in Spain,
tion of African Americans in the United                  warfare in the Holy Land, and the status of
States. The course includes historical                   religious minorities will be studied. In
experiences such as slavery, abolition,                  addition to the often violent relations between
reconstruction, and urbanization. It also                these major religious groups, this course
raises the issue of the development and                  addresses their intellectual, artistic, and
growth of white racism, and the effect of this           literary developments as well as reciprocal
racism on contemporary Afro-American                     influences.
social, intellectual, and political life. Alter-         240
nate years.                                              MODERN CHINA
232                                                         This course will explore the social, political
THE RISE OF ISLAM                                        and cultural changes in China since the early
    A survey of the history of Islam in the              19th Century. Particular attention will be
Middle East, illuminating the foundation of              given to the Communist Revolution and the
the religion and its spread in the seventh and           developments in China since Mao’s death.
eighth centuries, the development of a high              Alternate years.
civilization thereafter, and the subsequent              247
changes in political and social structures over          ORGANIZED CRIME IN AMERICA
time. Muslim interactions with Christian and                A history of organized crime in America
Jews will be included, but the emphasis of the           from the Gilded Age to the present. This
course will be to understand the history of              course explores the rise of organized crime
Islamic civilization in its own right. The               and its ties to the urban political machines as
course ends with a consideration of recent               well as the segregated vice districts of Nine-
crises in the Middle East and their roots in             teenth Century America. Students study the
modern history.                                          rise of the Mafia in the Twentieth Century
                                                         along with other ethnically based criminal

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           119                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
HISTORY




groups. Much of the course centers on the            328
role that organized crime has played in              AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON
American society through such activities as              The theme of the course is the emergence
labor racketeering, organized gambling, and          of the political and social characteristics that
smuggling. The course also explores differ-          shaped modern America. The personalities of
ent law enforcement efforts mounted against          Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John
organized crime over time, culminating with          Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson
the most recent use of broad conspiracy laws.        receive special attention. Special consider-
Alternate years.                                     ation is given to the first and second party
                                                     systems, the decline in community cohesive-
312
                                                     ness, the westward movement, and the
THE MIDDLE AGES IN MODERN
                                                     growing importance of the family as a unit of
EYES
                                                     social organization. Prerequisite: HIST 125
    An in-depth study of medieval history by
                                                     or consent of instructor. Alternate years.
way of modern understandings of the period.
The course will focus on academic interpreta-        330
tions, but will also consider the Middle Ages in     FRENCH REVOLUTION AND NAPOLEON
the popular imaginations, such as in film.              An analysis of the political, social, and
Examination of the documents, literature, and        intellectual background of the French Revolu-
art of the period constitutes the second major       tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary
area of course assignments. Student work             development, and an estimate of the results of
culminates in a major research project based on      the Napoleonic conquests and administration.
the study of translated primary sources. Prereq-     Prerequisite: HIST 115 or consent of instruc-
uisite: HIST 115 or 212, or consent of instruc-      tor. Alternate years.
tor.                                                 332
320                                                  CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION
DIPLOMATIC HISTORY                                       The problems and events leading to war, the
OF EUROPE SINCE 1789                                 political and military history of the war, and the
   A survey of the development of the                bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 1877.
European-states system and the relations             335
between the European states since the                U.S. SINCE 1945
beginning of the French Revolution. Pre-                 A survey of the political, social, and
requisite: HIST 116 or consent of instructor.        intellectual developments in America in the
Alternate years.                                     years following World War II. The course
322                                                  reviews both foreign policy developments in
THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND                         those years and the various social movements
NATIONALISM: EUROPE 1848-1870                        that swept across the country, including civil
    An in-depth investigation of the crucial         rights, feminism, the counter-culture, and
“Middle Years” of 19th century Europe from           conservatism. Prerequisite: HIST 126 or
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica-         consent of instructor.
tion of Germany. The course centers on the           340
struggles for power within the major states of       20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of          RELIGION
nationalism was used to bring about one type            The study of historical and cultural
of solution. Alternate years.                        developments in American society which

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   120                       2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                   HISTORY • INSTITUTE FOR MANAGEMENT STUDIES AND MANAGEMENT SCHOLARS PROGRAM




relate to religion or what is commonly called
religion. This involves consideration of the
institutional and intellectual development of
several faith groups as well as discussion of
certain problems, such as the persistence of
religious bigotry and the changing modes of
church-state relationships. Alternate years.
416
HISTORY OF REFORMATION THOUGHT
    A study of the ideas and systems of ideas
propounded prior to the Reformation, but
which are historically related to its inception,
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in-
volved in the formulation of the major
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in the
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas
of the humanists of the Reformation Era.
Alternate years.
449
HISTORICAL METHODS
    This course focuses on the nature and
meaning of history. It will open to the student          INSTITUTE FOR
different historical approaches and will provide
the opportunity to explore these approaches in           MANAGEMENT
terms of particular topics and periods. Majors
are required to enroll in this course in either
                                                         STUDIES (IMS) AND
their junior or senior year. Prerequisite: One
course from HIST 328, 330, 335 or 416.
                                                         MANAGEMENT
470-479                                                  SCHOLARS
INTERNSHIP (See index)
   Typically, history interns work for local
                                                         PROGRAM
government agencies engaged in historical                Professor: Madresehee (Director)
projects or for the Lycoming County Histori-
                                                           The purpose of the Institute for Management
cal Museum.
                                                         Studies is to enhance the educational opportunities
N80-N89                                                  for students majoring or minoring in accounting,
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)                            business administration, or economics. It does this
    Recent topics include studies of the                 by offering an expanded internship program,
immigration of American blacks, political                special seminars on important management
dissension in the Weimer republic, Indian                topics, student involvement in faculty research
relations before the American Revolution, and            and professional projects, executive develop-
the history of Lycoming County.                          ment seminars, and a Management Scholars
                                                         program for academically talented students
490-491                                                  (described below). In addition, the IMS hosts
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                    guest speakers and conferences on current
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                          management issues.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           121                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
INSTITUTE FOR MANAGEMENT STUDIES AND MANAGEMENT SCHOLARS PROGRAM




    The IMS also offers an exchange program            although part-time and unpaid positions are
for business, accounting and economics                 occasionally accepted. Four to eight semester
students with the Westminster Business                 hours of credit. Prerequisite: Membership in
School (WBS) which is part of the University           the Institute for Management Studies and
of Westminster system located in London.               consent of the Director. May be repeated for
WBS is located in the heart of London on               a maximum of 16 credits.
Marylebone Road near Regents Park. Eligible
students who participate in the program will           349
spend one semester in London taking a full             EUROPEAN BUSINESS EXPERIENCE
schedule of classes in such areas as inter-                An extensive European business experi-
national business, management, accounting              ence based in London that will study how and
and economics. The credits received will then          why businesses go global with special
be transferred back to Lycoming College.               emphasis on financial, marketing and manage-
Eligible WBS students are also permitted to            ment issues. In addition, the course will
study at Lycoming College for one semester.            explore how local business culture affects the
   All students who have a declared major or           management of a company. The activities
minor in accounting, business administration,          include site visits to businesses, tours of
or economics and who are in good academic              financial institutions, lectures and assigned
standing are automatically members of the              cultural activities. Assessment will include
IMS. However, the IMS Director may invite or           preparatory reading before the start of class,
permit other students to join the IMS who do           written reports while in Europe and a final
not meet the first criterion, such as freshmen         project that will focus on a particular topic of
who have not yet declared a major or minor.            interest. Research for this project will be
                                                       conducted during the trip with the paper due
210                                                    after return. The class will take place in
MANAGEMENT SCHOLAR SEMINAR                             London with side trips to Oxford in the UK
    Team-taught interdisciplinary seminar              and Paris. After study in London, the course
under the direction of the IMS faculty. A              will feature an extended trip to another
different interdisciplinary topic relevant to          country such as Poland, Russia or Hungary.
students in all three IMS departments is
offered at least once a year. Completion of            IMS Scholars Program
two semesters required by the Management                   The IMS sponsors a Management Scholars
Scholars Program. One-quarter unit of                  Program for academically talented students in
credit. Prerequisite: Membership in the                the three IMS departments. To join the
Management Scholars Program or consent of              Management Scholars Program, a student
IMS Director. May be repeated for credit.              must satisfy the following criteria:
340                                                       a) Have a declared major or minor in one
MANAGEMENT INTERNSHIP STUDY                                  or more of the IMS departments.
    A practicum in which students work as                    However, the IMS Director may invite
interns for businesses, government agencies                  or permit other students to join the
and nonprofit organizations in the                           Management Scholars Program who
Williamsport area and locations in Pennsylva-                do not meet this criterion, such as
nia, New Jersey, New York, Washington,                       freshmen who have not yet declared a
D.C., and other places. Reading, writing and                 major or minor.
research assignments vary by the credit value             b) Have an overall GPA of 3.25 or higher,
of the experience. Enrollments are limited to                or exhibit strong academic potential if
the numbers of available placements. Most                    the student is a first-semester freshman.
internships are full-time paid positions,

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 122                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                         INSTITUTE FOR MANAGEMENT STUDIES • INTERNATIONAL STUDIES




To graduate as a Management Scholar, a
student must meet the following criteria:               INTERNATIONAL
   a) Successfully complete two semester-
      hours of Management Scholar Seminars.
                                                        STUDIES (INST)
   b) Successfully complete a major or minor            Professor: Larson (Coordinator)
      in one of the three IMS departments.                  The major is designed to integrate an
   c) Graduate with a GPA of 3.25 or higher             understanding of the changing social, politi-
      in both overall college work, and                 cal, and historical environment of Europe
      within an IMS major and/or minor.                 today with study of Europe in its relations to
   d) Successfully complete an appropriate              the rest of the world, particularly the United
      internship, practicum or independent              States. It stresses the international relations
      study, or complete a special project
                                                        of the North Atlantic community and offers
      approved by the IMS Director.
                                                        the student opportunity to emphasize either
    At least one Management Scholar Seminar             European studies or international relations.
is taught per academic year on an interdisci-           The program provides multiple perspectives
plinary topic of relevance to students in all           on the cultural traits that shape popular
three IMS departments. The seminars are                 attitudes and institutions. Study of a single
normally offered as one semester-hour                   country is included as a data-base for compari-
courses and do not result in overload charges           sons, and study of its language as a basis for
for full-time students.                                 direct communication with its people.
    Students who are currently Lycoming
College Scholars may also become Manage-
ment Scholars and participate in both programs.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          123                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
INTERNATIONAL STUDIES




    The program is intended to prepare a student       standing of the international system and of
either for graduate study or for careers which         Europe’s relations with the rest of the world.
have an international component. Interna-              PSCI 225 is required.
tional obligations are increasingly assumed by         PSCI 225     International Relations
government agencies and a wide range of                ECON 343     International Trade
business, social, religious, and educational           HIST 320     European Diplomatic History
organizations. Opportunities are found in the          PSCI 439     American Foreign Policy
fields of journalism, publishing, communica-
                                                       Area Courses - Four or two courses (if two,
tions, trade, bank-ing, advertising, manage-
                                                       then four must be taken from International
ment, and tourism. The program also offers
                                                       Relations Courses). Courses within this group
flexible career preparation in a variety of
                                                       are designed to provide a basic understanding
essential skills, such as research, data analysis,
                                                       of the European political, social, and economic
report writing, language skills, and the
                                                       environment. HIST 116 and ECON 240 are
awareness necessary for dealing with people
                                                       required.
and institutions of another culture. Prepara-
tion for related careers can be obtained               HIST 116 Western Civilization II
through the guided selection of courses                ECON 240 Economic Geography
outside the major in the areas of business,            PSCI 221      Comparative Politics and
economics, foreign languages and literatures,                        Geography
government, history, and international                 HIST 218 Europe in the Era of the
relations or through a second major. Students                        World Wars
should design their programs in consultation           HIST 219 Contemporary Europe
with members of the Committee on Interna-
                                                       National Courses
tional Studies.
                                                       Language - Two courses in one language.
   Students interested in teacher certification
should refer to the Department of Education            FRN 221, plus one course numbered 222
on page 99. By completing a major in the               or above (except 311)
foreign languages (five or more courses) and           GERM 221, plus one course numbered 222
the education program, students can be certified       or above
to teach that language.                                SPAN 221, plus one course numbered 222 or
    The International Studies program also             above (except 311)
encourages participation in study abroad
                                                       Country - One course. The student must
programs such as the affiliate programs in
                                                       select, according to his or her language
England, France and Spain on page 51, as well
                                                       preparation, one European country which will
as the Washington and United Nations
                                                       serve as a social interest area throughout the
semesters.
                                                       program. The country selected will serve as
    The following course, when scheduled as a
                                                       the base for individual projects in the major
W course, counts toward the writing intensive
                                                       courses wherever possible.
requirement: INST 449.
    The major consists of 11 courses including         France       FRN 311 Modern France
INST 449 plus the following:                           Germany      HIST N80 Topics in
                                                                             German History
International Relations Courses - Four or
                                                       Spain        SPAN 311 Hispanic Culture
two courses (if two, then four must be taken
from Area Courses). Courses within this
group are designed to provide a basic under-

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     124                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                      INTERNATIONAL STUDIES • LITERATURE




                                                         LITERATURE                        (LIT)
                                                             This major recognizes literature as a
                                                         distinct discipline beyond national boundaries
                                                         and combines the study of any two literatures
                                                         in the areas of English, French, German, and
                                                         Spanish. Students can thus explore two
                                                         literatures widely and intensively at the upper
                                                         levels of course offerings within each of the
                                                         respective departments while developing and
                                                         applying skills in foreign languages. The
                                                         major prepares students for graduate study in
                                                         either of the two literatures studied or in
                                                         comparative literature.
                                                             The major requires at least six literature
                                                         courses, equally divided between the two
                                                         literatures concerned. The six must be at the
                                                         advanced level as determined in consultation
                                                         with advisors (normally courses numbered 200
                                                         and above in English and 400 and above in
                                                         foreign languages). In general, two of
                                                         the advanced courses in each literature should
                                                         be period courses. The third course, taken
                                                         either as a regular course or an independent
                                                         study, may have as its subject another period, a
Elective Course - One course which should
                                                         particular author, genre, or literary theme, or
involve further study of some aspect of the
                                                         some other unifying approach or idea. Beyond
program. Appropriate courses are any area or
                                                         these six, the major must include at least two
international relations courses not yet taken;
                                                         additional courses from among those counting
HIST 115, 215; PSCI 327; related foreign
                                                         toward a major in the departments involved.
literature courses counting toward the fine arts
                                                         Any prerequisite courses in the respective
requirement and internships.
                                                         departments (for example: ENGL 106, FRN
449                                                      221-222 or 311, GERM 221-222, SPAN 221-
SENIOR SEMINAR                                           222) should be taken during the freshman year.
    A one-semester seminar, taken in the                 Students should design their programs in
senior year, in which students and several               consultation with a faculty member from each
faculty members will pursue an integrative               of the literatures concerned. Programs for the
topic in the field of international studies.             major must be approved by the departments
Students will work to some extent indepen-               involved.
dently. Guest speakers will be invited. The
seminar will be open to qualified persons from
outside the major and the College. Prerequi-
site: Consent of instructor.




2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           125                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




                                                 numbered 110 or above, Chemistry course
                                                 numbered 110 or above, Physics course
                                                 numbered 225 or above, or MATH 130, 214,
                                                 231, 233, 234, 238, 332, 333.
                                                    Students considering graduate work in
                                                 computer science should take MATH 128, 129
                                                 and 130. Recommended extra-departmental
                                                 course: PHIL 225. In addition to the regular
                                                 courses listed below, special courses are
                                                 occasionally available.
                                                    The following courses, when scheduled as W
                                                 courses, count toward the writing intensive
                                                 requirement: CPTR 246, 247, 346, and 448.
MATHEMATICAL                                     Minor
SCIENCES                                            A minor in computer science consists of
                                                 MATH 216, CPTR 125, 246, 247, and two other
Associate Professors: Haley,
                                                 computer science courses numbered 220 or above.
   Peluso (Chairperson), Sprechini
Assistant Professors: deSilva, Yin               101
Instructor: Pritchett                            MICROCOMPUTER FILE MANAGEMENT
Part-time Instructors: Abercrombie, Collins,         An introduction to a file-management
   Davis                                         system, i.e. a database system that uses a single
   The Department of Mathematical Sciences       file, in the Windows environment. One-half
offers major and minor programs in computer      unit of credit. This course may not be used to
science and mathematics.                         meet distribution requirements.
                                                108
COMPUTER SCIENCE                                COMPUTING ESSENTIALS
(CPTR)                                             An introduction to the use of computers in
The B. A. Degree                                problem solving and programming. Included
   The B.A. degree in computer science consists are uses of spreadsheets, databases, and
of 13 courses: MATH 216; either MATH 109 or programming. The course teaches the use of
128 (or exemption by examination from 128);     simple techniques in areas such as number
one from MATH 112, 129, or 130; CPTR 125,       theory, algebra, geometry, statistics, and the
246, 247, 248, 346, 445, 448, and three other   mathematics of business and finance. The
computer science courses numbered 220 or        programming component of the course is
above including approved internships, or
                                                currently based on the Visual Basic program-
MATH 338.
                                                ming language. Emphasis is given to the
The B.S. Degree                                 processes involved in mathematical modeling
   The B.S. degree in computer science consists and problem solving. Laboratory experience is
of 17 courses: MATH 128 (or exemption by        included using current software. Prerequisite:
examination from 128), 129, 216 and either      Credit for or exemption from MATH 100.
214 or 332; CPTR 125, 246, 247, 248, 346,
445, 448; three other computer science courses 125
numbered 220 or above; one of the sequences     INTRODUCTION TO
BIO 110-111, CHEM 110-111, or PHYS 225-         COMPUTER SCIENCE
226; and one additional course from the            Introduction to the discipline of computer
following list of courses: Biology course       science with emphasis on programming utili-
LYCOMING COLLEGE                               126                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                   MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




zing a block-structured high-level programming             324
language. Topics include algorithms, program               AUTOMATA, FORMAL LANGUAGES,
structure, and computer configuration. Labora-             AND COMPUTABILITY
tory experience is included. Prerequisite: Credit              The study of finite state machines, push-
for or exemption from MATH 100.                            down stacks, and Turing machines along with
246                                                        their equivalent formal language counterparts.
PRINCIPLES OF ADVANCED                                     Topics covered include results on computabil-
PROGRAMMING                                                ity, including results regarding the limits of
   Principles of effective programming,                    computers and specific problems that cannot be
including structured and object oriented                   solved. Prerequisite: MATH 216 or 234.
programming, stepwise refinement, assertion                Cross-listed as MATH 324. Alternate years.
proving, style, debugging, control structures,             331
decision tables, finite state machines, recur-             COMPUTER NETWORKS
sion, and encoding. Prerequisite: A grade of                  This course introduces the following
C- or better in CPTR 125.                                  computer networking concepts: LAN, WAN,
                                                           FTP, TCP/IP, HTTP, network topologies,
247
                                                           Ethernet, OSI model, routers, switches, and
DATA STRUCTURES
                                                           wiring technologies. Students will set up a
   Representation of data and analysis of
                                                           LAN using a mix of available operating systems
algorithms associated with data structures.
                                                           and networking software. Prerequisite: CPTR 246.
Topics include representation of lists, trees,
graphs and strings, algorithms for searching               342
and sorting. Prerequisite: A grade of C- or                WEB-BASED PROGRAMMING
better in CPTR 246, or consent of instructor.                 Intermediate programming on the World Wide
Corequisite: MATH 216.                                     Web. Topics covered include client/server issues
                                                           in Web publishing, Java Script, VB Script, Java,
248                                                        Perl, and CGI. Prerequisite: CPTR 246 or
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE DESIGN                                consent of instructor. Alternate years.
    Study of modern programming language
design and implementation. Paradigms studied               345
include procedural, functional, logic, and object-         INTRODUCTION TO
oriented. Topics include syntax, semantics, data           COMPUTER GRAPHICS
types, data structures, storage management,                   An introduction to graphics hardware and
and control structures. Laboratory experience              software with emphasis on the mathematics
is included. Prerequisite: CPTR 247.                       necessary to represent, transform, and display
                                                           images of two- and three-dimensional objects.
321                                                        Subjects covered include but not limited to:
INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL                                  three dimensional modeling and viewing, color
ANALYSIS                                                   models, and rendering. Prerequisites: CPTR 246
    Topics from the theory of interpolation;               and either CPTR 247 or consent of instructor;
numerical approaches to approximation of                   MATH 130 recommended. Alternate years.
roots and functions, integration, systems of
differen-tial equations, linear systems, matrix            346
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem.                     COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
Prerequisites: CPTR 125 and MATH 129;                      AND MACHINE LANGUAGE
MATH 130 strongly recommended. Cross-                          Principles of computer organization,
listed as MATH 321.                                        architecture, and machine language. Topics
                                                           include machine and assembly languages,
                                                           internal representation of data, processor data
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                             127                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




path and control, pipelined processors,                puter-based solution. Prerequisite: CPTR 247.
memory hierarchies, and performance issues.            Alternate years.
Laboratory experience is included. Pre-
                                                       470
requisite: A grade of C- or better in CPTR
                                                       INTERNSHIP (See index)
246; CPTR 247 strongly recommended.
                                                       N80-N89
349
                                                       INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
DATABASE SYSTEMS
   An in-depth introduction to the relational          490-491
database model and SQL. Topics include but             INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
are not limited to: relational algebra, relational     DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
calculus, normalization, design theory of
relational databases, SQL standards, and query         MATHEMATICS                     (MATH)
optimization. Prerequisite: CPTR 247.                     A major in mathematics consists of CPTR
Alternate years.                                       125, MATH 128 (or exemption by examina-
441                                                    tion from 128), 129, 130, 234, 238, 432, 434,
INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL                             and two other mathematics courses numbered
INTELLIGENCE                                           220 or above, one of which may be replaced
    Introduction to the theory, implementation         by MATH 112, 214 or 216. In addition, four
techniques, and applications of artificial             semesters of non-credit math Colloquium are
intelligence. Topics may include but are not           required: two semesters each of MATH 339
limited to knowledge representation, problem           and MATH 449 with at least two of the four
solving, modeling, robotics, natural language          semesters for a letter grade, one of which
analysis, and computer vision. Prerequisite:           must be in MATH 449. All majors are
CPTR 247. Alternate years.                             advised to elect PHIL 225, 333 and PHYS
442                                                    225, 226.
INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS                                   The following course, when scheduled as a
   Designing, building and programming                 W course, counts toward the writing intensive
mobile robots. Some advanced topics are                requirement: MATH 234.
covered which may include control theory,                  Students seeking secondary teacher
robotic paradigms, and vision. Teamwork is             certification in mathematics are required to
essential in all projects. Prerequisite: CPTR 247.     complete MATH 330 as one of the two
                                                       mathematics elective courses, and are also
445
OPERATING SYSTEMS                                      required to take a statistics course. The
    Detailed analysis of processes, scheduling,        statistics course requirement can be satisfied
multithreading, symmetric multiprocessing,             by either taking one of MATH 214 or 332 as
file management, real and virtual memory               the second mathematics elective course, or by
management, file and memory addressing, and            taking MATH 123 in addition to the second
distributed processing. Prerequisites: CPTR            mathematics elective course. PHIL 217 is
247 and 346.                                           recommended. See the Education section
448                                                    (page 99) for additional secondary certification
ADVANCED DESIGN AND                                    requirements.
DEVELOPMENT                                                Students who are interested in pursuing a
   Individual or group research and implementa-        career in actuarial science should consider the
tion projects. Includes analysis, design,              actuarial mathematics major.
development and documentation of a signifi-
cant current, relevant problem and its com-
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                     128                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




Minor                                                   112
   A minor in mathematics consists of MATH              FINITE MATHEMATICS
128 (or exemption by examination from 128),             FOR DECISION-MAKING
129, and either 216 or 234; 238; one additional           An introduction to some of the principal
course selected from 130, 214, or any course            mathematical models, not involving calculus,
numbered 200 or above; and two semesters of             which are used in business administration,
MATH 339, Colloquium, one taken Pass/Fail,              social sciences, and operations research. The
and one taken for a letter grade. The two               course will include both deterministic models
semesters of colloquium may be replaced by              such as graphs, networks, linear programming
any course numbered 220 or above.                       and voting models, and probabilistic models
                                                        such as Markov chains and games. Prerequi-
100                                                     site: Credit for or exemption from MATH 100.
INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA                            123
    A computer-based program of instruction             INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS
in basic algebra including arithmetic and                  Topics include tabular and graphical
decimals, fractions, the real number line,              descriptive statistics, discrete and continuous
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic            probability distributions, Central Limit
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic               Theorem, one- and two-sample hypotheses
functions, expressions with rational expo-              tests, analysis of variance, chisquared tests,
nents, algebraic functions, exponential                 nonparametric tests, linear regression and
functions, and inequalities. This course is             correlation. Other topics may include index
limited to students placed therein by the               numbers, time series, sampling design, and
Mathematics Department. One-half unit of                experimental design. Course also includes some
credit.                                                 use of a microcomputer. Prerequisite: Credit for
                                                        or exemption from MATH 100.
106
COMBINATORICS                                           127
   An introduction to the analysis of counting          PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS
problems. Topics include permutations,                     The study of polynomial, rational, exponen-
combinations, binomial coefficients, inclu-             tial, logarithmic, and trigonometric functions,
sion/exclusion principle, and partitions. The           their graphs and elementary properties. This
nature of the subject allows questions to be            course is an intensive preparation for students
posed in everyday language while still                  planning to take Calculus (MATH 128-129), or
developing sophisticated mathematical                   those whose major specifically requires
concepts. Prerequisite: Credit for or                   Precalculus. Prerequisite: Credit for or
exemption from MATH 100.                                exemption from MATH 100.
109                                                     128-129
APPLIED ELEMENTARY CALCULUS                             CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC
   An intuitive approach to the calculus                GEOMETRY I - II
concepts with applications to business,                    Differentiation and integration of algebraic
biology, and social-science problems. Not               and trigonometric functions, conic sections
open to students who have completed MATH                and their applications, graphing plane curves,
128. Prerequisite: Credit for or exemption              applications to related rate and external
from MATH 100.                                          problems, areas of plane regions, volumes of
                                                        solids of revolution, and other applications;
                                                        differentiation and integration of transcenden-

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          129                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




tal functions, parametric equations, polar          231
coordinates, infinite sequences and series, and     DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
series expansions of functions. Prerequisite           A study of ordinary differential equations
for 128: Exemption from or a grade of C- or         and linear systems. Solution techniques
better in MATH 127. Prerequisite for 129:           include: reduction of order, undetermined
exemption from or a grade of C- or better in        coefficients, variation of parameters, Laplace
MATH 128.                                           transforms, power series, and eigenvalues and
                                                    eigenvectors. A brief discussion of numerical
130
                                                    methods may also be included. Prerequisite: A
INTRODUCTION TO MATRIX ALGEBRA
                                                    grade of C- or better in MATH 129; MATH 130
    Systems of linear equations and matrix
                                                    recommended.
arithmetic. Points and hyperplanes, infinite
dimensional geometries. Bases and linear            233
independence. Matrix representations of             COMPLEX VARIABLES
linear mappings. The fixed point problem.              Complex numbers, analytic functions,
Special classes of matrices. Prerequisite:          complex integration, Cauchy’s theorems and
MATH 127 or its equivalent.                         their applications. Corequisite: MATH 238.
                                                    Alternate years.
214
MULTIVARIABLE STATISTICS                            234
    The study of statistical techniques involv-     FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS
ing several variables. Topics include multiple          Topics regularly included are the nature of
regression and correlation, one-and two-way         mathematical systems, essentials of logical
analysis of variance, analysis of covariance,       reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set
analysis of two- and three-way contingency          theory. Other topics frequently included are
tables, and discriminant analysis. Other topics     approaches to the concepts of infinity and
may include cluster analysis, factor analysis       continuity, and the construction of the real
and canonical correlations, repeated measure        number system. The course serves as a bridge
designs, time series analysis, and nonparamet-      from elementary calculus to advanced courses
ric methods. Course also includes extensive         in algebra and analysis. Prerequisite: A grade
use of a statistical package (currently BMDP).      of C- or better in MATH 129 or 130; both
Prerequisite: A grade of C- or better in            courses recommended.
MATH 123 or its equivalent, or a grade of C-        238
or better in any mathematics course num-            MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS
bered 129 or above.                                     Algebra, geometry, and calculus in multi-
 216                                                dimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples,
DISCRETE MATHEMATICS                                matrices; lines, planes, curves, surfaces; vector
    An introduction to discrete structures.         functions of a single variable, acceleration,
Topics include equivalence relations, parti-        curvature; functions for several variables,
tions and quotient sets, mathematical induc-        gradient; line integrals, vector fields, multiple
tion, recursive functions, elementary logic,        integrals, change of variable, areas, volumes;
discrete number systems, elementary combina-        Green’s theorem. Prerequisites: A grade of
torial theory, and general algebraic structures     C- or better in MATH 129, and either MATH
emphasizing semi-groups, lattices, Boolean          130 or 231.
algebras, graphs, and trees. Prerequisite:
CPTR 125 or consent of instructor.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  130                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                  MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES




321                                                      400
INTRODUCTION TO                                          TOPICS IN ACTUARIAL MATHEMATICS
NUMERICAL ANALYSIS                                           Study of topics selected from those
   Topics from the theory of interpolation;              covered on the examinations administered by
numerical approaches to approximating roots              the Society of Actuaries, with the exception
and functions, integration, systems of differen-         of the topics already covered in MATH 332-
tial equations, linear systems, matrix inver-            333. Prerequisite: A grade of C- or better in
sion, and the eigenvalue problem. Prerequi-              both MATH 129 and 130. With consent of the
sites: CPTR 125 and MATH 129; MATH 130                   instructor, this course may be repeated for
strongly recommended. Cross-listed as CPTR               credit.
321.
                                                         432
324                                                      REAL ANALYSIS
AUTOMATA, FORMAL LANGUAGES,                                  An introduction to the rigorous analysis of
AND COMPUTABILITY                                        the concepts of real variable calculus in the
    The study of finite state machines, push-            setting of normed spaces. Topics from: topology of
down stacks, and Turing machines along with              the Euclidean plane, completeness, compact-
their equivalent formal language counterparts.           ness, the Heine-Borel theorem; functions on
Topics covered include results on computabil-            Euclidean space, continuity, uniform continu-
ity, including results regarding the limits of           ity, differentiability; series and convergence;
computers and specific problems that cannot              Riemann integral. Prerequisites: MATH 238
be solved. Prerequisite: MATH 216 or 234.                and a grade of C- or better in MATH 234.
Cross-listed as CPTR 324. Alternate years.
                                                         434
330                                                      ABSTRACT ALGEBRA
TOPICS IN GEOMETRY                                           An integrated approach to groups, rings,
   An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean                   fields, and vector spaces and functions which
geometry with an historical perspective.                 preserve their structure. Prerequisites: MATH
Prerequisite: MATH 234. Alternate years.                 130 and a grade of C- or better in MATH 234.
332-333                                                  438
MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II                             SEMINAR
    A study of probability, discrete and                     Topics in modern mathematics of current
continuous random variables, expected values
                                                         interest to the instructor. A different topic is
and moments, sampling, point estimation,
                                                         selected each semester. This semester is
sampling distributions, interval estimation,
                                                         designed to provide junior and senior mathe-
test of hypotheses, regression and linear
                                                         matics majors and other qualified students with
hypotheses, experimental design models.
                                                         more than the usual opportunity for concen-
Corequisite: MATH 238. Alternate years.
                                                         trated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequisite:
338                                                      Consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit.
OPERATIONS RESEARCH                                      This course may be repeated for credit.
    Queuing theory, including simulations
techniques, optimization theory, including               339 & 449
linear programming, integer programming,                 MATH COLLOQUIUM
and dynamic programming; game theory,                       This required non-credit course for math-
including two-person zero-sum games, coopera-            ematics majors and minors and actuarial
tive games, and multiperson games. Prerequi-             mathematics majors offers students a chance
site: MATH 112 or 130. Alternate years.                  to hear presentations on topics related to, but


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           131                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES • MILITARY SCIENCE




not directly covered in formal MATH
courses. Mathematics majors present two                 MILITARY
lectures, one during the junior year and one
during the senior year. Actuarial mathematics
                                                        SCIENCE (MLSC)
majors and mathematics minors present one                  The U.S. Army Reserve Officer Training
lecture during one of the semesters in which            Corps (ROTC) program is offered to Lycom-
they are enrolled. A letter grade will be given         ing College students in cooperation with
in semesters in which the student gives a               Bucknell University. Details of the ROTC
presentation, otherwise the grade will be P/F.          program can be found on page 42.
Prerequisite: Junior standing or consent of                The following courses may be used to
instructor. One hour per week.                          fulfill one semester of the Physical Activities
                                                        Distribution Requirement: 011, 021, 031 or
470-479
                                                        041.
INTERNSHIP (See index)
                                                        011
N80-N89
                                                        INTRODUCTION TO ROTC
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
                                                            The course is designed to acquaint the
490-491                                                 student with the ROTC program and with the
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR                                   Army as a potential employer after gradu-
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)                         ation. Students will learn about the Army’s
                                                        history, organization, equipment, and role in
                                                        the nation. Students will also learn some
                                                        fundamental military skills, customs, and
                                                        traditions. No credit.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  132                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                       MILITARY SCIENCE




                                                       menting decisions, motivation and supervision.
                                                       The course also includes instruction and
                                                       practice on conducting performance-oriented
                                                       training. No credit.
                                                       031
                                                       APPLIED LEADERSHIP
                                                           The student serves as a small unit leader in
                                                       the ROTC organization. Student leadership is
                                                       evaluated and developed. The student has
                                                       some responsibilities to care for and train
                                                       younger cadets. Instruction on small (infan-
                                                       try) unit tactics is used as a vehicle to provide
                                                       students a variety of leadership challenges.
                                                       No credit.
                                                       032
                                                       SMALL UNIT TACTICS
                                                          The course requires planning and practic-
                                                       ing tactical operations at small unit level.
                                                       Students continue to apply/develop leadership
                                                       skills in increasingly complex situations.
                                                       Topics include preparation of orders, offense,
012                                                    defense, reconnaissance, patrolling, fire
INDIVIDUAL MILITARY SKILLS                             support, and airmobile operations. No credit.
    The course expands upon the skills learned         041
in the previous semester. Several classes will         MENTORING AND MANAGING
be held at the rifle range to develop marks-              The student serves as a cadet officer in the
manship skills. There will also be training in         ROTC organization and plans and organizes
radio communication and first aid skills. No           several major training activities. Course work
credit.                                                includes delegating and controlling, setting
021                                                    objectives, making leadership assessments,
LAND NAVIGATION                                        counseling, supervising, and evaluating. No
   Students will learn how to use military             credit.
topographic maps and reference systems. The
                                                       042
course includes theory and practical exercises
                                                       PROFESSIONALISM AND ETHICS
in navigating using compass, map terrain
                                                           The student serves in a different leadership
association. There will also be some instruc-
                                                       position and continues to develop and apply
tion and practice in military writing and
                                                       the skills learned in the previous semester.
briefing skills. No credit.
                                                       The course also examines military officership
022                                                    as a profession and the ethical behavior
LEADERSHIP THEORY                                      expected of an officer. The course also serves
   The focus is on leading a small group of            to prepare the student for an initial assignment
individuals. The course examines the role of           as an Army lieutenant. No credit.
the leader, military leadership concept,
personal character, decision-making, imple-

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         133                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
MUSIC




MUSIC (MUS)
Professors: Boerckel (Chairperson), Thayer
Visiting Instructor: Woodruff
Part-time Instructors: Adams, Anstey, Becker,
   Breon, Campbell, Gilbert, Hickey, Lakey,
   Leidhecker, Lundquist, Mianulli,
   Rammon, Savoy, Schmidt
    The student majoring in music is required
to take a balanced program of music theory,
history, applied music, and ensemble. A
minimum of eight courses (exclusive of all
ensemble, applied music and instrumental and
vocal methods courses) is required and must
include MUS 110, 111, 220, 221, 335, and
336. Each major must participate in an
ensemble (MUS 167, 168, and/or 169) and
take one hour of applied music per week for a
minimum of four semesters including the
entire period in which the individual is
registered as a music major (see MUS 160-
169). The major must include at least one-half
hour of piano in the applied program unless a
piano proficiency test is requested and passed.
Anyone declaring music as a second major
must do so by the beginning of the junior year.              The following courses satisfy the cultural
    Music majors seeking teacher certification           diversity requirement: MUS 116, 128, and
in music education (K-12) must also take PSY             234. The following course, when scheduled
110 and 138; EDUC 200, 239, the pre-student              as a W course, counts toward the writing
teaching participation, and the Professional             intensive requirement: MUS 336.
Semester; MUS 261-7, 333, 334, 340, 341,
446, and pass the piano proficiency examina-             110-111
tion. Students who wish to obtain certification          MUSIC THEORY I AND II
in music education should consult with the                  A two-semester course, intended for students
department as soon as possible, preferably               who have some music-reading ability, which
before scheduling classes for the freshman year.         examines the fundamental components and
   The Music Department recommends that                  theoretical concepts of music. Students develop
non-majors select courses from the following             musicianship through application of applied
list to meet distribution requirements: MUS              skills. Prerequisite to MUS 111: MUS 110.
116, 117, 128, 135-138, 224, and 234. Applied            116
music and ensemble courses may also be used              INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC
to meet distribution requirements.
                                                            A basic course in the materials and tech-
    Student recitals offer opportunities to gain
                                                         niques of music. Examples drawn from various
experience in public performance. Music
                                                         periods of western and non-western styles are
majors and other students qualified in perfor-
                                                         designed to enhance perception and apprecia-
mance may present formal recitals.
                                                         tion through careful and informed listening.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   134                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                     MUSIC




117                                                      to students who have received credit for
SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC                                  THEA 138. Cross-listed as THEA 138.
   A chronological survey of music in
                                                         220-221
Western civilization from Middle Ages to the
                                                         MUSIC THEORY III AND IV
present. Composers and musical styles are
                                                            A continuation of the integrated theory
considered in the context of the broader
                                                         course moving toward newer uses of music
culture of each major era.
                                                         materials. Prerequisite: MUS 111.
128
AMERICAN MUSIC                                           224
   An introductory survey of all types of                ELECTRONIC MUSIC I
American music from pre-Revolutionary days to                A non-technical introduction to electronic
the present. Categories to be covered are folk           music and MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital
music of different origins, the development of           Interface) for the major and non-major alike.
                                                         The course traces the development of MIDI
show music into Broadway musicals, serious
                                                         from its origin to present-day digital synthesiz-
concert music for large and small ensembles,
                                                         ers in combination with sequencing computers.
jazz, and various popular musics from “Tin Pan
Alley” to Rock to New Wave. Alternate years.             225
135-136                                                  ELECTRONIC MUSIC II
INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II                               Further consideration of recording tech-
   An introduction to the techniques of basic            niques. Use of microphones, multi-track
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz,             recording, mixing, special effects devices, and
and modern dance. Classes include improvisa-             synchronization will be introduced. Students
tion and choreography. Prerequisite for MUS              will take part in live recording of concerts and
136: MUS 135 or consent of instructor. One-              rehearsals of a variety of ensembles. Student
half unit of credit each. Not open to students           projects will include complete recording
who have received credit for THEA 135-136 or             sessions and the production of electronic
THEA 235-236. Cross-listed as THEA 135-                  music compositions utilizing classical studio
136.                                                     techniques and real-time networks. Prerequi-
                                                         site: MUS 224 or consent of instructor.
137
HISTORY OF THE DANCE I                                   234
   A survey of classical ballet from the Ballets         HISTORY OF JAZZ
de cour of 17th century France to the present               A survey of jazz styles, composers, and
with emphasis on the contributions of Petipa,            performers from 1890 to the present: origins,
Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balanchine. One-half              ragtime, blues, New Orleans, Chicago, swing,
unit of credit. Not open to students who have            bebop, cool, funky, free jazz, third stream, and
received credit for THEA 137. Cross-listed as            contemporary.
THEA 137.                                                235-236
138                                                      INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II
HISTORY OF THE DANCE II                                     Studies of the techniques of basic move-
   A survey of the forms of dance, excluding             ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz and
classical ballet, as independent works of art            modern dance at the intermediate level.
and as they have reflected the history of                Classes include improvisation and choreogra-
civilization. One-half unit of credit. Not open          phy. Prerequisite for MUS 235: MUS 136 or
                                                         consent of instructor. Prerequisite for MUS

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           135                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
MUSIC




236: MUS 235 or consent of instructor. One-          336
half unit of credit each. Not open to students       HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II
who have received credit for THEA 135-136 or             The development of musical styles and
THEA 235-236. Cross-listed as THEA 235-              forms from Beethoven to the present, includ-
236.                                                 ing composers from the late classical, roman-
                                                     tic, and modern eras.
330
COMPOSITION I                                        339
    An introductory course for majors and            ORCHESTRATION
non-majors who wish to explore their                     A study of modern orchestral instruments
composing abilities. Guided individual               and examination of their use by the great
projects in smaller instrumental and vocal           masters with practical problems in instrumen-
forms, together with identification and use of       tation. The College Music Organizations
techniques employed by the major composers           serve to make performance experience
of the 20th century. Prerequisite: MUS 111 or        possible. Prerequisites: MUS 110-111 or
consent of instructor.                               consent of instructor. Alternate years.

333                                                  340
CHORAL CONDUCTING                                    TEACHING MUSIC IN THE
    A study of choral conducting with frequent       ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
opportunity for practical experience. Empha-             Methods and materials of teaching music in
sis will be placed upon technical development,       the elementary school with emphasis on con-
rehearsal technique, and stylistic integrity.        ceptual development through singing, moving,
Prerequisites: MUS 110-111 or consent of             listening, playing classroom instruments, and
instructor. Alternate years.                         creating music. Course work will include peer
                                                     teaching demonstrations, practical use of the
334                                                  recorder and autoharp, as well as observation
INSTRUMENTAL CONDUCTING                              of music classes in elementary schools in the
   A study of instrumental conducting with an        Greater Williamsport area. Alternate years.
emphasis on acquiring skills for self-analysis.
Topics include the physical skills and intellec-     341
tual preparation necessary for clear, expres-        TEACHING MUSIC IN SECONDARY
sive, and informed conducting. Other areas           SCHOOLS
such as the development of rehearsal tech-              Methods and materials of teaching music in
niques and improvement of aural skills will be       the secondary schools with emphasis on the
addressed on a continual basis. Prerequisites:       development of concepts and skills for
MUS 110-111 or consent of instructor.                effective instruction in all aspects of music
Alternate years.                                     learning. The teaching of general music and
                                                     music theory, as well as the organizing and
335                                                  conducting of choral and instrumental en-
HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I                           sembles, will be examined. Course work will
   The development of musical styles and             include evaluation of instructional and
forms from Gregorian chant through Mozart,           performance materials, practical use of the
                                                     recorder and guitar in middle school settings,
including composers from the medieval,
                                                     as well as observation of music classes in
Renaissance, baroque, and early classical eras.
                                                     secondary schools in the Greater Williamsport
                                                     area. Alternate years.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   136                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                   MUSIC




440                                                     Student recitals offer opportunities to gain
COMPOSITION II                                          experience in public performance.
    For students interested in intensive work           Credit for applied music courses (private
emphasizing the development of a personal               lessons) and ensemble (choir, orchestra and
style of composing. Guided individual                   band) is earned on a fractional basis. One hour
projects in larger instrumental and vocal               lesson per week earns one hour credit. One
forms, together with analysis of selected               half- hour lesson per week earns one half-hour
works from the 20th century repertory. Pre-             credit. Ensemble credit totals one hour credit if
requisite: MUS 330 or consent of instructor.            the student enrolls for one or two ensembles
                                                        (for more information, see course descriptions
445                                                     below). When scheduling please note that an
SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC                                 applied course or ensemble should not be
    The intensive study of a selected area of           substituted for an academic course, but should
music literature, designed to develop research          be taken in addition to the normal four aca-
techniques in music. The topic is announced             demic courses.
at the Spring pre-registration. Sample topics               Applied music courses are private lessons
include: Beethoven, Impressionism, Vienna               given for 13 weeks: 160, Piano or Harpsi-
1900-1914. Prerequisite: MUS 116, 117 or                chord; 161, Voice; 162, Strings or Guitar; 163,
221; or consent of instructor.                          Organ; 164, Brass; 165, Woodwinds; and 166,
                                                        Percussion. Extra fees apply. See Additional
446                                                     Charges under Financial Matters on page 13.
RECITAL
    The preparation and presentation of a full-         167
length public recital, normally during the              ORCHESTRA
student’s senior year. MUS 446 may substi-                  The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra
tute for one hour of applied music (MUS 160-            allows students with significant instrumental
166). Prerequisite: Approval by the depart-             experience to become members of this
ment. May be repeated for credit.                       regional ensemble. Participation in the W.S.O.
                                                        is contingent upon audition and the availabil-
470-479                                                 ity of openings. Students are allowed a
INTERNSHIP (See index)                                  maximum of one hour of Ensemble credit per
N80-N89                                                 semester. A student who is enrolled in
INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)                           orchestra only should register for MUS 167B
                                                        (one hour credit). A student may belong to
490-491
                                                        two ensembles, choosing either Choir or
INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                        Concert Band as the second group. Such a
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
                                                        student will then register for MUS 167A (1/2
                                                        hour credit) plus either MUS 168A (1/2 hour
APPLIED MUSIC                                           credit) or MUS 169A (1/2 hour credit).
AND ENSEMBLE
  The study of performance in piano, harpsi-            168
chord, voice, organ, strings, guitar, brass,            CHOIR
woodwinds, and percussion is designed to                   The Lycoming College Choir is open to all
develop sound technique and a knowledge of              students who would like to sing in an en-
the appropriate literature for the instrument.          semble setting. Emphasis is on performing
                                                        quality choral literature while developing

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          137                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
MUSIC




good vocal technique. Students are allowed a       choosing either Orchestra or Choir as the
maximum of one hour of Ensemble credit per         second group. Such a student will then
semester. A student who is enrolled in Choir       register for MUS 169A (1/2 hour credit) plus
only should register for MUS 168B (one hour        either MUS 167A ( 1/2 hour credit) or MUS
credit). A student may belong to two different     168A (1/2 hour credit). If a student has
ensembles, choosing either Orchestra or Band       auditioned and been selected for the wood-
as the second ensemble. Such a student will        wind or brass quintets (no credit available),
then register for MUS 168A (1/2 hour credit)       he/she should register for MUS 169C or
plus either MUS 167A (Orchestra - 1/2 hour         169D.
credit) or MUS 169A (Band - 1/2 hour
credit). If a student has auditioned and been      261-267
selected for the Chamber Choir (no credit          INSTRUMENTAL AND VOCAL
available), he/she should register for MUS         METHODS
168C in addition to registering for the               Instrumental and vocal methods classes
Lycoming College Choir.                            are designed to provide students seeking
                                                   certification in music education with a basic
169                                                understanding of all standard band and
BAND                                               orchestral instruments as well as a familiarity
   The College Concert Band allows students        with fundamental techniques of singing.
with some instrumental experience to become        MUS 261     Brass Methods
acquainted with good band literature and                       (one hour credit)
develop personal musicianship through              MUS 262     Percussion Methods
participation in group instrumental activity.                  (one hour credit)
Participation in the Band is contingent upon       MUS 263, 264String Methods I and II
audition. Students are allowed a maximum of                    (one hour credit each)
one hour of Ensemble credit per semester. A        MUS 265     Vocal Methods
student who is enrolled in Band only should                    (one hour credit)
register for MUS 169B (one hour credit). A         MUS 266, 267Woodwind Methods I and II
student may belong to two ensembles,                           (one hour credit each)




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 138                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                           PHILOSOPHY




PHILOSOPHY                        (PHIL)
                                                       who demonstrate strong competence on a
                                                       departmental logic test may substitute an
Professors: Griffith, Whelan                           additional 300-level course for PHIL 225.
Assistant Professor: Herring (Chairperson)                The following courses, when scheduled as
Part-time Instructor: Chappen                          W courses, count toward the writing intensive
                                                       requirement: PHIL 216, 217, 218, 219, 301,
   The study of philosophy develops a critical         332, 333, 334, 335, 336, 340.
understanding of the basic concepts and                   Students interested in teacher certification
presuppositions around which we organize our           should refer to the Department of Education
thought in morality, law, religion, science,           on page 99.
education, the arts and other human endeavors.
A major in philosophy, together with other             Minors
appropriate courses, can provide an excellent             The Philosophy Department offers four
preparation for policy-making positions of             minors: (1) Philosophy—any four philosophy
many kinds, for graduate study in several              courses numbered 220 or above, or any five
fields, and for careers in education, law, and         philosophy courses that include three num-
the ministry.                                          bered 220 or above. (2) Philosophy and
  The major in philosophy requires eight               Law—four courses from PHIL 224, 225, 334,
courses, including PHIL 223, 224, 225, 440,            335, 336, 337, 340, and independent studies.
and at least three others numbered 300 or              (3) Philosophy & Science—four courses form
above. PHIL 340 can be counted toward the              PHIL 223, 225, 333, 340, and independent
major only once except with departmental               studies. (4) Ethics—four courses from PHIL
approval. With permission of the department,           224, 335, 336, 340, and independent studies;
PHIL 105 and an additional 300-level course            one of these may be replaced by two from
may be substituted for PHIL 225. Majors                114, 115, 216, 219. Since topics in PHIL 340

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         139                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
PHILOSOPHY




and independent studies vary, these courses           body, the nature and limits of human knowl-
may count toward a minor only if they are             edge, arguments about the existence of God,
approved by the department.                           and the problem of personal identity. Not
                                                      open to juniors and seniors except with
105
                                                      consent of instructor.
PRINCIPLES OF CRITICAL THINKING
    An introduction to the elements of critical       215
thinking centered on developing the skills            PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN
necessary to recognize, describe, and evaluate        COMMUNICATION
arguments. Not open to juniors and seniors               An introduction to the foundations of
except with consent of instructor.                    communication. Theories of truth and meaning
                                                      are illustrated by means of practical examples,
114
                                                      with special attention given to the issue of
PHILOSOPHY AND PERSONAL CHOICE
                                                      objectivity and bias in communication.
    An introductory philosophical examination
of a number of contemporary moral issues              216
which call for personal decision. Topics often        PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS
investigated include: the “good” life, obliga-           A systematic and philosophically informed
tion to others, sexual ethics, abortion, suicide      consideration of some typical moral problems
and death, violence and pacifism, obedience to        faced by individuals in a business setting, and
the law, the relevance of personal beliefs to         a philosophical examination of some common
morality. Discussion centers on some of the           moral criticisms of the American business system.
suggestions philosophers have made about
                                                      217
how to make such decisions. Not open to
                                                      PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN EDUCATION
juniors and seniors except with consent of
                                                         An examination of the basic concepts
instructor.
                                                      involved in thought about education, and a
115                                                   consideration of the various methods for
PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY                          justifying educational proposals. Typical of
    An introductory philosophical examination         the issues discussed are: Are education and
of the moral and conceptual dimensions of             indoctrination different? What is a liberal
various contemporary public issues, such as           education? Are education and schooling
the relation of ethics to politics and the law,       compatible? What do we need to learn?
the enforcement of morals, the problems of fair       Alternate years.
distribution of goods and opportunities, the
                                                      218
legitimacy of restricting the use of natural
                                                      PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN
resources, and the application of ethics to busi-
                                                      CRIMINAL JUSTICE
ness practice. Discussion centers on some of
                                                         A philosophical examination of some
the suggestions philosophers have made about
                                                      important controversies which arise in
how to deal with these issues. Not open to
                                                      connection with the American criminal justice
juniors and seniors except with consent of
                                                      system. Typically included are controversies
instructor.
                                                      about the nature and purpose of punishment,
140                                                   the proper basis for sentencing, the correct
CENTRAL PROBLEMS IN PHILOSOPHY                        understanding of criminal responsibility, and
   A study of several central philosophical           the rationale and extent of our basic human
problems, such as the problem of free will and        rights with respect to the criminal law.
determinism, the relationship between mind and

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    140                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                             PHILOSOPHY




219                                                     301
PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES                                    ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY
IN HEALTH CARE                                             A critical examination of the ancient Greek
    An investigation of some of the philosophi-         philosophers, with particular emphasis on
cal issues which arise in therapy and in health         Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: Students
research and planning. Topics typically                 without previous study in philosophy must
include euthanasia, confidentiality, informed           have consent of instructor. Alternate years.
consent, behavior control, experimentation on
humans and animals, abortion, genetic                   332
engineering, population control, and distribu-          PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION
tion of health care resources.                              A philosophical examination of religion.
                                                        Included are such topics as the nature of reli-
223                                                     gious discourse, arguments for and against the
HISTORY OF SCIENCE                                      existence of God, and the relation between
AND METAPHYSICS                                         reli-gion and science. Readings from
    An historical survey of the attempt to              classical and contemporary sources. Pre-
understand the physical universe. Particular            requisite: Students without previous study in
attention is paid to common origins of                  philosophy must have consent of instructor.
philosophy and science in the works of the              Alternate years.
ancient Greek philosophers, to the question of
how scientific and philosophical thinking               333
differs from mythological and technological             PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE
thinking, to the rationalism-empiricism                     A consideration of philosophically impor-
dispute in science and metaphysics, and to the          tant conceptual problems arising from
interaction between philosophy and science in           reflection about natural science, including
formulating fundamental questions about the             such topics as the nature of scientific laws and
physical universe and in developing and                 theories, the character of explanation, the
criticizing concepts designed to answer them.           importance of prediction, the existence of
                                                        “non-observable” theoretical entities such as
224                                                     electrons and genes, the problem of justifying
HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND                                   induction, and various puzzles associated with
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY                                    probability. Prerequisite: Students without
   An historical survey of the most important           previous study in philosophy must have
social and political philosophers from                  consent of instructor. Alternate years.
Socrates to Marx. Special attention is paid to
the relationship between ethics and politics as         334
seen by Plato and Aristotle and to the social           CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL
contract theories of Hobbes, Locke, and                 PHILOSOPHY
Rousseau.                                                  A close reading of four or five defining
                                                        works of contemporary political philosophy,
225                                                     beginning with the work of John Rawls.
SYMBOLIC LOGIC                                          Prerequisite: Students without previous study
   A study of modern symbolic logic and its             in philosophy must have consent of instructor.
application to the analysis of arguments.               Alternate years.
Included are truth-functional relations, the
logic of propositional functions, and deductive         335
systems. Attention is also given to                     ETHICAL THEORY
various topics in the philosophy of logic.                 An inquiry about the grounds for distin-
Alternate years.                                        guishing morally right from morally wrong

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          141                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
PHILOSOPHY




actions. Central to this course is critical               without previous study in philosophy must
consideration of important theories, such as              have consent of instructor. Alternate years.
relativism, utilitarianism, and subjectivism, as
well as historically important theorists, such as         340
Aristotle, Mill, and Kant. Prerequisite:                  SPECIAL TOPICS
Students without previous study in philosophy                 Study of selected philosophical problems,
must have consent of instructor. Alternate                texts, writers, or movements. Recent topics
years.                                                    include ethical obligations to animals, lying
                                                          and lawbreaking, environmental ethics,
336                                                       research on human subjects, and artificial
CONTEMPORARY MORAL PHILOSOPHY                             intelligence. Students without previous study
   A close reading of four or five centrally              in philosophy must have consent of instructor.
important works of contemporary moral                     With consent of the instructor, this course may
philosophy. Prerequisite: Students without                be repeated for credit.
previous study in philosophy must have
consent of instructor. Alternate years.                   440
                                                          PHILOSOPHICAL RESEARCH
337                                                       AND WRITING
PHILOSOPHY OF LAW                                            In-depth instruction in both the indepen-
   An introduction to the philosophy of law               dent and the cooperative aspects of philo-
using both classical and contemporary                     sophical research and writing. Each student
sources. General theories concerning the                  undertakes an approved research project and
nature of law, as well as philosophical issues            produces a substantial philosophical paper.
which arise primarily within a legal context,             Open only to, and required of, senior philoso-
will be discussed. Prerequisite: Students                 phy majors.
                                                          470-479
                                                          INTERNSHIP (See index)
                                                          N80-N89
                                                          INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
                                                             Recent independent studies in philosophy
                                                          include Nietzsche, moral education, Rawls’
                                                          theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia,
                                                          Plato’s ethics, and philosophical aesthetics.
                                                          490-491
                                                          INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                          DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)

                                                          PHYSICS
                                                          (See Astronomy/Physics)




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    142                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                   PHYSICAL EDUCATION




                                                       102
PHYSICAL                                               PHYSICAL EDUCATION ACTIVITIES
EDUCATION                                                  This topics course satisfies one-half
                                                       semester of physical education. Coeduca-
Instructor: Holmes (Chairperson)
                                                       tional classes meet twice a week with basic
Part-time Instructor: Dill
                                                       instruction in fundamentals, knowledge, and
PHYSICAL ACTIVITIES,                                   appreciation of various sports. Emphasis is
WELLNESS, AND COMMUNITY                                on the potential use of activities as recre-
SERVICE                                                ational and leisure time interests. No credit.
   This program is designed to promote
                                                       105
students’ physical welfare, health awareness,
                                                       PHYSICAL EDUCATION ACTIVITIES
and encourage a sense of civic responsibility.
                                                          This topics course satisfies one semester of
Students must successfully complete any
                                                       physical education. Coeducational classes
combination of two semesters of course work
                                                       meet twice a week with basic instruction in
selected from the following:
                                                       fundamentals, knowledge, and appreciation of
1. Designated Physical Activities courses,
                                                       various sports. Emphasis is on the potential
2. Designated varsity athletics,
                                                       use of activities as recreational and leisure
3. Designated wellness courses,
                                                       time interests. No credit.
4. Designated community service projects,
5. Designated military science courses (011,           110 - 125
   021, 031, 041).                                     VARSITY ATHLETICS
                                                          Students who compete on a varsity sports
PHYSICAL ACTIVITY                                      team may register for a semester of Physical
COURSES (PHED)                                         Activity during the semester listed. Two full

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         143                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
PHYSICAL EDUCATION




seasons must be completed to satisfy the            106
Physical Activity requirement. No credit. It is     FIRST AID/CPR
the student’s responsibility to withdraw                This course satisfies one semester of
from the course should they not complete            wellness study. This course will prepare
the season.                                         students to recognize emergencies and make
                                                    appropriate decisions for first aid care. Also
110 - BASKETBALL                                    included are an emphasis on safety and
111 - CROSS COUNTRY                                 assessment of personal habits to reduce risk
112 - FOOTBALL                                      of injury and illness. American Red Cross
113 - GOLF                                          First Aid and CPR certifications are earned
114 - SOCCER                                        upon successful completion of the course. No
115 - SOFTBALL                                      credit.
116 - SWIMMING
                                                    COMMUNITY SERVICE (COMS)
117 - TENNIS
118 - TRACK                                             These courses require 2-3 hours per week
119 - VOLLEYBALL                                    in a combination of seminars and agency
120 - WRESTLING                                     placement. Child abuse and criminal back-
121 - LACROSSE                                      ground clearances may be required to work at
                                                    a particular agency. Students must meet with
WELLNESS (WELL)                                     the Community Service Director in the
                                                    Campus Ministry Center during the preregis-
102                                                 tration process to obtain further information
TOPICS IN WELLNESS                                  and forms. Clearances must be obtained prior
    This topics course satisfies one-half
                                                    to the beginning of the semester in which the
semester of wellness study. Wellness courses
                                                    student is registered for Community Service.
meet two hours per week covering various
topics that may include Stress Management,          105
Preventing Communicable Diseases, Personal          COMMUNITY SERVICE I
Health and Wellness, and other current health          This course satisfies one semester of
issues. These courses promote student               community service. An experiential learning
wellness during their stay at Lycoming as well      opportunity accomplished in conjunction with
as their post graduate years. No credit. This       local agencies or college departments. The
course may be repeated with the same topic          outcome of such service will promote
only with departmental consent.                     students’ personal and social development as
                                                    well as civic responsibility. No credit. May
105                                                 not be repeated.
TOPICS IN WELLNESS
   This topics course satisfies one semester of     106
wellness study. Wellness courses meet two           COMMUNITY SERVICE II
hours per week covering various topics that             This course satisfies one semester of
may include Stress Management, Preventing           community service. Students may elect to
Communicable Diseases, Personal Health and          enroll in a second semester of community
Wellness, and other current health issues.          service to satisfy the graduation requirement.
These courses promote student wellness              This will require the student to be engaged in
during their stay at Lycoming as well as their      a somewhat more sophisticated level of
post graduate years. No credit. This course         learning and service. No credit. Prerequi-
may be repeated with the same topic only with       site: COMS 105.
departmental consent.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  144                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                     POLITICAL SCIENCE




                                                      science but should consult their advisors and
                                                      the education department.
                                                          Students interested in teacher certification
                                                      should refer to the Department of Education on
                                                      page 99.
                                                         A major in Political Science consists of ten
                                                      courses as follows: PSCI 106, 110, and 400;
                                                      two courses in American politics from PSCI
                                                      211, 212, 213, 214, 316, and 347; one course
                                                      in Legal Studies from PSCI 331, 332, 334,
                                                      335, and 436; two courses in World Politics
                                                      from PSCI 221, 225, 243, 327, and 439; and
                                                      two additional Political Science courses.
                                                      Prospective majors are encouraged to take
                                                      PSCI 106 in their freshman year. An exemp-
                                                      tion will be granted only if it strengthens the
                                                      student’s program.
                                                         The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                      diversity requirement: PSCI 221, 327 and
                                                      347. The following courses, when scheduled
                                                      as W courses, count toward the writing
                                                      intensive requirement: PSCI 210, 334, 400,
POLITICAL                                             and 439.

SCIENCE (PSCI)                                        Minors
                                                        The department offers four minors:
Professor: Roskin (Chairperson)                       1) Political Science—any four courses
Assistant Professor: Williamson                       numbered 200 or above excluding PSCI 210
Visiting Professor of Legal Studies: Wishard          and 400.
  The major is designed to provide a systematic       2) American Politics—PSCI 110 and four
understanding of government and politics at the       courses selected from PSCI 211, 212, 213, 214,
                                                      316, or 347. 3) World Politics—four courses
international, national, state, and local levels.
                                                      selected from PSCI 221, 225, 243, 327, or 439.
Majors are encouraged to develop their skills to
                                                      4) Legal Studies—four courses selected from
make independent, objective analyses which
                                                      PSCI 331, 332, 334, 335, or 436.
can be applied to the broad spectrum of the
social sciences.                                        Students are encouraged to consult with
   Although the political science major is not        department members on the selection of a minor.
designed as a vocational major, students with         106
such training may go directly into government         INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS
service, journalism, teaching, or private admin-         The U.S. political system in comparative
istrative agencies. A political science major can     perspective. Basic concepts, vocabulary, and
provide the base for the study of law, or for         examples to ground students in the objective
graduate studies leading to administrative work       analysis of politics.
in federal, state, or local governments, interna-
tional organizations, or college teaching.            110
                                                      U.S. GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
Students seeking certification to teach secondary
                                                         The ideologies, institutions, and processes
school social studies may major in political
                                                      of American politics at the national level, with

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                        145                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
POLITICAL SCIENCE




attention to the internal workings of govern-         225
ment and the extra-governmental actors—               INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
including voters, political parties, and interest        The basic factors and concepts of interna-
groups—that influence policy.                         tional relations, such as international systems,
210                                                   national interest and security, wars, decolon-
COMMUNICATION AND SOCIETY                             ization, nationalism, economic development,
    Reviews and critiques the impact of the mass      trade blocs, and international law and
media on American society. Consideration of           organizations.
how the media form attitudes, nominate and            243
elect candidates, cover news, and monitor govern-     THE VIETNAM WAR
mental activities as well as possible remedies to        The background and context of the war, how
media-related problems. Alternate years.              the United States got involved, the military
211                                                   lessons, and the war’s impact on U.S. society,
STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT                            politics, and economy. Alternate years.
    An examination of the general principles,         316
major problems, and political processes of the        PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING
states and their subdivisions, together with              A course dealing with the general topic and
their role in a federal type of government.           methodology of polling. Content includes
                                                      exploration of the processes by which people’s
212
                                                      political opinions are formed, the manipulation
POLITICAL PARTIES
   The role and impact of political parties in        of public opinion through the uses of propa-
America, focusing on theories of individual           ganda, and the American response to politics
                                                      and political issues. Alternate years.
partisan attitudes and behavior, party organi-
zations and activities, and partisan perfor-          327
mance in government. Alternate years.                 WAR AND PEACE IN THE MIDDLE EAST
                                                         Why is the Middle East such a dangerous
213
                                                      region? The geography, history, religions, and
CONGRESSIONAL POLITICS
                                                      politics that make its wars and its chances for
    Study of the U.S. Congress emphasizing
                                                      peace. Alternate years.
internal structure and operations, rules and
procedures, party leadership, committee system,       331
external influences, incentives for congressional     CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES
behavior, and elections. Alternate years.                What are our rights and liberties as
                                                      Americans? What should they be? A frank
214                                                   discussion of the nature and scope of the
THE PRESIDENCY                                        constitutional guarantees. First Amendment
    The structure and behavior of the American        rights, the rights of criminal suspects and
presidency, including elections, organization         defendants, racial and sexual equality, and
of the office, and relation to other national         equal protection of the laws. Students will
institutions. Alternate years.                        read and brief the more important Supreme
221                                                   Court decisions. Prerequisite: junior or
COMPARATIVE POLITICS                                  senior standing, or consent of instructor.
AND GEOGRAPHY                                         332
   The politics and geography of nations in           COURTS AND THE CRIMINAL
Europe, Asia, the Middle East, Africa, And            JUSTICE SYSTEM
South American in a search for comparisons               The course consists of two components:
and patterns. Includes history, institutions,         criminal law and criminal procedure. Crimi-
cultures, borders, regions, and map exercises.
LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    146                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                       POLITICAL SCIENCE




nal procedure carefully explores constitu-              includes analyses of women’s issues currently
tional law and procedural rules which                   on legislative and court agendas. Alternate
dominate court handling of criminal cases.              years.
Criminal law explores concepts relating to
criminal responsibility and the establishment           400
of selected offenses. Emphasis is placed on             POLITICAL ANALYSIS
“hot button” issues in the field: balancing                Capstone course required of majors,
protection of fundamental freedoms against              normally taken in their senior year, integrates
society’s need to solve an prevent crime; plea          and deepens knowledge and methods of the
negotiations; the politicizing of the criminal          study of politics by means of empirical
justice system; mandatory sentencing                    political inquiry and quantitative techniques.
schemes; management challenges to fast                  Open to non-majors with consent of instructor.
handling of criminal cases; the changing line           436
between juvenile and adult criminal court;              MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
wisdom of using criminal punishment in an                  An examination of the legal structure and
attempt to control some forms of behavior.              the system by which mass communication is
There will be two field trips to court proceed-
                                                        controlled in this society. The forces which
ings. Prerequisite: junior or senior standing,
                                                        shape, influence, and make policy will be
or consent of instructor.
                                                        considered. Prerequisite: junior or senior
334                                                     standing, or consent of instructor.
LEGAL RESEARCH AND WRITING
                                                        439
   Students learn to perform legal research
                                                        AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY
with realistic problems in civil and criminal
                                                            The U.S. role in the world in geographic,
cases drawing upon statutory, constitutional,
                                                        strategic, historical, and ideological perspec-
regulatory, procedural and common law.
                                                        tives, plus an examination of the domestic
They will write briefs and memoranda based
                                                        forces shaping U.S. policy. Alternate years.
upon the research in the form expected of
legal interns and paralegal personnel. Some             470-479
classes may be held at the Lycoming County              INTERNSHIPS (See index)
Courthouse law library. Alternate years.                    Students may receive academic credit for
Prerequisite: junior or senior standing.                serving as interns in structured learning
                                                        situations with a wide variety of public and
335
                                                        private agencies and organizations. Students
LAW AND SOCIETY
   An examination of the nature, sources,               have served as interns with the Public
functions, and limits of law as an instrument           Defender’s Office, the Lycoming County
of political and social control. Included for           Court Administrator, and the Williamsport
discussion are legal problems pertaining to             City government.
the family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty,           N80-N89
and minority groups. Prerequisite: junior or            INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
senior standing, or consent of instructor.                  Current studies relate to elections—local,
347                                                     state, and federal—while past studies have
WOMEN AND POLITICS                                      included Soviet and world politics.
   The historical, philosophical, and practical         490-491
context and conduct of women in a variety of            INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
political roles. This course considers both             DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
elective and nonelective activities, and

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          147                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
PSYCHOLOGY




                                                       including PSY 110, 431, 432, and 436.
                                                       Statistics is also required.
                                                       The B.S. degree
                                                          To complete the B.S. degree, students
                                                       must complete 32 semester hours in psychol-
                                                       ogy and statistics as described for the B.A.
                                                       and take the following additional courses:
                                                           • One additional lab course in
                                                              Psychology from PSY 324 or 333;
                                                           • Three of the following Natural
                                                              Science courses from at least two
                                                              departments: BIO 110, 111, 323,
                                                              338; CHEM 110, 111; PHYS 225,
                                                              226;
                                                           • One of the following computation
                                                              courses: CPTR 125; MATH 128,
                                                              214; ECON 230, 441;
                                                           • An Individual Studies or Honors
                                                              Project in Psychology or, with
                                                              department permission, an Internship
                                                              or the Practicum in Psychology.
PSYCHOLOGY (PSY)                                           Students are also recommended to take
Professor: Ryan, Berthold                              one of the following: PHIL 223, 225, or
Assistant Professors: Hill, Kelley, Beery,             333.
  Olsen (Chairperson)                                     Students interested in teacher certifica-
Visiting Instructor: Williams                          tion should refer to the Department of
Visiting Part-time Assistant Professors:               Education on page 99.
  Mitchell, Philippen                                      The following course satisfies the
Visiting Part-time Instructor: Cimini                  cultural diversity requirement: PSY 341.
   The major provides training in both                 The following courses, when scheduled as
theoretical and applied psychology. It is              W courses, count toward the writing
designed to meet the needs of students                 intensive requirement: PSY 225, 324, 431,
seeking careers in psychology or other natural         432, and 436.
or social sciences. It also meets the needs of         Minor
students seeking a better understanding of                A minor in psychology consists of 20
human behavior as a means of furthering                semester hours in psychology including
individual and career goals in other areas.            PSY 110, two courses numbered 200 or
Psychology majors and others are urged to              higher, and one course from PSY 324, 333,
discuss course selections in psychology with           431, or 432.
members of the department to help insure
appropriate course selection.                          101
                                                       TOPICS
The B. A. degree                                          Exploration of a specific basic or
  To earn the B.A. degree, students must               applied topic in psychology. Different
complete 32 semester hours in psychology               topics will be explored different semesters.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 148                       2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                            PSYCHOLOGY




Potential topics include the psychology of              measurement. Prerequisite: PSY 110 or
disasters, applied behavioral psychology, and           consent of instructor.
organizational psychology. The course is                211
open to elementary and advanced under-                  LEARNING DISABILITIES
graduates. One-half unit of credit. May be                  An examination of learning disabilities,
repeated once for credit with departmental              emotional problems, and social problems of
permission. May not be used to satisfy                  children. Topics will include the legal and
distribution or major requirements.                     educational rights of children with disabili-
110                                                     ties, the various categories of disability
INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY                                 qualifying for Special Education services,
    An introduction to the empirical study of           assessment of children with learning disabili-
human and other animal behavior. Areas                  ties, characteristics of and interventions to
considered may include: learning, personal-             help children with learning disabilities and
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cognition,         attention difficulties, the educational place-
and developmental.                                      ments and support services available, and
                                                        Individualized Educational Programs (IEPs).
116
                                                        Prerequisite: PSY 110.
ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY
   An introduction to the patterns of deviant           216
behavior with emphasis on cause, function,              ABNORMAL CHILD PSYCHOLOGY
and treatment. The various models for the                   This course examines in detail the symp-
concept-ualization of abnormal behavior are             toms, assessment, causes, and treatments for
critically examined. Prerequisite: PSY 110.             psychological disorders primarily experienced
                                                        by children and adolescents, including in the
117                                                     school setting. These include separation
DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY                                anxiety, Attention Deficit Hyperactivity
   A study of the basic principles of human             Disorder (ADHD), oppositional defiant
growth and development throughout the life              disorder, conduct disorder, learning disabili-
span. Prerequisite: PSY 110.                            ties, autism, Asperger’s disorder, and mental
118                                                     retardation. This course also explores the
ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY                                   application of specific treatment approaches
   The study areas will include theories of             to children/adolescents for disorders that can
adolescence; current issues raised by as well           be experienced by both children and adults
as about the “generation of youth”; research            (e.g., phobias, obsessive-compulsive disorder,
findings bearing on theories and issues of              post traumatic stress disorder, depression,
growth beyond childhood, and self-explora-              bipolar disorder). Interventions for difficulties
tion. Prerequisite: PSY 110.                            such as peer/social problems, physical
138                                                     conditions/illness, traumatic brain injury, and
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY                                  the effects of poverty, divorce, and abuse are
    An introduction to the empirical study of           also discussed. Prerequisite: PSY 110.
the teaching-learning process. Areas                    220
considered may include educational objec-               THE PSYCHOLOGY OF
tives, pupil and teacher characteristics,               CLOSE RELATIONSHIPS
concept learning, problem-solving and                       This course will review current theory and
creativity, attitudes and values, motivation,           research on love. The progress of close,
retention and transfer, evaluation and                  interpersonal relationships from initiation to
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          149                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
PSYCHOLOGY




termination will be discussed. In addition,       cover targeting behavior, base-rating, inter-
the relation between love and sex will be         vention strategies, and outcome evaluation.
explored, and current research on sexuality       Learning-based modification techniques such
reviewed. Prerequisite: PSY 110.                  as contingency management, counter-
223                                               conditioning, extinction, discrimination
FOUNDATIONS OF SPORT AND                          training, aversive conditioning, and negative
EXERCISE PSYCHOLOGY                               practice will be examined. Prerequisite: PSY
    An introduction to sport and exercise         110 or consent of instructor.
psychology, from the history and                  310
development of the field to the theories and      FORENSIC PSYCHOLOGY
principles that are central to the study of          An examination of psychological theories
sport and exercise psychology. Topics             and research on topics related to psychology
include the evolution of the field of sport       and law. Areas covered include forensic
psychology, theories surrounding sport            pathology, psychological theories of criminal
participants and sport environments, the          behavior, eyewitness testimony, jury decision
group processes that are an essential part of     making, expert witnesses, the insanity
sport, the basic principles of performance        defense, and criminal profiling analysis.
enhancement within the field, issues related      Prerequisites: PSY 110 and 116.
to enhancing health and well-being in sport
                                                  324
and exercise, and issues related to the
                                                  SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY
facilitation of psychological growth and
                                                      The scientific exploration of interpersonal
development in sport and exercise.
                                                  communication and behavior. Topics include
Prerequisite: PSY 110.
                                                  attitudes and attitude change, attraction and
225                                               communication, social perception and social
INDUSTRIAL AND                                    influence, prosocial and antisocial behavior
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY                         and group processes. Prerequisite: PSY 110.
   The application of the principles and
methods of psychology to selected industrial      333
and organizational situations. Prerequisite:      PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY
PSY 110 or consent of instructor.                    An introduction to the physiological
                                                  psychologist’s method of approach to the
237                                               understanding of behavior as well as the set
COGNITION                                         of principles that relate the function and
    An in-depth examination of the field of       organization of the nervous system to the
human cognition. Topics include perception,       phenomena of behavior. Prerequisite: PSY
attention, short and long term memory,            110 or consent of instructor.
reading comprehension, problem solving and
decision making. Emphasis will be placed          334
on understanding the scientific nature of the     PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT
discipline. Prerequisite: PSY 110.                    Psychometric methods and theory,
                                                  including scale transformation, norms,
239                                               standardization, validation procedures, and
BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION                             estimation of reliability. Prerequisites: PSY
   A detailed examination of the applied          110 and statistics.
analysis of behavior. Focus will be on the
application of experimental method to the
individual clinical case. The course will

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                150                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                           PSYCHOLOGY




341                                                     theory, the implications and applications of
PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN                                     each theory are considered. This course is
   A review of contemporary theory and                  best taken by Psychology majors in the senior
research on the psychology of gender differ-            year, because it integrates material from
ences. Special topics include sex differences           diverse areas of psychology. Prerequisite:
in achievement, power, and communication;               PSY 110.
sex-role stereotypes; beliefs about masculinity
                                                        448-449
and femininity; and gender influences on
                                                        PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY
mental health. Prerequisite: PSY 110.
                                                            An off-campus experience in a community
410                                                     setting offering psychological services,
DYSFUNCTIONAL FAMILIES                                  supplemented with classroom instruction and
AND CHILD DEVELOPMENT                                   discussion. PSY 448 covers the basic
    This course will explore the relations              counseling skills, while PSY 449 covers the
between a variety of types of family dysfunc-           major theoretical approaches to counseling.
tions and child development and psychopa-               Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.
thology. Specifically, topics in child abuse,
                                                        470-479
neglect, sexual abuse, and children from
                                                        INTERNSHIP (See index)
violent homes, alcoholic homes, and homes
                                                            Internships give students an opportunity to
with mentally ill parents will be studied. The
                                                        relate on-campus academic experiences to
course will focus on empirical literature about
                                                        society in general and to their post-baccalau-
dysfunctional families and child development,
                                                        reate objectives in particular. Students have,
biographical and political perspectives.
                                                        for example, worked in prisons, public and
Prerequisites: PSY 116 and 117, or consent
                                                        private schools, county government, and for
of instructor.
                                                        the American Red Cross.
431
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY                                 N80-N89
    A study of the scientific method, experi-           INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
mental design and the application of statistics            Independent study is an opportunity for
to psychology. Emphasis will be placed on               students to pursue special interests in areas
understanding the place of research in the field        for which courses are not offered. In addi-
of psychology. Prerequisites: PSY 110 and               tion, students have an opportunity to study a
statistics.                                             topic in more depth than is possible in the
                                                        regular classroom situation. Studies in the
432
                                                        past have included child abuse, counseling of
SENSATION AND PERCEPTION
                                                        hospital patients, and research in the psychol-
   The examination of psychophysical
                                                        ogy of natural disasters.
methodology and basic neurophysiological
methods as they are applied to the understand-
                                                        490-491
ing of sensor processes. Prerequisites: PSY
                                                        INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
110, 431 and statistics.
                                                        DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
436                                                        Honors in psychology requires original
PERSONALITY THEORY                                      contributions to the literature of psychology
    A review of the major theories of personal-         through independent study. The most recent
ity development and personality functioning.            honors project was a study of the effect of
In addition to covering the details of each             self-esteem on attitude-behavior consistency.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          151                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
RELIGION




RELIGION (REL)                                          An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical
                                                      Languages requires the completion of GRK
Professor: Hughes                                     101-102, HEBR 101-102, and two from GRK
Assistant Professors: Johnson (Chairperson),          221, 222, HEBR 221, 222.
  Knauth
Part-time Instructors: Adams, Gaber                   110
                                                      INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION
   A major in Religion consists of 10                     Designed for the beginning student, this
courses, including REL 113, 114, and 120.             course examines what it means to be reli-
At least seven courses must be taken in the           gious. Some of the issues are the definition
department. Up to three of the following              of religion, the meaning of symbolism,
courses may be counted toward fulfilling the          concepts of God, ecstatic phenomena.
major requirements: GRK 221, 222, HEBR                Specific attention will be devoted to the
221, 222, HIST 340, 416, PHIL 332 and SOC             current problem of cults and religious liberty.
336.
   The following courses satisfy the cultural         113
diversity requirement: REL 110, 224, 225,             OLD TESTAMENT FAITH AND HISTORY
226, 228. The following courses, when                     A critical examination of the literature
scheduled as W courses, count toward the              within its historical setting and in the light of
writing intensive requirement: REL 230, 331,          archaeological findings to show the faith and
and 337.                                              religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish commu-
Minors                                                nity in the Biblical period, and an introduc-
   A minor in religion consists of one course         tion to the history of interpretation with an
from REL 110, 113 or 114 and four religion            emphasis on contemporary Old Testament
courses numbered 200 or above.                        criticism and theology.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                152                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                  RELIGION




114                                                       222
NEW TESTAMENT FAITH                                       PROTESTANTISM IN THE
AND HISTORY                                               MODERN WORLD
    A critical examination of the literature                  An examination of Protestant thought and
within its historical setting to show the faith           life from Luther to the present against the
and religious life of the Christian community             backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from
in the Biblical period, and an introduction to            the 17th century scientific revolution to
the history of interpretation with an emphasis            Marxism, Darwinism, and depth psychology.
on contemporary New Testament criticism                   Special attention will be paid to the constant
and theology.                                             interaction between Protestantism and the
                                                          world in which it finds itself.
119
RELIGION AND POPULAR CULTURE                              223
   An examination of the interaction of                   BACKGROUNDS OF EARLY
religion and culture in an historical perspective         CHRISTIANITY
followed by a direct analysis of the ethical and             A study of historical, cultural, and reli-
religious issues raised by contemporary                   gious influences that shaped the formation of
American popular culture. Readings include                early Christianity and the antecedents of
artistic and social-scientific as well as ethical         Christian doctrine and practice in Hellenistic,
and religious approaches to popular culture.              Roman, and post-exilic Jewish cultures.

120                                                       224
DEATH AND DYING                                           JUDAISM AND ISLAM
   A study of death from personal, social and                 An examination of the rise, growth, and
universal standpoints with emphasis upon                  expansion of Judaism and Islam with special
what the dying may teach the living. Principal            attention given to the theological contents of
issues are the stages of dying, bereavement,              the literatures of these religions as far as they
suicide, funeral conduct, and the religious               are normative in matters of faith, practice, and
doctrines of death and immortality. Course                organization. Also, a review of their contri-
includes, as optional, practical projects with            butions to the spiritual heritage of mankind.
terminal patients under professional supervi-
sion. Only one course from the combination of             225
REL 120 and 121 may be used for distribution.             ORIENTAL RELIGION
                                                             A phenomenological study of the basic
121                                                       content of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese
AFTER DEATH AND DYING                                     Taoism with special attention to social and
    An examination of the question of life                political relations, mythical and aesthetic
after death in terms of contemporary clinical             forms, and the East-West dialogue.
studies, the New Testament resurrection
                                                          226
narratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarna-
                                                          BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY
tion, and the classical theological beliefs of
                                                              A study of the role of archaeology in
providence and predestination. Prerequisite:
                                                          reconstructing the world in which the Biblical
REL 120 is recommended but not required.
                                                          literature originated with special attention
Only one course from the combination of REL
                                                          given to archaeological results that throw
120 and 121 may be used for distribution.
                                                          light on the clarification of the Biblical text.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            153                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
RELIGION




Also, an introduction to basic archaeological       331
method and a study in depth of several              CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
representative excavations along with the               A study of Christian ethics as a normative
artifacts and material culture recovered from       perspective for contemporary moral problems
different historical periods.                       with emphasis upon the interaction of law and
                                                    religion, decision-making in the field of
227                                                 biomedical practice, and the reconstruction of
HISTORY AND THEOLOGY                                society in a planetary civilization.
OF THE EARLY CHURCH
   An examination of the life and theology of       332
the church from the close of the New Testa-         CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN
ment to the fifth century. Special attention        CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS
will be given to the struggles of the church            An examination of the approach of
with heretical movements, the controversies         religion and other disciplines to an issue of
concerning the person and nature of Christ,         current concern; current topics include the
and the encounter of the church with the            theological significance of law, the ethics of
Roman Empire.                                       love, and the Holocaust. May be repeated for
                                                    credit if the topic is different from one
228                                                 previously studied.
HISTORY AND CULTURE
OF THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST                            337
   A study of the history and culture of            BIBLICAL TOPICS
Mesopotamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and             An in-depth study of Biblical topics
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture to      related to the Old and New Testaments.
Alexander the Great. Careful attention will         Topics include prophecy, wisdom literature,
be given to the religious views prevalent in        the Dead Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus,
the ancient Near East as far as these views         Pauline theology, Judaism and Christian
interacted with the culture and faith of the        origins, redaction criticism - the way the
Biblical tradition.                                 Synoptic Gospels and John give final form to
                                                    their message. Course will vary from year to
230                                                 year and may be repeated for credit once if
PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION                              the topic is different from one previously
    A study into the broad insights of psychol-     studied.
ogy in relation to the phenomena of religion
and religious behavior. The course concen-          341
trates on religious experience or manifesta-        CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES
tions rather than concepts. Tentative solu-            A study of the theological significance of
tions will be sought to questions such as:          some contemporary intellectual developments
What does it feel like to be religious or to        in Western culture. The content of this
have a religious experience? What is the            course will vary from year to year. Subjects
religious function in human development?            studied in recent years include the theological
How does one think psychologically about            significance of Freud, Marx, and Nietzsche;
theological problems?                               Christianity and existentialism; theology and
                                                    depth psychology; the religious dimension of
                                                    contemporary literature.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  154                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                               RELIGION




342                                                      sion of a museum director/curator/archaeolo-
THE NATURE AND MISSION                                   gist and a member of the faculty.
OF THE CHURCH
   A study of the nature of the Church as                N80-N89
“The People of God” with reference to the                INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Biblical, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman                   Current study areas are in the Biblical
Catholic traditions.                                     languages, Biblical history and theology,
                                                         Biblical archaeology, comparative religions,
401                                                      and the ethics of technology.
FIELD ARCHAEOLOGY
    Participation in an approved archaeologi-            490-491
cal dig or field school program in the Near              INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
East or Mediterranean region. Includes                   DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
instruction in excavation techniques, record-
ing and processing of artifacts. A survey of
excavation and research and the use of                   GREEK          (GRK)
archaeology as a tool for elucidating historical             Greek is not offered as a major. An
and cultural changes. Under certain circum-              interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages
stances, participation in an archaeological              requires the completion of GRK 101-102,
field school program within the United States,           HEBR 101-102, and two from GRK 221, 222,
Central or South America, or elsewhere may               HEBR 221, 222.
be accepted. Special fees apply. May Term
or Summer Sessions only.                                 101-102
                                                         NEW TESTAMENT
421                                                      GRAMMAR AND READINGS
ARCHAEOLOGICAL FIELD                                        Fundamentals of New Testament Greek
SUPERVISION                                              grammar and readings of selected passages of
    Participation in an archaeological excava-           the Greek text. Does not satisfy humanities
tion or field school program at the level of             requirement.
assistant supervisor or above. Includes
instruction in on-site supervision of daily              221
digging, record-keeping, and interpretation of           READINGS IN THE SYNOPTIC GOSPELS
finds, and/or specialized training in excava-               A comparative study of the synoptic
tion project coordination, data processing, or           tradition in Greek. Prerequisite: GRK 102 or
analysis of specific types of material culture.          equivalent. Does not satisfy humanities
Research project required. Prerequisite: REL             requirement.
401 or equivalent experience. Special fees
apply. May Term or Summer Sessions only.                 222
                                                         READINGS IN THE PAULINE EPISTLES
470-479                                                     Selected readings from the letters of Paul
INTERNSHIP (See index)                                   in Greek. Prerequisite: GRK 221 or equiva-
   Interns in religion usually work in local             lent. Does not satisfy humanities require-
churches under the supervision of the pastor             ment.
and a member of the faculty. Interns in
archaeology usually work in historical
museums or art museums under the supervi-

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           155                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
RELIGION • SCHOLAR PROGRAM




                                                         SCHOLAR
                                                         PROGRAM (SCHOL)
                                                         Assistant Professor: Briggs (Director)
                                                           The Lycoming College Scholar Program is
                                                         a special program designed to meet the needs
                                                         and aspirations of highly motivated students of
                                                         superior intellectual ability. Lycoming
                                                         scholars satisfy the College’s distribution
                                                         requirements with more challenging courses
                                                         than students not in the Scholar Program are
                                                         required to complete. (Substitutions to the
HEBREW (HEBR)                                            Scholar Distribution Requirements can be
    Hebrew is not offered as a major. An                 made only by successful application to the
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Languages            Scholar’s Council.) Lycoming Scholars also
requires the completion of GRK 101-102,                  participate in special interdisciplinary semi-
HEBR 101-102, and two from GRK 221, 222,                 nars and in an independent study culminating
HEBR 221, 222.                                           in a senior presentation.
101-102                                                  301
OLD TESTAMENT                                            LYCOMING SCHOLAR SEMINAR
GRAMMAR AND READINGS                                        Team taught interdisciplinary seminar held
   Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew                  each semester under the direction of the
grammar and readings of selected passages of             Lycoming Scholar Council. May be repeated
the Hebrew text. Does not satisfy humanities             for credit. Completion of five semesters is
requirement.                                             required by the Scholar Program. Prerequi-
                                                         site: Acceptance into the Lycoming Scholar
221
                                                         Program. One-quarter unit of credit. Grade
READINGS IN OLD
                                                         will be recorded as “A” or “F.”
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE
    A critical reading of the Hebrew text of             450
selected narrative portions of the Old Testament         SENIOR SEMINAR
with special attention being given to exegetical            During the senior year, Lycoming Scholars
questions. The text read varies from year to             complete independent studies or departmental
year. Prerequisite: HEBR 102 or equivalent.              honors projects. These projects are presented
Does not satisfy humanities requirement.                 to scholars and faculty in the senior seminar.
222                                                      Non-credit course. Prerequisite: Acceptance
READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC BOOKS                          into the Lycoming Scholar Program.
AND WISDOM LITERATURE
   A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy
and wisdom literature with special attention
being given to exegetical questions. The text
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite:
HEBR 221 or equivalent. Does not satisfy
humanities requirement.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   156                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                             SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY




SOCIOLOGY-
ANTHROPOLOGY
(SOC)
Professor: Wilk (Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: McCall, Ross
    The Sociology-Anthropology Department
offers two tracks in the major. Both tracks
introduce the students to the fundamental
concepts of the discipline, and both tracks
prepare the student for graduate school.
    Track I emphasizes the theoretical aspects
of sociology and anthropology. Track II
emphasizes the application of sociology and
anthropology to human services.

Track I - Sociology-Anthropology requires
the core course sequence SOC 110, 114, 229,
330, 430, 444 and three other courses within
the department with the exception of SOC
443. REL 226 may also be counted toward
the major.
Track II - Human Services in a Socio-                  when scheduled as W courses, count toward the
Cultural Perspective Track II - Human                  writing intensive requirement: SOC 229 and
Services in a Socio-Cultural Perspective               331.
requires SOC 110, 222, 229, 330, 430, 443,
                                                       Minor
and 444. In addition, students must select two
                                                         A minor in sociology and anthropology
courses from among the following: SOC 220,
                                                       consists of SOC 110 and four other SOC
228, 300, 334, and 335. Students are also
                                                       courses approved by the department, three of
required to choose two units from the follow-
                                                       which must be numbered 220 or above.
ing courses: PSY 110, ECON 224, PHIL 219,
and SOC 230. Recommended courses:                      110
ACCT 110, 226; SPAN 111, 112; HIST 126;                INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY
and PHIL 334.                                             An introduction to the problems, concepts,
  Majors in both tracks are encouraged to              and methods in sociology today, including
participate in the internship program.                 analysis of stratification, organization of
  Students interested in teacher certification         groups and institutions, social movements,
should refer to the Department of Education on         and deviants in social structure.
page 99.
                                                       114
  The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                       INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY
diversity requirement: SOC 229, 331, 334,
                                                          An introduction to the subfields of anthro-
335, 336, and 337. The following courses,
                                                       pology; its subject matter, methodology, and
                                                       goals, examination of biological and cultural

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         157                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY




evolution, the fossil evidence for human              of the human condition will be stressed.
evolution, and questions raised in relation to        Topics to be covered include the nature of
human evolution. Other topics include race,           primitive societies in contrast to civilizations,
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis-           the concept of culture and cultural relativism,
toric cultural development.                           the individual and culture, the social patterning
                                                      of behavior and social control, an anthropologi-
220
                                                      cal perspective on the culture of the United
MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY
                                                      States.
   The history, structure, and functions of
modern American family life, emphasizing              230
dating, courtship, factors in marital adjustment,     SELF AND SOCIETY
and the changing status of family members.                This course is concerned with the behavior
Prerequisite: SOC 110 or consent of instructor.       of individuals who occupy positions in social
                                                      structures, organizations and groups. The
222
                                                      focus is on the behavior of individuals as it is
INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN SERVICES
                                                      controlled, influenced, or limited by the social
   This course is for students interested in
                                                      environment; and the manner in which the
learning about, or entering, the human services
                                                      behavior of individuals reacts upon, shapes and
profession. It will review the history, the
                                                      alters social structures and enters into the
range, and the goals of human services
                                                      functioning of groups. This course will also
together with a survey of various strategies          explore symbolic interactionism, a major
and approaches to human problems. A                   theoretical perspective in sociology which
twenty-hour community service component is            focuses primary attention on the way in which
an optional element of the course. Prerequi-          individuals define and continually redefine
site: SOC 110 and/or PSY 110; or consent of           reality on the basis of social interaction.
instructor.                                           Prerequisite: SOC 110 or consent of instructor.
228                                                   235
AGING AND SOCIETY                                     SOCIAL HISTORY OF
    Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of     AMERICAN FAMILIES
the aged as individuals and as members of                 This course traces the historical develop-
groups. Emphasis is placed upon media                 ments that lead to contemporary family debates
portrayals as well as such variables as health,       on issues including, but not limited to, welfare
housing, socio-economic status, personal              support and reform, fertility and abortion
adjustment, retirement, and social participa-         politics, divorce and child custody issues, and
tion. Sociological, social psychological, and         women’s employment outside of the home. In
anthropological frames of reference are               addition, the course examines the American
utilized in analysis and description of aging         family from the perspective of historical
and its relationship to the individual and            sociology with particular emphasis on the
society. Prerequisite: SOC 110.                       interplay of the family as it relates to historic
                                                      reforms in the economic, political, educational,
229
                                                      religious, and legal institutions. Covering
CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY
                                                      approximately a four-century time frame, the
   An examination of cultural and social
                                                      changing composition of families is studied
anthropology designed to familiarize the              with an emphasis on racial, ethnic, and social
student with the analytical approaches to the         class variations. Throughout the course
diverse cultures of the world. The relevancy          “family” is addressed as a gendered institution
of cultural anthropology for an understanding

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    158                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                 SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY




and its implications for men’s and women’s                considered include: field work, questionnaire
lives. Alternate years.                                   construction, unobtrusive research, and
300                                                       program evaluation. The course must be
CRIMINOLOGY                                               taken in the junior year. Prerequisites: SOC
    Analysis of the sociology of law; condi-              110 and MATH 123.
tions under which criminal laws develop;                  331
etiology of crime; epidemiology of crime,                 SOCIOLOGY OF GENDER
including explanation of statistical distribution             Virtually every society known to us is
of criminal behavior in terms of time, space,             founded upon assumptions of gender differ-
and social location. Prerequisite: SOC 110 or             ences and the politics of gender inequality.
consent of instructor.                                    This course focuses on the ways in which
330                                                       gender is socially constructed and institution-
RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIOLOGY-                            alized in societies. Topics to be considered
ANTHROPOLOGY                                              include cultural constructions of masculinity,
   In studying the research process in sociol-            femininity, heterosexuality, and homosexual-
ogy-anthropology, attention is given to the               ity; institutional sites of gender differentiation
process of designing and administering both               such as work, family, military, and education;
qualitative and quantitative research. Students           media representations of gender and sexuality;
complete an original field work project in a              and reproduction politics. Emphasis is placed
public setting. Additionally, students will               on various theories that have been advanced to
learn to compile and analyze quantitative data            explain gender stratification. Prerequisite:
through a micro computer statistical software             SOC 110. Alternate years.
package. Different methodological skills                  334
                                                          RACIAL AND CULTURAL MINORITIES
                                                             Study of racial, cultural, and national
                                                          groups within the framework of American
                                                          cultural values. An analysis will include
                                                          historical, cultural, and social factors underly-
                                                          ing ethnic and racial conflict. Field trips and
                                                          individual reports are part of the requirements
                                                          for the course. Prerequisite: SOC 110 or
                                                          consent of instructor.

                                                          335
                                                          CULTURE AND PERSONALITY
                                                              Introduction to psychological anthropol-
                                                          ogy, its theories and methodologies. Empha-
                                                          sis will be placed on the relationship between
                                                          individual and culture, national character,
                                                          cognition and culture, culture and mental
                                                          disorders, and cross-cultural considerations of




2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                            159                                  LYCOMING COLLEGE
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY




the concept of self. Prerequisite: SOC 229 or         443
consent of instructor.                                HUMAN SERVICES IN
                                                      HELPING INSTITUTIONS
336                                                       The course examines the organizational
THE ANTHROPOLOGY                                      and conceptual context within which human
OF PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS                                services are delivered in contemporary society.
    The course will familiarize the student with      Subjects to be covered include ethnographic
the wealth of anthropological data on the             study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic
religions and world views developed by prim-          communities, mental hospitals, and other
itive peoples. The functions of primitive rel-        human service institutions. The methodology
igion in regard to the individual, society, and       of fieldwork will be explored so as to sensitize
various cultural institutions will be examined.       the student to the socio-cultural dimensions of
Subjects to be surveyed include myth, witch-          helping environments and relationships.
craft, vision quests, spirit possession, the          Prerequisite: SOC 110 or 229, or consent of
cultural use of dreams, and revitalization            instructor. Alternate years.
movements. Particular emphasis will be given
to shamanism, transcultural religious experi-         444
ence, and the creation of cultural realities          SOCIAL THEORY
through religions. Both a social scientific and         The history of the development of sociologi-
existential perspective will be employed. Pre-        cal thought from its earliest philosophical
requisite: SOC 229 or consent of instructor.          beginnings is treated through discussions and
                                                      reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociological
337                                                   thought since the time of Comte. Prerequisite:
THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF                                   SOC 110 or consent of instructor.
AMERICAN INDIANS
   An ethnographic survey of native North             470-479
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such as          INTERNSHIP (See index)
the Iroquois, Plains Indians, Pueblo, Kwakiutl,          Interns in sociology-anthropology typically
and Netsilik. Changes in native lifeways due          work off campus with social service agencies
to European contacts and United States                under the supervision of administrators.
expansion will be considered. Recent cultural         However, other internship experiences, such
developments among American Indians will              as with the Lycoming County Historical
be placed in an anthropological perspective.          Museum, are available.

430                                                   N80-N89
SOCIAL PROBLEMS                                       INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
    Building on the research skills acquired in          An opportunity to pursue specific interests
SOC 330, students will complete an original           and topics not usually covered in regular
quantitative research project on a topic of their     courses. Through a program of readings and
own choosing. The theoretical emphasis of             tutorials, the student will have the opportunity
this course covers the social construction and        to pursue these interests and topics in
life course of a social problem. Additionally,        greater depth than is usually possible in a
several social problems will be analyzed in           regular course.
depth. Prerequisite: SOC 330.
                                                      490-491
                                                      INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
                                                      DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    160                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                THEATRE




                                                           The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                        diversity requirement: THEA 114, 212, 332,
                                                        333, 335, and 410. The following courses,
                                                        when scheduled as W courses, count toward
                                                        the writing intensive requirement: THEA
                                                        212, 332, and 333.

                                                        Major
                                                           All students majoring in Theatre must
                                                        complete the core courses and the require-
                                                        ments for at least one of the three tracks listed
                                                        below.
                                                        Core courses required of all majors:
                                                        THEA 100, 145, 232, 332, 333, 335, 410, and
                                                        449.
                                                        Track Requirements:
                                                        1. Acting:
                                                           THEA 148, 226, 245, and either 345 or
                                                           402; 1 credit of 160, one-half credit
THEATRE                    (THEA)
                                                           which must be earned serving as Assistant
                                                           Stage Manager or Crew Head for a
Associate Professor: Allen (Chairperson)                   faculty-directed production, and 3 credits
Assistant Professor: Stanley                               of 161.
Visiting Assistant Professor: Graham
                                                        2. Directing:
Part-time Instructor: Clark
                                                           THEA 148, 226, 326, and either 402 or
   Theatre is a combination of many art                    426; 2 credits of 160, one-half credit
forms, and the theatre curriculum provides                 which must be earned serving as Assistant
opportunities to explore all its aspects:                  Stage Manager for a faculty-directed
dramatic literature, acting, directing, design,            production and one-half credit which must
and technical theatre. The rigorous production             be earned as the Stage Manager for a
program offers practical training to comple-               faculty-directed production, and 2 credits
ment the comprehensive curriculum.                         of 161.
   The Theatre Department produces a full
                                                        3. Design/Tech:
season of faculty- and student-directed
                                                           THEA 149, 228, 229, 320; one from the
productions each year. In addition, the
                                                           following: 402, 427, 428, 429; and 4
department also manages a children’s theatre
                                                           credits of THEA 160 and/or 161.
company, The Emerald City Players. The
department’s production facilities include the          Minors
Mary L. Welch Theatre, an intimate thrust                   Three minors are available in the Theatre
stage, and the Downstage Theatre, a small               Department.
black box studio theatre in the Academic                • A minor in Performance consists of THEA
Center. The department also maintains                     100, 145, 148, 226, and 245.
support facilities, including a scene shop,             • A minor in Technical Theatre consists of
costume shop, dressing rooms, makeup room,                THEA 100, 149, 228, 229, and 320.
and rehearsal areas.
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          161                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THEATRE




• A minor in Theatre History and Literature          138
  consists of THEA 100, 332, 333, 335 and            HISTORY OF THE DANCE II
  410.                                                  A survey of the forms of dance, excluding
                                                     classical ballet, as independent works of art
100                                                  and as they have reflected the history of civil-
INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE                              ization. One-half unit of credit. Not open to
   A comprehensive introduction to the               students who have received credit for MUS
aesthetics of theatre. From the spectator’s          138. Cross-listed as MUS 138.
point of view, the nature of theatre will be
explored, including dramatic literature and          145
the integral functioning of acting, directing        ACTING I
and all production aspects. Concurrent                  An introductory study of the actor’s
enrollment in THEA 148 prohibited.                   preparation with emphasis on developing the
                                                     actor’s creative imagination through improvi-
114                                                  sation, character analysis, and scene study.
FILM ART: MOTION PICTURE                             Prerequisite: THEA 100. Majors may take
MASTERPIECES                                         concurrently with THEA 100.
    Study of selected classic experimental and
narrative films from around the world as well        148
as from Hollywood. Consideration of what             PLAY PRODUCTION
makes a classic through examination of such              Stagecraft and the various aspects of
topics as acting, writing, directing, style, and     production are introduced. Through material
genre. Alternate years.                              presented and laboratory work on the Mary L.
                                                     Welch Theatre productions, students will
135-136                                              acquire experience with design, scenery,
INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I AND II                       properties, costumes and lighting. Prerequi-
    An introduction to the techniques of basic       site: THEA 100. Concurrent enrollment in
movement and interpretation in ballet, jazz,         THEA 100 prohibited.
and modern dance. Classes include improvi-
sation and choreography. Prerequisite for            149
THEA 136: THEA 135 or consent of instruc-            THEATRE GRAPHICS
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open to           A comprehensive course in mechanical
students who have received credit for MUS            drafting, perspective rendering, figure
135-136 or MUS 235-236. Cross-listed as              drawing, color theory, and scene painting as
MUS 135-136.                                         these skills relate to the study of theatrical
                                                     design. Prerequisite: THEA 100 or consent
137                                                  of instructor.
HISTORY OF THE DANCE I
   A survey of classical ballet from the             160
Ballets de cour of 17th-century France to the        TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM
present with emphasis on the contributions of
Petipa, Fokine, Cecchetti, and Balanchine.           161
One-half unit of credit. Not open to students        REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE
who have received credit for MUS 137.                PRACTICUM
Cross-listed as MUS 137.                               Supervised participation in the various
                                                     aspects of technical production and/or

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                   162                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                               THEATRE




rehearsal and performance of the Theatre                215
Department’s faculty-directed productions in            SPECIAL TOPICS IN THEATRE
the Mary L. Welch Theatre. Credit for                      Study of selected theatrical subjects, such
Theatre Practicum is earned on a fractional             as plays, writers, movements, or technical
basis. Students may register for one-half               projects. Recent topics include stage
semester hour course credit per production              management, sound design, children’s
for active participation in the designated area         theatre, and stagecraft. Prerequisite: THEA
of technology and performance, limited to               100. With consent of instructor, may be
one semester hour credit per semester and               repeated for credit if the topic is different
eight semester hours credit over four years.            from one previously studied.
Credit may not be used to satisfy distribution
requirements in Fine Arts. Students may not             220
register for Theatre Practicum while taking             VOICE AND DICTION
THEA 148 without permission of the                          Introduction to the fundamental tech-
instructor. When scheduling, students should            niques of vocal production for the theatre.
register for Theatre Practicum in addition to           Emphasizes an individual program of
the normal four academic courses. Because               personal vocal development. Dialects and
students may not be cast or assigned duties in          phonetic study of the major European accents
time to meet the drop/add deadline, late                and English accents. Includes oral practice of
registration for THEA 160 and 161 (Re-                  relevant literature. Alternate years. One-half
hearsal and Performance) will be permitted              unit of credit.
without penalty.
                                                        226
201                                                     DIRECTING I
TOURING CHILDREN’S THEATRE                                  An introductory study of the functions of
    Production and rehearsal techniques for             the director, with emphasis on script analysis,
performance of a children’s play. Students              the rehearsal process, and communicating
will construct sets, costumes, props and                with collaborators. Practical scene work
rehearse for touring and performing on during           directing student actors is a major component
slated class times at area grade schools.               of the course. Prerequisite: THEA 145.
Students may repeat this course once with a             Alternate years.
different play. Prerequisites: THEA 100 and
consent of instructor.                                  228
                                                        SCENE DESIGN
212                                                        Development of scene design techniques
MULTICULTURAL AMERICA                                   through study of the practice in rendering,
ON SCREEN                                               perspective drawing, plan drafting, sketching
    Introduction to the art of understanding            and model building. Beginning work in
moving images to discover the cultural values           theory, techniques, and practices in scenery
of American filmmakers and their audiences.             painting for the theatre. Participation on
Comparison of the ways in which films and               Arena Theatre productions will be part of the
television use comedy, drama, and the                   class-room requirements. Prerequisites: ART
docum-entary to examine topics having to do             212, THEA 148. Alternate years.
with values, beliefs, and cultural diversity in
America.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                          163                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THEATRE




229                                                 245
LIGHTING DESIGN                                     ACTING II
   The theory of stage and lighting design             Exploration of contemporary realism
with emphasis on their practical application to     through intensive character analysis, mono-
the theatre. Prerequisites: ART 212, THEA           logue work, and scene study. Prerequisite:
148. Alternate years.                               THEA 145.

231                                                 315
SUMMER THEATRE PRACTICUM                            SPECIAL TOPICS IN THEATRE
   Practical application in construction,              Study of selected theatrical subjects, such
design and production problems and tech-            as plays, writers, movements, or technical
niques through laboratory and plays in              projects. Recent topics include stage
production. Prerequisite: THEA 148. Offered         management, sound design, children’s
summer only.                                        theatre, and stagecraft. Prerequisite: THEA
                                                    100. With consent of instructor, may be
232                                                 repeated for credit if the topic is different
STAGE MAKEUP                                        from one previously studied.
   Essentials in stage makeup: straight,
character, special types. Effects of light on       320
makeup are included. Recommended for                COSTUME DESIGN
performers and directors of educational,               The theory of costuming for the stage,
church and community theatres. Prerequisite:        elements of design, planning, production and
THEA 148. One-half unit of credit. Alternate        construction of costumes for the theatre.
Years.                                              Students will participate in the construction of
                                                    costumes for faculty-directed productions.
233                                                 Prerequisites: ART 212 and THEA 148, or
ADVANCED MAKEUP                                     consent of instructor. Majors may take
   Advanced techniques in makeup design.            concurrently with THEA 145. Alternate years.
Three-dimensional and prosthetic makeups are
included, with emphasis on nonrealistic and         326
nonhuman forms. Prerequisite: THEA 232.             DIRECTING II
One-half unit of credit. Alternate years.               Continued exploration of the director’s
                                                    role in the production process with emphasis
235-236                                             on the director’s work in rehearsal. Practical
INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II                         application will include the direction of a one-
    Studies of the techniques of basic move-        act play with student actors in the Downstage
ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz, and        Theatre. Prerequisite: THEA 226. Alternate
modern dance at the intermediate level.             years.
Classes include improvisation and choreogra-
phy. Prerequisite for THEA 235: THEA 136            332
or consent of instructor. Prerequisite for          THEATRE HISTORY I
THEA 236: THEA 235 or consent of instruc-              An investigation of the Western theatre as
tor. One-half unit of credit each. Not open to      the evolution of a multidisciplinary artistic,
students who have received credit for MUS           cultural, social, economic, religious, and
135-136 or MUS 235-236. Cross-listed as             political phenomenon. Dramatic texts
MUS 235-236.                                        representing specific eras will be studied as

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                  164                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                               THEATRE




historical evidence of theatre practice.               402
Focuses on the origins of the theatre through          SHAKESPEARE ON STAGE
1700. Alternate years.                                     A study of Shakespeare’s plays in produc-
                                                       tion terms. Emphasis will be on translating
333                                                    works from the page to the stage, with special
THEATRE HISTORY II                                     attention to language, poetry, and acting styles
   An investigation of the Western theatre as          as well as technical problems. Contemporary
the evolution of a multidisciplinary artistic,         productions will be viewed. Prerequisites:
cultural, social, economic, religious, and             THEA 332 and 333, or consent of instructor.
political phenomenon. Dramatic texts                   Alternate years.
representing specific eras will be studied as
historical evidence of theatre practice.               410
Focuses on the early 18th century through the          THEATRE AND CULTURE
theatre today. Prerequisite: THEA 332.                     Exploration of one or more historic periods
Alternate years.                                       in a specific locale to discover the nature of
                                                       the theatre in its cultural context. Included
335                                                    will be a study of the art, music, literature,
MODERN DRAMA                                           political and social framework of the period
    An examination of selected examples of             and locale. Prerequisites: THEA 332 and 333.
dramatic literature from the modern theatre,           Alternate years.
1875 to the present. The course will focus on
a single topic within this framework, such as          415
American drama, American musical theatre,              SPECIAL TOPICS IN THEATRE
European drama, absurdist drama, epic drama,              Study of selected theatrical subjects, such
expressionistic drama, performance art, etc.           as plays, writers, movements, or technical
Prerequisites: THEA 332 and 333, or consent            projects. Recent topics include stage
of instructor. Alternate years.                        management, sound design, children’s
                                                       theatre, and stagecraft. Prerequisite: THEA
337                                                    100. With consent of instructor, may be
PLAYWRITING                                            repeated for credit if the topic is different
   An investigation of the techniques of               from one previously studied.
playwriting with an emphasis on creative
writing, culminating in a written one-act              426
play. Prerequisites: ENGL 106 or 107 and               DIRECTING III
THEA 226. Alternate years.                                Practical application of directing in one of
                                                       the department’s two performance spaces.
345                                                    Prerequisites: THEA 326 and consent of
ACTING III                                             instructor. May be repeated for credit.
   Exploration of historical acting styles
including Greek, commedia dell’arte, Elizabe-          427
than, comedy of manners, melodrama, and                ADVANCED COSTUME DESIGN STUDIO
expressionism. Practical application will                  Practical application of costume design for
include character analysis, monologue work,            the studio or main stage productions. Prereq-
and scene study. Prerequisite: THEA 245.               uisites: THEA 320 and consent of instructor.
                                                       May be repeated for credit.


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         165                                 LYCOMING COLLEGE
THEATRE




428                                                   which must be approved by all full-time
ADVANCED SCENE DESIGN STUDIO                          Theatre Department faculty. This course is
    Practical application of scene design for the     open to senior theatre majors only.
studio or main stage productions. Prerequi-
                                                      470 - 479
site: Consent of instructor. May be repeated
                                                      INTERNSHIP (See Index)
for credit.
                                                         Students in the theatre work off campus in
                                                      theatres such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minne-
429
                                                      apolis, and the Hartford Stage and the Trinity
ADVANCED LIGHTING DESIGN STUDIO
                                                      Repertory.
   Practical application of lighting design for
the studio or main stage productions. Prereq-         N80/N89
uisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated        INDEPENDENT STUDIES (See Index)
for credit.                                              Subjects for Independent Studies are
                                                      chosen in conjunction with faculty members.
444
                                                      490-491
ADVANCED DIRECTING STUDIO
                                                      INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
   Practical application of directing for studio
                                                      DEPARTMENTAL HONORS (See index)
or main stage productions. Prerequisites:
                                                         Students who qualify for Departmental
Consent of instructor and THEA 426. May be
                                                      Honors will produce a major independent
repeated for credit.
                                                      project in research or technical theatre.
445
ADVANCED ACTING STUDIO
   Practical application of acting for studio or
main stage productions. Prerequisites:
Consent of instructor and THEA 345. May be
repeated for credit.

449
SENIOR PROJECT
   The practical application of one specific
theatre discipline. Students have the option of
demonstrating expertise in costume design,
scene design, lighting design, acting, or
directing for departmental productions. Other
options may include but are not limited to
design projects or one-person shows. Students
will be required to submit a formal written
proposal in the spring of their junior year




LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    166                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                          WOMEN’S AND GENDER STUDIES




                                                          The following courses satisfy the cultural
                                                       diversity requirement: WGST 200 and
                                                       WGST 300.

                                                        ART 339          Women in Art
                                                        ENGL 334         Women and Literature
                                                        HIST 220         Women in History
                                                        PSCI 347         Women and Politics
                                                        PSY 341          Psychology of Women
                                                        SOC 220          Marriage and the Family
                                                        SOC 331          Sociology of Gender
                                                        WGST 300         Topics in Women’s and
                                                                         Gender Studies

                                                       200
                                                       GENDERED PERSPECTIVES
                                                           An examination of gender issues from an
                                                       interdisciplinary perspective. This course
                                                       will explore the social construction of gender
                                                       and gendered institutions as well as relevant
                                                       critical approaches such as feminist, utopian,
                                                       and queer theories. Topics may involve
                                                       language, art, science, politics, culture,
                                                       violence, race, class, ethnic differences,
                                                       sexuality, and pornography.
WOMEN’S AND                                            300
GENDER STUDIES                                         TOPICS IN WOMEN’S AND GENDER
                                                       STUDIES
(WGST)                                                     An examination of selected topics in
Assistant Professor: N.J. Stanley (Director)           Women’s and Gender Studies designed to
    Although a major in women’s and gender             allow students to pursue particular subjects in
studies is available only under the policies           more depth and detail than in the general
regarding Individual Interdisciplinary Majors,         introductory course. With the permission of
an established minor in women’s and gender             the Coordinator of the Women’s and Gender
studies is provided. WGST 200 and four of              Studies Program, students may repeat this
the following established cross-listed courses         course depending on the content.
are required for the minor. Students may               N80/N89
substitute no more than two experimental or            INDEPENDENT STUDIES
topics courses that have been approved by the             With the approval of the Coordinator, an
coordinating committee. To receive credit for          appropriate special course or independent
a minor in women’s and gender studies,                 studies project may be substituted for one of
students must maintain at least a 2.00 average         the four courses required for the minor.
in courses taken for that minor.



2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         167                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES




  THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES
OFFICERS                       Donald E. Failor ’68        Peter R. Lynn ’69                 Phyllis L. Yasui
Arthur A. Haberberger ’59      Owner/Chartered Life        CEO                               Nurse/Homemaker/Retired
Chairman                       Underwriter                 Government Retirement &           Williamsport, PA
Investor and Consultant        D.E. Failor Associates      Benefits, Inc.                    Alvin M. Younger, Jr. ’71
Reading, PA                    Harrisburg, PA              Alexandria, VA                    Chief Financial Officer/
Jay W. Cleveland, Sr.          Daniel G. Fultz ’57         D. Stephen Martz ’64              Retired
Vice Chairman                  Exec. VP and Treasurer/     Consultant                        T. Rowe Price Associates, Inc.
Chairman of the Board/CEO      Retired                     Hollidaysburg Trust Co.           Baltimore, MD
Cleveland Brothers Equipment   Lycoming College            Hollidaysburg, PA                 EMERITI
Company                        Williamsport, PA
                                                           Richard D. Mase '62               David Y. Brouse ’47
Harrisburg, PA
                               David D. Gathman ’69        Businessman, Self-employed/       Manager/Retired
Melvin H. Campbell, Jr. ’70    Consultant                  Retired                           GTE Sylvania
Secretary                      SunGard SCT Inc.            Montoursville, PA                 Montoursville, PA
Owner/President                Malvern, PA
                                                           Norman B. Medow ’60               Richard W. DeWald ’61
Campbell, Harrington & Brear
                               Daniel R. Hawbaker          Surgeon                           Chairman
Advertising
                               President                   Manhattan Eye, Ear & Throat       Montgomery Plumbing
York, PA
                               Glenn O. Hawbaker, Inc.     Hospital                          Supply Company
Harold D. Hershberger, Jr. ’51 State College, PA           New York, NY                      Montoursville, PA
Assistant Secretary
                               Michael J. Hayes ’63        James G. Scott ’70                Samuel H. Evert ’34
President
                                                                                             Owner/Retired
Deer Mountain Associates, Inc. President and CEO           Independent Consultant
                               Fred’s                      West Newbury, MA                  Bloom Penn Construction
Williamsport, PA
                               Memphis, TN                                                   Bloomsburg, PA
Ann S. Pepperman, Esq.                                     Robert L. Shangraw ’58
Assistant Secretary            James L. Hebe ’71           Chairman Emeritus                 Rev. Kenrick R. Khan ’57
Partner                        Owner                       First Vice President for          Clergy/Teacher/Retired
McNerney, Page,                Seagrave Fire Apparatus     Investments/Retired               Penney Farms, FL
Vanderlin & Hall               Clintonville, WI            Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner     Margaret D. L’Heureux
Williamsport, PA                                           & Smith                           Real Estate Broker Retired
                               Bishop Neil L. Irons
                                                           Williamsport, PA                  Williamsport, PA
BOARD MEMBERS                  Bishop/Retired
                               Central PA Conference       Hugh H. Sides ’60                 William Pickelner
Brenda P. Alston-Mills ’66
                               United Methodist Church     President                         President
Professor
                               Mechanicsburg, PA           Robert M. Sides Music, Inc.       Pickelner Fuel Oil Company
North Carolina State Univ.
                                                           Williamsport, PA                  Williamsport, PA
Raleigh, NC                    Dale N. Krapf ’67
                               President                   Stanley W. Sloter ’80             Marguerite Rich ’42
David R. Bahl, Esq.                                                                          Homemaker
                               George Krapf, Jr. &         President
Partner                                                                                      Woolrich, PA
                               Sons, Inc.                  Paradigm Companies
McCormick Law Firm
                               Exton, PA                   Arlington, VA                     Harold H. Shreckengast,
Williamsport, PA
                               David B. Lee ’61            Judge Clinton W. Smith ’55         Jr. ’50
Robert L. Bender ’59                                                                         Audit Partner/Retired
                               President/CEO               Senior Judge
Assoc. VP for Academic                                                                       Price Waterhouse
                               Omega Financial Corp.       Lycoming County Ct. House
Affairs/Retired                                                                              Philadelphia, PA
University of Illinois         State College, PA           Williamsport, PA
Champaign, IL                                                                                Rev. Dr. Wallace Stettler
                               Robert G. Little ’63        Charles D. Springman ’59
                                                                                             President/Retired
John R. Biggar ’66             Family Physician            Sr. VP Operations/Retired         Wyoming Seminary
Exec. V.P. & CFO               Community Medical           May Department Stores
                                                                                             Kingston, PA
PPL Resources, Inc.            Associates                  Williamsport, PA
Allentown, PA                  Halifax, PA
                                                           John S. Trogner, Jr. ’68
James E. Douthat               Carolyn-Kay Lundy ’63       President/First Commercial
President                      Community Volunteer         Real Estate
Lycoming College               Williamsport, PA            Treasurer/Troegs Brewing Co.
Williamsport, PA                                           Harrisburg, PA

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                         168                               2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                  B




                                                                           ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF




 ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF
James E. Douthat (1989)                          Jacqueline R. Bilger (2004)
President                                        Director of Human Resources
A.B., The College of William and Mary            B.S., Pennsylvania College of Technology
M.Div., Ed.D., Duke University                   Dale V. Bower (1968)
John F. Piper, Jr. (1969)                        Planned Giving Consultant
Dean of the College                              B.S., Lycoming College
Professor of History                             B.D., United Theological Seminary
A.B., Lafayette College                          Robert C. Brobson (2003)
B.D., Yale University                            Director of Safety & Security
Ph.D., Duke University                           B.A., Mansfield State College
Sue S. Gaylor (2003)                             M.S., California State Univ. of Long Beach
Executive Assistant to the President/            Steven Caravaggio (1992)
 Institutional Planning Officer                  Director of Academic Computing
A.B., Dartmouth College                            & End User Services
Ed.M., Ed.D., Harvard University                 B.A., Lycoming College
Robert Griesemer (2001)                          M.A., University of Pittsburgh
Vice President and Treasurer                     Sara E. Case (2003)
B.S., Lafayette College                          Development Officer
Daniel P. Miller (2005)                          B.A., Lafayette College
Dean of Student Affairs                          Christine G. Coale (2003)
B.S., St. John Fisher College                    Admissions Counselor
M.S., Syracuse University                        B.A., George Washington University
Ed.D., Widener University                        A.A., Mt. Vernon College
James D. Spencer (1989)                          Rebecca L. Collias (1995)
Dean of Admissions & Financial Aid               Registrar
B.A., Concordia College                          B.A., Point Park University
                                                 M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh
Debbie L. Ackerman (1978)
Housekeeping Manager                             Regina Collins (1991)
                                                 Assistant Dean for Freshman
Joseph Balduino (2004)                           B.A., Rosemont College
Admissions Counselor                             M.S., Bucknell University
B.A., Lycoming College
                                                 Richard L. Cowher II (1978)
Patricia E. Bausinger (2001)                     Print Shop Manager
Campus Store Manager
                                                 Robert L. Curry (1969)
Keith O. Barrows (2002)                          Associate Director of Athletics
Director of Gift Planning and Manager of         B.A., Lycoming College
  Development Relations
B.A., Lycoming College                           Molly Costello Daly (1991)
J.D., Widener University School of Law           Director of College Relations
                                                 A.B., Mount Holyoke College
                                                 M.B.A., Southeastern Massachusetts University

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                   169                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF




Denise Davidson (1994)                           Daniel J. Hartsock (1981)
Asst. Dean, Director of Residence Life           Assistant Dean for Sophomores
B.A., Clark University                           Director of Academic Resource Center and
M.S., Miami University of Ohio                     Coordinator of Advising
Robert C. Dietrich (2000)                        B.H., The Pennsylvania State University
Sports Information Director                      M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
B.S., Westminster College                        David Heffner (1994)
Dwayne A. Dolly (2004)                           Assoc. Dean/Director of
Student Life Coordinator                           Information Technology Services
B.A., Lycoming College                           B.S., The Pennsylvania State University
                                                 M.S., Bloomsburg University
Stephanie E. Fortin (2002)
Counselor, Counseling & Wellness Services        Nancy Hollick (1990)
B.A., Lycoming College                           Staff Accountant
M.A., Kutztown University                        A.A.S., Pennsylvania College of Technology
                                                 B.S., Lock Haven University
Nicole S. Franquet (1996)
Director of Network Services                     Maramonne Houseknecht (2000)
B.A., Lycoming College                           Admissions Counselor
Sister Catherine Ann Gilvary IHM (1994)          B.A., Niagara University
Catholic Campus Minister                         J. Marco Hunsberger (1989)
A.B., M.A., M.S., Marywood College               Campus Minister
Frank L. Girardi (1984)                          B.A., Mercer University
Director of Athletics                            M.Div., United Theological Seminary
Head Football Coach                              Laura C. Johnson (2003)
B.S., West Chester State College                 Director of Student Recreation & Conferences
Sharon E. Hamilton (2003)                        B.S., Rutgers University, Cook College
Instructional Services Librarian/Coordinator     M.S., Ohio University
 of Information Literacy & Outreach              Michelle M. Jones (1996)
B.A., Youngstown State University                Director of Accounting
M.S.L.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania     B.A., Lycoming College
Allison Gregory (2005)
                                                 Jane C. Keller (1998)
Instructional Services Librarian Instructor
                                                 Asst. Director Academic Resource Center
Instructor, Library
                                                 B.A., Bucknell University
B.A., Lycoming College
                                                 M.S., Wilkes University
Murray J. Hanford (1991)
                                                 Andrew W. Kilpatrick (2005)
Publications Manager
                                                 Student Life Coordinator
Alexander C. Hartmann (2003)                     B.A., University of Scranton
Director of Prospect Research                    S.T.B., Gregorian University
B.A., Indiana University                         S.T.L., Accademia Alfonsiana
M.A., University of Chicago
                                                 Wayne E. Kinley (1990)
                                                 Controller and Assistant Treasurer
                                                 B.A., Lycoming College



LYCOMING COLLEGE                               170                    2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                              ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF




Jeffrey E. Klein (2004)                             Michelle M. Parks (2001)
Student Life Coordinator                            Assistant Director of Admissions
M.P.A., University of Oregon                        B.A., Lycoming College
B.A., Connecticut College
                                                    Salomeh Pourmoghim (2004)
F. Douglas Kuntz (2000)                             Instructional Service Librarian/Coordinator of
Director of Physical Plant                          Reference & Assessment
B.S., West Virginia University                      M.L.S., Texas Woman's University
Sandi L. Lander (1995)                              B.A., Azad University
Director of Administrative Computing                Cindy Springman (1999)
B.S., SUNY College at Brockport                     Bursar
Anne M. Landon (1996)                               A.A., Williamsport Area Community College
Coordinator of Internships and                      Matthew E. Stendardi (2004)
  Assistant to the Director of IMS                  Admissions Counselor
B.A., Bloomsburg University                         B.A., Lycoming College
Linda B. Loehr (2001)                               Sondra L. Stipcak (1995)
Registered Nurse, Health Services                   Nurse, Director of Health Services
Jamie A. Lowthert (2004)                            B.S.N., Indiana University of PA
Director of Financial Aid                           Melanie Taormina (2005)
B.A., Bloomsburg University                         Director of Almumni and Parent Programs
M.S., University of Kentucky                        M.F.A., University of Pittsburgh
Kathy A. Lucas (1998)                               B.A., Lycoming College
Registered Nurse, Health Services                   Lin Wei (2005)
Lawrence P. Mannolini, III (2004)                   Web Designer
Director Student Programs/Leadership Devel.         B.A., Liaoning Normal University
B.A., St. Lawrence University                       Jennifer Wilson (2000)
M.Ed., Springfield College                          Director of Annual Giving
Brenda M. Marshall (2004)                           B.S.,Carnegie Mellon University
Assistant Registrar
B.A., Bloomsburg University                         Emeriti
                                                    Jack C. Buckle
Melissa A. Masse (2001)                             Dean of Students Emeritus
Assistant Director of Financial Aid                 A.B., Juniata College
B.A., Lycoming College                              M.S., Syracuse University
Jason L. McCahan (2001)                             Harold H. Hutson
Assistant Director of Annual Giving                 President Emeritus
B.A., Lock Haven University                         B.A., LL.D., Wofford College
Jason R. Moran (2004)                               Ph.D., University of Chicago
Admissions Counselor                                L.H.D., Ohio Wesleyan University
B.A., Lycoming College                              Bishop D. Frederick Wertz
Kirsten R. Newman (2004)                            President Emeritus
Admissions Counselor                                A.B., Dickinson College
B.A., Lycoming College                              M.A., S.T.B., Boston University
                                                    LL.D., Dickinson College
                                                    D.D., Lycoming College
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                      171                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
FACULTY




                                                 Mehrdad Madresehee (1986)
  FACULTY                                        Economics
                                                 B.S., University of Tehran
*      On Sabbatical Fall Semester 2005          M.S., National University of Iran
**     On Sabbatical Spring 2006                 M.S., University of Idaho
***    On Sabbatical Academic Year 2005-06       Ph.D., Washington State University
****   On Leave Academic Year 2005-06
                                                 Chriss McDonald (1987)
Professors                                       Chemistry
Howard C. Berthold, Jr. (1976)                   B.S., Manchester College
Psychology                                       Ph.D., Miami University of Ohio
B.A., Franklin and Marshall College              Richard J. Morris (1976) **
M.A., University of Iowa                         History
Ph.D., The University of Massachusetts           John P. Graham Teaching Professorship
Gary M. Boerckel (1979)                          B.A., Boston State College
Music                                            M.A., Ohio University
B.A., B.M., Oberlin College                      Ph.D., New York University
M.M., Ohio University                            Carole Moses (1982) **
D.M.A., University of Iowa                       English
Sascha Feinstein (1995)                          B.A., Adelphi University
English                                          M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
B.A., University of Rochester                    Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton
M.F.A., Ph.D., Indiana University                John F. Piper, Jr. (1969)
Amy Golahny (1985)                               History
Art                                              Dean of the College/Professor of History
B.A., Brandeis University                        A.B., Lafayette College
M.A., Williams College - Clark Art Institute     B.D., Yale University
M. Phil., Ph.D., Columbia University             Ph.D., Duke University
Stephen R. Griffith (1970)                       Michael G. Roskin (1972)
Philosophy                                       Political Science
A.B., Cornell University                         Robert L. and Charlene Shangraw Professor
M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh            A.B., University of California at Berkeley
                                                 M.A., University of California at Los Angeles
G. W. Hawkes (1989)                              Ph.D., The American University
English
B.A., University of Washington-Seattle           Kathryn M. Ryan (1981)
M.A., Ph.D., SUNY-Binghamton                     Psychology
                                                 B.S., University of Illinois
Richard A. Hughes (1970)                         M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
M.B. Rich Chair in Religion
B.A., University of Indianapolis                 Roger D. Shipley (1967)
S.T.B., Ph.D., Boston University                 Art
                                                 The Logan Richmond Professorship
Robert H. Larson (1969)
                                                 B.A., Otterbein College
History
                                                 M.F.A., Cranbrook Academy of Art
B.A., The Citadel
M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia



LYCOMING COLLEGE                               172                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                            FACULTY




Fred M. Thayer, Jr. (1976)                          B. Lynn Estomin (1993)
Music                                               Art
A.B., Syracuse University                           B.A., Antioch College
B.M., Ithaca College                                M.F.A., University of Cincinnati
M.M., SUNY at Binghamton
                                                    David Fisher (1984) *
D.M.A., Cornell University
                                                    Astronomy/Physics
John M. Whelan, Jr. (1971)                          B.S., The Pennsylvania State University
Philosophy                                          M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware
B.A., University of Notre Dame
                                                    Edward G. Gabriel (1977)
Ph.D., The University of Texas at Austin
                                                    Biology
Stan T. Wilk (1973)                                 B.A., M.A., Alfred University
Sociology/Anthropology                              M.S., Ph.D., The Ohio State University
B.A., Hunter College
                                                    Gary Hafer (1992)
Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
                                                    English
Melvin C. Zimmerman (1979) **                       B.A., M.A., Kutztown University
Biology                                             Ph.D., Purdue University
The Frank and Helen Lowry Professor
                                                    David K. Haley (1980)
B.S., SUNY at Cortland
                                                    Mathematics
M.S., Ph.D., Miami University
                                                    B.A., Acadia University
Associate Professors                                M.S., Ph.D., Queens University
                                                    Ph.D., Universitat Mannheim
Jerry D. Allen (1984)
Theatre                                             Janet Hurlbert (1985)
B.F.A., M.F.A., Utah State University               Director of Library Services
                                                    Associate Dean
Susan K. Beidler (1975)                             B.A., M.A., University of Denver
Collection Management Services Librarian
B.A., University of Delaware                        Sandra L. Kingery (1998)
M.L.S., University of Pittsburgh                    Foreign Languages
                                                    B.S., Lawrence University
Holly D. Bendorf (1995)                             M.A., Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-
Chemistry                                           Madison
B.S., The Pennsylvania State University
Ph.D., University of California-Los Angeles         Eldon F. Kuhns, II (1979)
                                                    Accounting
Barbara F. Buedel (1989) ***                        B.A., Lycoming College
Foreign Languages                                   M. Accounting, University of Oklahoma
B.A., University of Kentucky                        C.P.A. (Pennsylvania)
M.A., M. Phil., Ph.D., Yale University
                                                    Darby Lewes (1993)
Timothy Carter (1999)                               English
Criminal Justice                                    B.A., Saint Xavier College
B.A., M.C.J., University of South Carolina          M.A., Northwestern University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University            Ph.D., University of Chicago
Richard R. Erickson (1973)                          Litt.D., Wilson College (Honoris Causa)
Astronomy and Physics                               Eileen M. Peluso (1998)
B.A., University of Minnesota                       Mathematical Science
M.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago                  B.S., Bloomsburg University
                                                    M.S., Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                      173                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
FACULTY




Gene D. Sprechini (1981)                         Santusht S. deSilva (1983)
Mathematics                                      Mathematical Science
B.S., Wilkes College                             B. Sc., University of Sri Lanka
M.A., Ph.D., SUNY at Binghamton                  M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
Philip W. Sprunger (1993)                        Alka Gandhi (2003)
Economics                                        Economics
B.S., B.A., Bethel College                       B.A., Duke University
M. A., Ph.D., Indiana University                 M.A., University of Kansas
H. Bruce Weaver (1974)                           Ph.D., Ohio State University
Business Administration                          Owen F. Herring (1965)
Director of Institute for Management Studies     Philosophy
B.B.A., Stetson University                       B.A., Wake Forest College
J.D., Vanderbilt University                      Garett Heysel (1999)
M.B.A., University of Central Florida            Foreign Languages
David S. Witwer (1994) ****                      B.A., Middlebury College
History                                          M.A., Northwestern University
B.A., DePauw University                          Ph.D., Ohio State University
M.A., Ph.D., Brown University                    Katherine Hill (2003)
David H. Wolfe (1989)                            Psychology
Astronomy/Physics                                B.A., Colorado College
B.S., Lock Haven State College                   M.S., Ph.D., Kansas State University
M.S., Pennsylvania State University              Rachael Hungerford (1989)
Ph.D., Kent State University                     Education
                                                 A.A., Cayuga County Community College
Assistant Professors                             B.S., State University of New York at Plattsburgh
Susan Beery (1999)                               Ph.D., University of Massachusetts/Amherst
Psychology                                       Steven R. Johnson (1999)
B.A., Duke University                            Religion
M.S., Ph.D., University of Miami                 B.A., California State University, Fullerton
Michelle Briggs (1992)                           M.Div., San Francisco Theological Seminary
Biology                                          M.A., Miami University of Ohio
Director of Lycoming Scholars                    M.A., Ph.D., Claremont Graduate University
B.S., Cornell University                         Sue A. Kelley (1999)
M.S., University of Iowa                         Psychology
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University         B.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Amy Cartal-Falk (1991)                           M.S., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
Foreign Languages                                Robin DeWitt Knauth (1999)
B.A., Lycoming College                           Religion
M.A., Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State              A.B., Princeton University
University                                       M.T.S. Regent College
                                                 Th.D., Harvard University
G. Kathleen Chamberlain (1999)
Education                                        Steven Koehn (1997)
B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania         Communication
M.S.Ed., Mansfield University of                 B.A., VA Polytechnic & State University
 Pennsylvania                                    M.A., Pepperdine University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University         D.Ed., West Virginia University

LYCOMING COLLEGE                               174                       2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                          FACULTY




Bonita Kolb (2002)                                   Susan M. Ross (1998) *
Business Administration                              Sociology/Anthropology
B.A., Alaska Pacific University                      B.A., Millersville University
M.S., Ph.D., Golden Gate University                  M.A., Ph.D., University of New Hampshire
Andrew Leiter (2005)                                 Donald Slocum (1995)
English                                              Accounting
B.A., University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa              B.S., Cornell University
M.A., Ph.D., University of N.C., Chapel Hill         M.S., The American University
Charles H. Mahler (1994)                             Ph.D., Syracuse University
Chemistry                                            C.P.A., Washington, D.C.
B.A., The Ohio State University                      N. J. Stanley (2002)
M.S., Ph.D., Northwestern University                 Theatre
Justin C. Matus (2004)                               B.S., Louisiana State University
Business Administration                              M.F.A., Florida State Univ., Tallahassee
B.S., King's College                                 Ph.D., Indiana University-Bloomington
M.B.A., Golden Gate University                       Arthur Sterngold (1988)
Ph.D., Old Dominion University                       Business Administration
Betty McCall (2004)                                  B.A., Princeton University
Sociology                                            M.B.A., Northwestern University
B.A., Lamar University                               Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
M.S., Baylor University                              Howard Tran (2002)
M.A., Ph.D., Vanderbilt University                   Art
Terence W. McGarvey (2004)                           B.F.A., Academy of Art College
Biology                                              M.F.A., Boston University
B.A., Hofstra University                             Richard E. Wienecke (1982)
M.S., Long Island University                         Accounting
Ph.D., Loyola University of Chicago                  B.A., Lycoming College
Mary E. Morrison (2004)                              M.S., Bucknell University
Biology                                              M.B.A., Long Island University
B.A., Princeton University                           C.P.A. (Pennsylvania and New York)
M.A./M.Phil., Ph.D., Columbia University             Fredric M. Wild, Jr. (1978)
Jeffrey D. Newman (1995)                             Communication
Biology                                              B.A., Emory University
B.S., University of South Carolina                   M. Div., Yale Divinity School
Ph.D., Marquette University                          M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University
Kurt H. Olsen (1993)                                 Jonathan Williamson (2002)
Psychology                                           Political Science
Marshal of the College                               B.A., University of Houston
B.S., St. Lawrence University                        M.A., Ph.D., Emory University
M.S., Ph.D., University of Rochester                 Cui Yin (2003)
Jeremy D. Ramsey (2005)                              Mathematical Sciences
Chemistry                                            B.S., Qufu Normal University
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania             M.S., Fudam University
Ph.D., The Ohio State University                     Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                       175                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
FACULTY




Instructors                                           Alvaro Bernal (2005)
                                                      Spanish
Deborah J. Holmes (1976)
                                                      B.A., Universidad Pedagogical Nacional, Bogota
Physical Education                                    M.A., Governors State University (Illinois)
B.S., M.S., The Pennsylvania State University         M.A., University of Northern Iowa
Larry D. Pritchett (2005)                             Ph.D., University of Iowa
Mathematical Science                                  Brian J. Bluth (2005)
B.S., University of Wisconsin, Milwaukee              Criminal Justice
                                                      B.S., Carnegie Mellon University
Visiting, Special, and                                J.D., University of Pittsburgh School of Law
Part-time Appointments                                Ph.D., University of Iowa
Diane Abercrombie (1988)                              David Burke (1995)
Mathematical Sciences                                 Biology
B.Bus.Admin., Bernard M. Baruch College, CUNY
                                                      Michelle Burns (2004)
George C. Adams, Jr. (2004)                           Religion
Religion                                              Jerusalem University
B.A., Susquehanna University                          Tel Aviv University
M.A., Ph.D., Fordham University                       B.A., Lycoming College
Mark A. Anderson (2004)                               Len Cagle (2005)
Criminal Justice                                      Foreign Languages
B.S., St. Lawrence University                         B.A., M.A., University of Arkansas
M.S., Northeastern Universtiy


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                176                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                           FACULTY




James Campbell (2003)                               Pamela Gaber (2002)
Education                                           Religion-Archaeology
B.S., Mansfield Univ. of Pennsylvania               B.A., University of Wisconson, Madison
M.Ed., Bloomsburg University                        A.M., Ph.D., Harvard University
Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University                Margaret Gilvary (2002)
Cullen Chandler (2003)                              Education
History                                             B.A., Marywood College
B.A., Austin College                                M.Ed., Bloomsburg University
M.A., Fordham University                            Jay Gordon (2002)
Ph.D., Purdue University                            Education
Ted Chappen (1994)                                  B.A., M.S.Ed., Bucknell University
Philosophy                                          Kathy Görg (2004)
B.A., Bucknell University                           Art
M.A., University of Chicago                         B.A., Kutztown University
Katharine Cimini (1992)                             Robert Graham (2003)
Psychology                                          Theatre
B.A., Lycoming College                              B.A., Kennesaw State University
M.A., College of William and Mary                   M.F.A., Indiana University
Joan Moyer Clark (1987)
                                                    Charles Guttendorf (2003)
Music/Theatre
                                                    Criminal Justice
Regina Collins (1991)                               B.A., M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
Assistant Dean for Freshmen/Mathematical
                                                    Raymond Huff (2004)
  Sciences
                                                    Education
B.A., Rosemont College
                                                    B.S., Lock Haven Univ. of Pennsylvania
M.S., Bucknell University
                                                    M.S., Bucknell University
Susan Curry (2004)
                                                    Carol Johnson (2004)
Education
                                                    Education
B.A., Lycoming College
                                                    B.A., Lycoming College
B.S.Ed., Lock Haven State University
Roger Davis (1984)                                  Jeremiah Johnson (2004)
Computers/Mathematics                               Theatre
B.S., M.S., Pennsylvania State University           B.F.A., Tyler School of Art of Temple University
                                                    M.F.A., Syracuse University
Pamela Dill (1990)                                  Craig Kauffman (1994)
Wellness                                            Art
B.S.N., University of the State of New York         B.S., Kutztown State College
  at Albany
M.S.N., University of Pennsylvania                  Jennifer L. Knapp (2004)
                                                    Communication
Sherry Fagnano (1999)                               B.A., Canisius College
Mathematical Sciences                               M.S., West Virginia University
B.A., Lycoming College
                                                    Don M. Larrabee, II (1972)
Kathy Furman (2002)                                 Lecturer in Law
Education                                           A.B., Franklin and Marshall College
B.A., Oral Roberts University                       LL.B., Fordham University
M.S. Wilkes University

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                      177                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
FACULTY




Lillian Lindsay (2004)                          Todd Preston (2003)
Physical Education                              English
B.A., Mansfield University                      B.A., State University of New York at Geneseo
Lisa McNerney (2002)                            M.A., State University of New York, Albany
Foreign Languages                               Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University
B.S., University of Oregon                      Gene Remoff (2003)
M.A., Bloomsburg University                     Business Administration
Maria Missigman (2004)                          B.S., Fairleigh Dickinson University
Education                                       M.B.A., Temple University
B.A., Lycoming College                          M.S., University of Pennsylvania
John Mitchell (1999)                            Larry Rhinehart (2001)
Psychology                                      Education
B.A., Florida State University                  B.S., Mansfield State University
Psy.D., Indiana State University                M.S.Ed., Bucknell University
Barbara Most (2004)                             Kim Rhone (1999)
Theatre                                         Art
B.S., Mansfield University                      B.A., Lycoming College
M.A., Marywood University                       Edward R. Robbins (2001)
Kevin Nestor (2004)                             Criminal Justice
Astronomy/Physics                               B.A., Mansfield State University
B.A., B.S., Lycoming College                    M.S., Shippensburg University
Janice Ogurcak (2001)                           Anthony Salvatori (1988)
Communication, Advisor to The Lycourier         Education
B.A., Pennsylvania State University             B.S., Lock Haven State University
                                                M.Ed., Bloomsburg University
Jo-Ann Pacenta (2004)
Accounting                                      Stafford Smith (2004)
B.S., York College of Pennsylvania              Art
M.B.A., Pace University                         B.A., Wesleyan University
                                                M.F.A., Cornell University
Janet Patterson (2003)
Education                                       James States (2003)
B.A., The King's College, New York              Art
M.Ed., Bloomsburg University                    B.A., Lycoming College
Hans Conrad Philippen (2004)                    Kathryn Turner Sterngold (1992)
Psychology                                      Art
B.S., Towson State University                   B.S., Kutztown University
M.A., Ph.D., Hofstra University                 M.A., Alfred University
Valerie J. Postal (2005)                        Andrea Tira (2003)
Education                                       Foreign Languages
B.S., Pennsylvania State University             B.A., Franklin & Marshall College
                                                M.Ed., Temple University
M.S.Ed., Bucknell University
                                                LouAnn Tom (1999)
                                                Chemistry
                                                B.A., Lycoming College
                                                M.S., Bucknell University

LYCOMING COLLEGE                          178                         2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                             FACULTY




Robin Van Auken (2002)                                 Richard Campbell (1989)
Communication                                          Woodwinds
B.A., M.A., University of South Florida                B.M., Eastman School of Music
Jennifer N. Welch (2004)                               Reuben Councill (2004)
English                                                Woodwinds
B.A., Mount Holyoke College                            B.M.E., The Univ. of N.C. at Greensboro
M.A., Middlebury College                               M.A., Western Carolina University
Bradley Williams (2003)                                Robert Ensinger (2004)
Psychology                                             Brass
B.A., Lycoming College                                 B.M.Ed., Ithaca College
M.S., Miami University                                 Donald J. Fisher (2003)
Tiffany Wishard (2000)                                 Percussion
Criminal Justice/Political Science                     B.S., Indiana Univ. of Pennsylvania
B.A., Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State         Jaclyn Gilbert (2003)
  University                                           Voice
J.D., The Dickenson School of Law                      B.S., The Pennsylvania State University
Christopher J. Woodruff (2000)                         Robert Hickey (2002)
Music                                                  Woodwinds
B.M.E., Louisiana State University                     B.S., The Pennsylvania State University
M.Mus., Northwestern University
                                                       Richard J. Lakey (1979)
Karen Younger (2004)                                   Organ and Piano
History                                                A.B., Westminster Choir College
B.A., Trinity International University                 M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
M.Div., Gordon-Conwell Theological
Seminary                                               Yvonne Lundquist (1992)
M.A., Northern Illinois University                     Piano
                                                       B.A., Lycoming College
Applied Music Instructors                              Charles Masters (2003)
Richard Adams (2002)                                   Accompanist
Woodwinds                                              Carina McNear (1998)
B.A., Lycoming College                                 Voice
Rebecca Anstey (2001)                                  B.A., Lycoming College
Brass                                                  M.Music., The Pennsylvania State University
B.Mus., Lawrence University                            Janice Miller Mianulli (2001)
M.Mus., Eastman School of Music                        Voice
Melissa Becker (2003)                                  B.M.E., Westminister Choir College
Strings                                                M.M. in Vocal Performance and Pedagogy,
B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania               The Pennsylvania State University
B.M., M.A., M.M., The Pennsylvania State               Andrew Rammon (2001)
  University                                           Strings
Tim Breon (1998)                                       B.A., Pepperdine University
Electronic Music Lab                                   M.Music, The Cleveland Institute of Music
PA Governor's School for the Arts



2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                         179                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
FACULTY




Wendy Savoy (2003)                                 Loretta A. Moffatt, B.S., MT (ASCP)
Voice                                              Program Director
B.M., Mansfield University of Pennsylvania         Williamsport Hospital CLS Program
Jennifer Schmidt (2003)                            Williamsport, PA 17701
Voice                                              Barbara J. Scheelje, B.S., MT (ASCP)
B.M., San Jose State University                    Program Director, School of
M.M., Northwestern University                      Medical Technology
Valerie Whyman (2004)                              Abington Memorial Hospital
Brass                                              Abington, PA 19001
B.A., University of Surrey                         Brian D. Spezialetti, M.S., M.T. (ASCP)
PGCE, Roehampton Institute, London                 Program Director
                                                   Clinical Laboratory Science Program
Adjunct Faculty & Staff                            Robert Packer Hospital
Manjula Balasubramanian, M.D.                      Sayre, PA 18840
Medical Director, Clinical Laboratory
Science Program Graduate Hospital                  Emeriti
Philadelphia, PA 19146                             Susan Alexander
                                                   Associate Professor Emerita of Sociology
Jean Buchenhorst, M.S., MT (ASCP)                  B.A., M.A., Ph.D., American University
Program Director, Clinical Laboratory
Science Program Graduate Hospital                  Robert B. Angstadt
Philadelphia, PA 19146                             Professor Emeritus of Biology
                                                   B.S., Ursinus College
Paul J. Cherney, M.D.                              M.S., Ph.D., Cornell University
Medical Director, School of Medical Technology
                                                   Jon R. Bogle
Abington Memorial Hospital                         Professor Emeritus of Art
Abington, PA 19001                                 B.F.A., B.S., M.F.A., Tyler School of Art;
James Eastman, M.D.                                Temple University
Medical Director, School of Medical Technology     Clarence W. Burch
The Lancaster General Hospital                     Professor Emeritus of Physical Education
Lancaster, PA 17603                                B.S., M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh
Nadine Gladfelter, M.S., MT (ASCP)                 Mr. John H. Conrad
Program Director, School of Medical Technology     Professor Emeritus of Education
The Lancaster General Hospital                     B.S., Mansfield State College
Lancaster, PA 17603                                M.A., New York University
                                                   Jack D. Diehl, Jr. (1971)
Joseph T. King, M.D.
                                                   Professor Emeritus of Biology
Medical Advisor & Associate Pathologist            B.S., M.A., Sam Houston State University
Clinical Laboratory Science Program                M.S., Ph.D., University of Connecticut
Robert Packer Hospital
                                                   Robert F. Falk
Sayre, PA 18840                                    Professor Emeritus of Theatre
Willem Lubbe, M.D.                                 B.A., B.D., Drew University
Medical Director CLS Program                       M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University
Williamsport Hospital                              Dr. Morton A. Fineman
Williamsport, PA 17701                             Professor Emeritus of Physics
                                                   B.A., Indiana University
                                                   Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                 180                     2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                         ATHLETIC STAFF




David A. Franz                                           Kathleen D. Pagana
Professor Emeritus of Chemistry                          Professor Emerita of Nursing
A.B., Princeton University                               B.S.N., University of Maryland
                                                         M.S.N., Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania
M.A.T., The Johns Hopkins University
Ph.D., University of Virginia                            Doris P. Parrish
                                                         Associate Professor Emerita of Nursing
Ernest P. Giglio                                         B.S., SUNY at Plattsburgh
Professor Emeritus of Political Science                  M.S., Russell Sage College
B.A., Queens College                                     Ph.D., University of Texas at Austin
M.A., SUNY at Albany                                     Robert W. Rabold
Ph.D., Syracuse University                               Professor Emeritus of Economics
Eduardo Guerra                                           B.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Professor Emeritus of Religion                           M.A., Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh
B.D., Southern Methodist University                      David J. Rife
S.T.M., Ph.D., Union Theological Seminary                Professor Emeritus of English
John G. Hancock                                          B.A., University of Florida
Professor Emeritus of Psychology                         M.A., Ph.D., Southern Illinois University
B.S., M.S. Bucknell University
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University                 Logan A. Richmond
John G. Hollenback                                       Professor Emeritus of Accounting
Professor Emeritus of Business Administration            B.S., Lycoming College
B.S., M.B.A., University of Pennsylvania                 M.B.A., New York University
                                                         C.P.A. (Pennsylvania)
James K. Hummer
Professor Emeritus of Chemistry                          Mary Landon Russell
B.N.S., Tufts University                                 Associate Professor Emerita of Music
M.S., Middlebury College                                 Mus. B., Susquehanna University
Ph.D., University of North Carolina                      Conservatory of Music
                                                         M.A., The Pennsylvania State University
Bruce M. Hurlbert
Associate Professor Emeritus of Library Services         Louise R. Schaeffer
B.A., The Citadel                                        Associate Professor Emerita of Education
M.S.L.S., Florida State University                       B.A., Lycoming College
                                                         M.A., Bucknell University
M. Raymond Jamison                                       D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics
B.S., Ursinus College                                    James W. Sheaffer
M.S., Bucknell University                                Associate Professor Emeritus of Music
                                                         B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania
Emily R. Jensen                                          M.S., University of Pennsylvania
Professor Emerita of English
B.A., Jamestown College                                  Frances K. Skeath
M.A., University of Denver                               Professor Emerita of Mathematics
Ph.D., The Pennsylvania State University                 A.B., M.A., Bucknell University
                                                         D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University
Robert J. B. Maples
Associate Professor Emeritus of Foreign Lang.            John A. Stuart
A.B. , University of Rochester                           Professor Emeritus of English
Ph.D., Yale University                                   B.A., William Jewell College
                                                         M.A., Ph.D., Northwestern University
Roger W. Opdahl
Professor Emeritus of Economics                          Robert A. Zaccaria
A.B., Hofstra University                                 Associate Professor Emeritus of Biology
M.A., Columbia University                                B.A., Bridgewater College
D. Ed., The Pennsylvania State University                Ph.D., University of Virginia

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           181                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ATHLETIC STAFF




   ATHLETIC STAFF




Kara Bates                               John Dorner
Head Women's Lacrosse Coach              Head Men’s Tennis Coach
B.S., Bowling Green State University     Kara DuMond
B.S., SUNY at Brockport                  Assistant Women's Soccer Coach
Jason Betz                               B.S., Messiah College
Assistant Wrestling Coach                Royce Eyer
B.S., Pennsylvania State University      Assistant Wrestling Coach
David Bower                              B.A., Lycoming College
Football Coach                           Mike Fiamingo
B.A., Lock Haven University              Assistant Wrestling Coach
Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University     B.S., Mansfield University
Gary Brown                               Marshall Fisher
Assistant Football Coach                 Assistant Football Coach
Roger Crebs                              B.S., Lock Haven University
Head Wrestling Coach                     Robyn Flaherty
B.A., Lycoming College                   Assistant Women’s Basketball Coach
A. C. Cruz                               B.A., Lycoming College
Strength Coach                           Donald Friday
B.A., Lycoming College                   Head Men's Basketball Coach
Robert L. Curry                          B.S., M.B.A., Lebanon Valley
Associate Athletic Director              Frank L. Girardi
B.A., Lycoming College                   Director of Athletics
Christen Ditzler                         Head Football Coach
Head Women’s Basketball Coach            B.S., West Chester State College
Head Women’s Softball Coach
B.A., Franklin & Marshall College
LYCOMING COLLEGE                       182                   2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                ATHLETIC STAFF




Jerry Girardi                                     Dan Muthler
Assistant Football Coach                          Assistant Wrestling Coach
B.A., Lycoming College                            B.S., U.S. Naval Academy
Gerald Hammaker                                   Frank Neu
Head Men’s & Women’s Swimming Coach               Head Athletic Trainer
B.A., The College of Wooster                      B.A., Central College
Kristi Hammaker                                   M.S., Drake University
Assistant Swimming Coach                          Tom Packard
B.S., Clarion University                          Assistant Volleyball Coach
M.H.A., Pennsylvania State University             Mike Pearson
Scott Hill                                        Assistant Football Coach
Assistant Football Coach                          B.A., Lycoming College
B.A., Lycoming College                            Jeffrey Rauff
Deborah J. Holmes                                 Assistant Swimming Coach
Women’s Tennis Coach                              B.A., Lycoming College
B.S., M.S., Pennsylvania State University         Shawn Rosa
Vonnie Kaiser                                     Head Men’s Lacrosse Coach
Assistant Women's Tennis Coach                    B.A., Lycoming College
B.A., Lycoming College                            Kathy Schick
Scott Kennell                                     Cheerleading Advisor
Head Men’s & Women's Soccer Coach                 Jesse Smith
B.S., North Carolina Wesleyan College             Assistant Football Coach
Lyndy LeVan                                       Jamie Spencer
Assistant Women's Basketball Coach                Head Golf Coach
B.A., Lycoming College                            B.A., Lycoming College
Trevor Loehr                                      David Stark
Assistant Men's Soccer Coach                      Assistant Men's Basketball Coach
B.S., Lycoming College                            B.A., Lycoming College
Kathy Loy                                         Mike Weber
Assistant Women’s Basketball Coach                Assistant Football Coach
B.A., Shippensburg University                     B.A., Lycoming College
M.Ed., M.A., Bloomsburg University
                                                  Darin Wheeler
Joe Lumbis                                        Assistant Athletic Trainer
Equipment Manager                                 B.A., Gardner-Webb University
Joseph Lutz                                       Steve Wiser
Assistant Men's Lacrosse Coach                    Assistant Football Coach
B.A., Lycoming College                            B.A., Lycoming College
Timothy P. McMahon                                Adrienne Wydra
Head Women’s Volleyball Coach                     Head Cross Country Coach
A.B., Penn College                                B.A., Lycoming College
B.S. Mgnt., Lock Haven University
                                                  Matt Yonkin
Scott Miner                                       Assistant Wrestling Coach
Assistant Men's Basketball Coach                  B.A., Lycoming College
B.S., Bloomsburg
                                                  Richard Zalonis
Joe Moore                                         Assistant Football Coach
Assistant Women's Softball Coach                  B.A., Lock Haven University




2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                    183                              LYCOMING COLLEGE
ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT STAFF




  ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT STAFF




Clifford E. Allen                          Diane M. Carl
Security Officer                           Executive Secretary to President
Daniel E. Allen                            Barbara J. Carlin
Security Officer                           Executive Secretary to Dean of
Lorri Amrom                                  Admissions & Financial Aid
Faculty Secretary                          Kathryn M. Casale
Lisa D. Barrett                            Faculty Secretary
Library Technician, Technical Services     Diana L. Cleveland
Melody A. Bartlett                         System Administrator
Secretary, Director of Physical Plant      Carol J. Counsil
Cynthia Bezilla                            Secretary, Residence Life
Library Evening Proctor                    June V. Creveling
Beth Bickel                                Secretary, Buildings & Grounds
Accounts Payable Coordinator                and Safety & Security
Brigitte C. Brahms                         Joseph J. D'Amico
Telecommunications Coordinator             End User Support Specialist
Chad W. Buttorff                           Mary E. Dahlgren
Security Officer                           Data Information Specialist & Project
                                             Supervisor

LYCOMING COLLEGE                         184                    2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                         ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT STAFF




Linda R. Delong                                       David M. Kelchner
Switchboard Operator, Receptionist                    Systems Analyst
Jonathan DeSantis                                     Margaret I. Kimble
Staff Technician                                      Secretary, Career Development Center
Rosemarie DiRocco                                     Linda J. Lapp
Faculty Secretary, Music & Art/Gallery                Library Evening Proctor
 Director                                             Bruce K. Larka
Julia Dougherty                                       Security Officer
Library Technician, Archives                          Donna M. Laughrey
Terri R. Driscoll                                     Purchasing Coordinator
Textbook/Supply Coordinator                           Tina J. Lorson
Debra Fedroff                                         Housing Coordinator
Mailroom Coordinator                                  Cathi A. Lutz
Peggy Fenstermacher                                   Human Resources Coordinator
Information Data Specialist, Secretary                John J. Maness
Douglas F. Fetzer                                     Security Shift Supervisor
Shift Supervisor, Security                            Patricia J. McClintock
Beatrice D. Gamble                                    Box Office & House Manager
Student Information Specialist                        Erin M. McCormick
Geralynn A. Gerber                                    Assistant to the Registrar
Campus Store Assistant                                Nielin L. Meredith
Ethel M. Gilbert                                      Admissions Data Entry Clerk
Switchboard Operator & Receptionist                   Tracy B. Miles
Diane J. Hassinger                                    Special Events Coordinator, Executive
Executive Secretary to Dean of College                 Secretary
Ali I. Helminiak                                      Nikole L. Miller
Cashier & Bookkeeper                                  Help Desk Coordinator
Esther L. Henninger                                   Rebecca R. Miller
Secretary, Athletics                                  Secretary, Financial Aid
MaryAnn Hollenbach                                    Tara Miller
Faculty Secretary                                     Payroll & Student Loan Coordinator
Barbara E. Horn                                       Marlene L. Neece
Faculty Secretary                                     Library Technician, Document Delivery
Tamara Hutson                                         Susan Nelson
Library Technician, Assistant to the Director         Library Technician, Access Services
Sandra L. Jansson                                     Ben Pelipesky
Secretary, College Relations                          Media Technology Coordinator
Ronald A. Johnson                                     Laura T. Printzenhoff
Security Officer                                      Faculty Secretary


2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                        185                                LYCOMING COLLEGE
ADMINISTRATIVE SUPPORT STAFF




Wilma L Reeder                                 Donna A. Weaver
Library Technician, Serials Manager            Secretary, Student Programs/Leadership
Diana Salamone                                   Development
Coordinator of Student Computing               Roberta Wheeler
Mary E. Savoy                                  Secretary, Athletics
Director of Advancement Services               Mary S. White
Brenda Schmick                                 Campus Store Clerk
Gift Records Specialist & Secretary            Joyce E. Wilson
Debbie Smith                                   Secretary, Assistant Dean for Freshmen
Administrative Assistant to Annual Giving      Jean C. Wool
Marilyn E. Smith                               Executive Secretary to Dean of Student Affairs
Printing Services Assistant                    Cristen J. Yothers
Gail M. Spencer                                Security Shift Supervisor
Library Technician, Circulation Supervisor     Salvatore Zangara
Amy L. Starr                                   Mailroom Assistant
Programmer Analyst
Sheran L. Swank
Faculty Secretary
Judy E. Walker
Secretary, Health Services


LYCOMING COLLEGE                             186                      2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                   ALUMNI ASSOCIATION




  ALUMNI ASSOCIATION




   The Lycoming College Alumni Association               who have successfully completed one year of
has a membership of over 13,000 men and                  study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior
women. It is governed by an Executive Board              College or Lycoming College are considered
consisting of 32 members-at-large. The Board             members of the association.
includes members representing various class                  Acting as the representative of alumni on
years and geographic areas, the senior class             the campus and working also with under-
president, the current student body president,           graduates, the Alumni Office is responsible
and past president of the last graduating class          for keeping alumni informed and interested in
and the Student Senate of Lycoming College.              the programs, growth and activities of the
The Director of Alumni & Parent Programs                 College through regular publications mailed
manages the activities of the Alumni Office.             to all alumni on record. Arrangements for
   The Alumni Association has the following              Homecoming, Class Reunions, Family
purpose as stated in the constitution: “As an            Weekend, Regional Alumni Chapter events
off-campus constituency, the Association’s               and meetings meetings, and similar activities
purpose is to seek ways of maintaining an active         are coordinated through this office. Through
and mutually beneficial relationship between the         the Lycoming College Annual Fund, the
College and its alumni, utilizing their talents,         Alumni office is closely associated with the
resources and counsel to further the objec-              development program of the college. Com-
tives and programs of Lycoming College.”                 munications to the Alumni Association
    All former students of Williamsport                  should be addressed to the Alumni & Parent
Dickinson Seminary and all former students               Programs Office.

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                           187                               LYCOMING COLLEGE
ALUMNI ASSOCIATION EXECUTIVE BOARD




 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION EXECUTIVE BOARD




TERM EXPIRES OCTOBER 2008                  TERM EXPIRES OCTOBER 2005
Joseph M. Wade ’90                         D. Keigh Earisman ’58
Kari L. Hebble ’86                         Andrew Gross ’59
W. Clark Gaughan ’77                       John Lea, III ’80
Lynn Cruickshank ’84                       Erman E. Lepley, JR. ’78
Ann Wood ‘73                               John T. Murray, III ’81
                                           Matthew T. Pivirotto ’98
TERM EXPIRES OCTOBER 2007
                                           James G. Scott ’70
Thomas Beamer ’74
                                           Gary Spies ’72
Andrew A. Bucke ’71
David E. Detwiler, III ’75
Heather Duda ’98                           Members of the Board Serving a
David Freet ’68                            One-Year Term
John J. Joe ’59                            Student Senate of Lycoming College
Mark J. Ohlinger ’92
                                           (SSLC) President
TERM EXPIRES OCTOBER 2006                  Emily Lubold ’05
Brian L. Belz ’96
Brenda J. Bowser ’98                       (SSLC) Past President
A. Davin D’Ambrosio ’86                    Christine M. Collela ’04
Nancy Gieniec ’59                          2005 Senior Class President
John C. Shorb ’76                          Pamela Tipler
Brian D. Vasey ’81
David A. Walsh ’76                         2004 Senior Class President
                                           Timothy F. Sullivan ’04

LYCOMING COLLEGE                     188                        2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                                                    INDEX




  INDEX
                                                                        Astronomy and Physics .............................. 65
                                                                        Astronomy Curriculum ............................... 65
                                                                        Audit ........................................................... 28
                                                                        Biology Curriculum .................................... 71
                                                                        Board of Trustees ...................................... 168
                                                                        Business Administration Curriculum ......... 79
                                                                        Campus Facilities ......................................... 6
                                                                        Capitol Semester ......................................... 50
                                                                        Career Development Services .................... 22
                                                                        Chemistry Curriculum ................................ 83
                                                                        Christian Ministry, Advising for ................ 47
                                                                        Class Attendance ........................................ 28
                                                                        College and the Church ................................ 6
                                                                        College Level Examination
                                                                         Program (CLEP) ...................................... 26
                                                                        Communication Curriculum ....................... 87
                                                                        Community Service Curriculum ............... 144
                                                                        Computer Science Curriculum ................. 126
                                                                        Conduct, Standards of ................................ 24
                                                                        Contingency Deposits ................................. 14
                                                                        Cooperative Programs ................................ 40
                                                                         Engineering .............................................. 40
                                                                         Environmental Studies ............................. 40
                                                                         Forestry .................................................... 40
Academic Advising .................................... 46                Medical Technology ................................ 41
Academic Calendar ....................................... 2              Military Science ....................................... 42
Academic Honesty/Standing ................. 30-31                        Optometry ................................................ 42
Academic Honors ....................................... 31               Podiatry .................................................... 42
Academic Program ..................................... 32               Counseling, Personal .................................. 23
Accounting Curriculum .............................. 53                 Course Credit by Examination ................... 26
Accounting-Mathematics ............................ 56                  Creative Writing ....................................... 105
Admission to Lycoming ............................. 10                  Criminal Justice Curriculum ...................... 92
Advanced Placement .................................. 26                Cultural Diversity ....................................... 35
Advanced Standing by Transfer ........... 11, 26                        Degree Programs/Requirements ................. 33
Allopathic Medicine, Preparation ............... 46                     Dental School, Preparation ......................... 39
Alumni Association .................................. 188               Departmental Honors .................................. 45
American Studies Curriculum .................... 57                     Deposits/Deposit Refunds .......................... 14
Anthropology Curriculum ........................ 157                    Distribution Requirements .......................... 34
Application Fee and Deposits ..................... 13                    English ..................................................... 35
Applied Music Requirements ................... 137                       Fine Arts .................................................. 35
Archaeology and Culture of the Ancient                                   Foreign Language .................................... 35
 Near East ................................................. 58          Humanities ............................................... 35
Art Curriculum ........................................... 59

2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                                          189                                             LYCOMING COLLEGE
INDEX




  Mathematics ............................................ 35          German Curriculum .................................. 113
  Natural Sciences ...................................... 35           Grading System .......................................... 28
  Social Sciences ........................................ 35          Graduation Requirements ............................ 34
Economics Curriculum ............................... 95                Greek Curriculum ...................................... 155
Education Curriculum ................................ 99               Health Professions, Preparation ................... 46
Educational Opportunity Grants ................. 19                    Health Services ............................................ 23
Engineering, Cooperative Program ............ 40                       Hebrew Curriculum ................................... 156
English Curriculum .................................. 105              History Curriculum .................................... 117
English Requirement .................................. 35              Honors Program ........................................... 43
Entrance Examination (CEEB) ................... 26                     Honor Societies ........................................... 32
Environmental Science Minor .................... 73                    Humanities Requirement ............................. 35
Environmental Studies ................................ 40              Independent Study ....................................... 48
Established Interdisciplinary Major ............ 38                    Institute for Management Studies .............. 121
Faculty ...................................................... 172     Interdisciplinary Majors ............................... 38
Financial Aid/Assistance ............................ 16                 Established Majors ................................... 38
Financial Matters ........................................ 13            Individual Majors ..................................... 38
Fine Arts Requirements .............................. 35               International Studies .................................. 123
Foreign Language Requirement .................. 35                     Internship Programs ..................................... 49
Foreign Languages and                                                  Legal Professions, Preparation .................... 39
  Literatures Curriculum .......................... 110                Literature ................................................... 125
Forestry, Cooperative Program ................... 40                   Loans ........................................................... 20
French Curriculum .................................... 111             Lycoming Scholar Program ......................... 43


LYCOMING COLLEGE                                                     190                               2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
                                                                                                                                    INDEX




Major ........................................................... 37         Spanish Curriculum ................................... 115
  Admission to ............................................. 37              Staff ........................................... 169, 182, 184
  Departmental ............................................ 37               State Grants and Loans ................................ 20
  Interdisciplinary ........................................ 38              Student Records ........................................... 27
Management Scholars Program ................. 121                            Study Abroad ............................................... 50
Mathematical Sciences .............................. 126                     Supplemental Educational
Mathematic Requirements ........................... 35                         Opportunity Grant (SEOG) ...................... 20
Mathematics Curriculum ........................... 128                       Theatre Curriculum ................................... 161
May Term .................................................... 48             Theological Professions, Advising .............. 47
Medical School, Preparation ....................... 46                       Transfer Credit ........................................ 11,26
Medical Technology .................................... 41                   Unit Course System ..................................... 25
Military Science Curriculum ..................... 132                        United Nations Semester ............................. 50
Minor ........................................................... 38         Washington Semester .................................. 50
Music Curriculum ...................................... 134                  Wellness Curriculum ................................. 143
Natural Science Requirement ...................... 35                        Withdrawal from College ............................ 28
Non-degree Students .................................... 27                  Withdrawal of Admissions Offer ................ 12
Optometry .................................................... 42            Women’s and Gender Studies .................. 167
Optometry School, Preparation ................... 46                         Work-Study Grants ...................................... 21
Osteopathy School, Preparation .................. 46                         Writing Across The Curriculum Program ... 36
Oxford-Brookes Semester ........................... 51
Payment of Fees ........................................... 14
Philadelphia Semester ................................. 50
Philosophy Curriculum .............................. 139
Physical Activity, Wellness
  & Community Service Program ............. 143
Physical Activity Curriculum .................... 143
Physics Curriculum ...................................... 68
Placement Services ...................................... 20
Podiatric Medicine,
  Cooperative Program ................................ 42
Political Science Curriculum ..................... 145
Pre-Medicine ............................................... 39
Psychology Curriculum ............................. 148
Readmission ................................................ 12
Refunds ........................................................ 14
Registration .................................................. 27
Religion Curriculum .................................. 152
Repeated Courses ........................................ 30
Reserve Officer Training
  Corps Program (ROTC) ........................... 42
Residence and Residence Halls ..................... 7
Scholarships/Grants ..................................... 19
Scholarships (ROTC) .................................. 21
Scholar Seminar ......................................... 156
Social Science Requirement ........................ 35
Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum ........ 157
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG                                               191                                          LYCOMING COLLEGE
 COMMUNICATING WITH LYCOMING COLLEGE
Please address specific                        All correspondence
inquiries as follows:                          should be addressed to:
                                                Lycoming College
Director of Admissions:
                                                700 College Place
 Admissions; requests for publications
                                                Williamsport, PA 17701-5192
Treasurer:
 Payment of bills; expenses                    The College telephone number
                                               is (570) 321-4000
Director of Financial Aid:
 Scholarships and loan fund;                   http://www.lycoming.edu
 financial assistance
Dean of the College:                           Visitors
 Academic programs; faculty;                   Lycoming welcomes visitors to the
 faculty activities; academic support          campus. If you would like a guided tour,
 services                                      call the Office of Admissions
Assistant Dean for Freshmen:                   (570) 321-4026 before your visit to
 Freshman Seminar; freshman                    arrange a mutually convenient time.
 academic concerns
Dean of Student Affairs:                       Toll Free Number 1-800-345-3920
 Student activities; residence halls;
                                               e-mail: admissions@lycoming.edu
 religious life; health services
Registrar:                                     NON-DISCRIMINATION POLICY
 Student records; transcript requests;             Lycoming College does not discriminate in
 academic policies                             admission, employment or administration of
Career Development Center:                     its programs or activities on the basis of race,
 Career counseling; employment                 color, national origin, sex, age or disability of
 opportunities                                 1972, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of
Vice President for Development:                1973, the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, or
 Institutional relations; annual fund;         other federal, state or local laws, or executive
 gift programs                                 orders.
                                                   As a matter of policy, and/or in accordance
Athletic Director:                             with applicable law, Lycoming College does
 Varsity Sports                                not discriminate in admission, employment or
Director of Alumni and                         administration of its programs or activities on
Parent Programs:                               the basis of religion, ancestry, political belief,
 Alumni information; Homecoming;               veteran status, or sexual orientation.
 Family Weekend activities                         Inquiries concerning application of this
                                               policy should be directed to the Director of
Director of College Relations:                 Human Resources, Lycoming College,
 Public information; publications;             112 Long Hall, Williamsport, PA 17701,
 sports information; media relations            (570) 321-4309.


LYCOMING COLLEGE                         192                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG
2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG   193   LYCOMING COLLEGE
  THE MISSION                                              THE BACCALAUREATE
    The mission of Lycoming College is to                  DEGREE
provide a distinguished baccalaureate educa-
tion in the liberal arts. This is achieved within              Lycoming College is committed to the
a coeducational, supportive, residential setting          principle that a liberal arts education is the
through programs that develop communica-                  ideal foundation for an informed and produc-
tion and critical thinking skills; foster self-           tive life. The liberal arts - including the fine
awareness while increasing receptivity to new             arts, the humanities, mathematics, the natural
concepts and perspectives; explore literary and           and social sciences - have created the social,
scientific traditions; cultivate an aesthetic             political, economic and intellectual systems
sensibility; elicit social responsibility;                which help define contemporary existence.
promote racial inclusiveness, gender equality,            Therefore, it is essential that students grasp
and an appreciation of cultural diversity; and            the modes of inquiry and knowledge associ-
produce leadership for the institutions of                ated with these disciplines.
society. Each student is encouraged to                        Consequently, the Baccalaureate degree
develop and strengthen virtues and traits of              (Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Science) is
character that enable, ennoble, and emancipate            conferred upon the student who has com-
the human spirit while deepening commitment               pleted an educational program incorporating
to those values that undergird civilization.              the two principles of the liberal arts known as
    Fully accredited, Lycoming is a member of             distribution and concentration. The objective
the Middle States Association of Colleges and             of the distribution principle is to insure that
Schools, and the University Senate of The                 the student achieves breadth in learning
United Methodist Church. It is a member of                through the study of the major dimensions of
the Association of American Colleges and                  human inquiry: the humanities, the social
Universities, the Pennsylvania Association of             sciences, and the natural sciences. The
Colleges and Universities, the Commission for             objective of the concentration principle is to
Independent Colleges and Universities, the                provide depth of learning through completion
National Commission on Accrediting and the                of a program of study in a given discipline or
National Association of Schools and Colleges              subject area known as the major. The effect
of The United Methodist Church.                           of both principles is to impart knowledge,
    Also, the Department of Chemistry is                  inspire inquiry, and encourage creative
approved by the American Chemical Society                 thought.
to certify upon graduation those students who
meet or exceed the requirements established
by the Society for membership. The depart-
ments of Accounting and Business Adminis-
tration are accredited by the Association of
Collegiate Business Schools and Programs.

LYCOMING COLLEGE                                    194                          2005-06 ACADEMIC CATALOG

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Categories:
Tags:
Stats:
views:33
posted:9/5/2011
language:English
pages:194